Ug NX Workbook Student Manual Design Applications of Unigraphics

UNIGRAPHICS
DESIGN APPLICATIONS USING UNIGRAPHICS

STUDENT MANUAL September 2002 MT10055 - Unigraphics NX
EDS Inc.
Proprietary & Restricted Rights Notices
Copyright Proprietary right of Unigraphics Solutions Inc., its subcontractors, or its suppliers are included in this software, in the data, documentation, or firmware related thereto, and in information disclosed therein. Neither this software, regardless of the form in which it exists, nor such data, information, or firmware may be used or disclosed to others for any purpose except as specifically authorized in writing by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. Recipient by accepting this document or utilizing this software agrees that neither this document nor the information disclosed herein nor any part thereof shall be reproduced or transferred to other documents or used or disclosed to others for manufacturing or any other purpose except as specifically authorized in writing by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. E2002 Electronic Data Systems Corporation. All rights reserved. Restricted Rights Legend The commercial computer software and related documentation are provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to the protections and restrictions as set forth in the Unigraphics Solutions Inc. commercial license for the software and/or documentation as prescribed in DOD FAR 227-7202-3(a), or for Civilian Agencies, in FAR 27.404(b)(2)(i), and any successor or similar regulation, as applicable. Unigraphics Solutions Inc., 10824 Hope Street, Cypress, CA 90630. Warranties and Liabilities All warranties and limitations thereof given by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. are set forth in the license agreement under which the software and/or documentation were provided. Nothing contained within or implied by the language of this document shall be considered to be a modification of such warranties. The information and the software that are the subject of this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Unigraphics Solutions Inc.. Unigraphics Solutions Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may be contained within this document. The software discussed within this document is furnished under separate license agreement and is subject to use only in accordance with the licensing terms and conditions contained therein. Trademarks EDS, the EDS logo, UNIGRAPHICS SOLUTIONSR, UNIGRAPHICSR, GRIPR , PARASOLIDR, UGR, UG/... R, UG SOLUTIONSR, iMANR are trademarks or registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation or its subsidiaries. All other logos or trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.
Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual Publication History: Version 15.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 16.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 17.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 18.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unigraphics NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February 1999 January 2000 November 2000 August 2001 September 2002
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Course Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Course Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classroom System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unigraphics Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Toolbars in Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Toolbars in Modeling Application . . . . . . . . . Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketch Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DegreeofFreedom Arrows (DOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Sketch Constraints Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional Constraint Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Taking Control of the Angular Adjustment . . Editing Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delay Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaluate Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Editing the Adjustment Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Constraint Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show/Remove Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraint Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS All Rights Reserved
-1 -1 -1 -1 -2 -2 -4 -5 -5 -5 -6 -7 -7 -8 -10 -17 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-7 1-7 1-11 1-14 1-15 1-15 1-15 1-16 1-19 1-20 1-23 1-24
i
Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual
Table of Contents
Constraint Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraint Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listing Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dragging Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Adding Geometric Constraints to the Project Add Existing Curves to a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Constraint Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Adding Objects to a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Auto Creating Geometric Constraints . . . . . . Activity 6 - Applying Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert To/From Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 7 - Constraining Tangent Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Another Design Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 8 - Constraining the Perimeter of a Sketch . . . . Activity 9 - Controlling Heat Transfer in a Cooling Pipe Constraint Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternate Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Alternate Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Dragging Sketch Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing sketches where they are needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolving DOFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Creating and Positioning a Sketch . . . . . . . . . Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Positioning a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Using Positioning Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . Reattaching the sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reordering the sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 6 - Reattaching a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 7 - Moving Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring in a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 8 - Mirroring Sketch Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
1-24 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-26 1-26 1-26 1-26 1-27 1-28 1-33 1-34 1-36 1-43 1-47 1-47 1-48 1-49 1-49 1-52 1-53 1-56 1-60 2-1 2-2 2-4 2-10 2-14 2-23 2-23 2-24 2-24 2-31 2-37 2-46 2-47 2-48 2-50 2-64 2-65
Unigraphics NX
Table of Contents
Additional Sketching Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Edit Defining String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Deleting or Suppressing Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Activity 1 - Edit Defining String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Activity 2 - Suppressing and Deleting Sketches . . . . . . . . 3-10 Animate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Activity 3 - Animating Sketch Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Expressions Dialog Box Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to use Cut, Copy, and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculator Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comments In Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expression Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Expressions Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List By . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Working with Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If (then) Else or Conditional Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppression by Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppress by Expression Dialog Box Options . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Creating Conditional Expressions . . . . . . . . . Design Intent Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Geometric Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Geometric Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Applying a Geometric Expression . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-12 4-13 4-13 4-18 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-20 4-21
Duplicating Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Mirror Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Activity 1 - Rectangle Instance Arrays & Mirrored Body 5-4 Mirror Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Selection Steps: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Activity 2 - Creating a Mirror Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
EDS All Rights Reserved Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual
iii
Table of Contents
Copy/Paste Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expression Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parent Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Considerations when using the Copy/Paste Feature . . . . . Activity 3 - Applying the Copy / Paste Feature . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Copying a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemblies Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemblies Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemblies Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Assembly Navigator Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Node Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Navigator Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PopUp Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blank / Unblank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pack or Unpack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Reference Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Parent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Close" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag and Drop in the Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Activating and Using the Assembly Navigator Specifying Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Navigator Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
5-17 5-17 5-17 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-19 5-20 5-24 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-5 6-6 6-6 6-7 6-9 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-17 6-18 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25
Unigraphics NX
Table of Contents
Part File Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Property Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Assemblies User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preview Component on Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Preview Component on Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Concepts Concerning Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Excluding Unwanted Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Representing Components with Simple Geometry . . . . . . Default Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Entire Part" Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Empty" Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Techniques for Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Simplified Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simplified Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Faceted Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Hand and Left Hand Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools to Automate the Creation of Reference Sets . . . . . . Creating Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Origin and Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Set Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Taking a look at Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Reference Sets with the Assemblies pulldown Replacing Reference Sets in context of an Assembly . . . . Reference Sets on the Assembly Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Reference Sets with the Assembly Navigator . Activity 2 - Replacing Reference Sets in an Assembly . . . SubAssembly Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Mass Replacement of Reference Sets . . . . . . . Editing Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Options and Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Load Options and Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . TopDown Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-33 6-34 7-1 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-6 7-6 7-7 7-7 7-8 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-15 7-15 7-17 7-17 7-18 7-19 7-23 7-24 7-32 7-33 7-33 7-34 7-35 8-1 8-2
v
Table of Contents
Top Down Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method Two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the Creation of a New Component . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - TopDown Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . Considerations of Selecting Data During Component Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designing in Context of an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Geometry Outside the Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketching in Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Interpart Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Geometry Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Considerations when Interpart Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Designing in Context of an Assembly . . . . . . . Localized Interpart Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interpart Modeling Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part in Process Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mold/Die Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weldments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - In Process Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Wave Geometry Linker - Mirror Body . . . . . Editing Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broken Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Parent Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Editing a Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 6 - Editing the Time stamp of a Link . . . . . . . . .
8-3 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-7 8-8 8-10 8-11 8-11 8-12 8-12 8-14 8-15 8-16 8-27 8-28 8-28 8-29 8-30 8-31 8-34 8-38 8-39 8-39 8-41 8-46
Interpart Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 General Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Types of Interpart Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Referencing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Overriding Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Creating Interpart Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Edit Interpart Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Load Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Activity 1 - Creating Interpart Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Partial Loading Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Resolving Interpart Expression References . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Tips and Recommended Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Offset Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
vi
Unigraphics NX
Table of Contents
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Activity 1 - Capturing Design Intent with Offset Curves 10-8 Trim Body / Split Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Split Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Windshield Fluid Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Offset a Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taper Direction and Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taper Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapering From Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Angle Tapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isocline and Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapering Tangent to Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Tapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Taper Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Internal & External Taper Directions . . . . . . Activity 4 - Creating a Windshield Fluid Reservoir . . . . . Variable Radius and Cliff Edge Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Radius Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips and Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating a Variable Radius Blend . . . . . . . . . Cliff Edge Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FROM / TO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Mate Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Align Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the CSYS Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Angle Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1 11-2 11-6 11-9 12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-7 12-8 12-8 12-10 12-11 12-11 12-12 12-12 12-15 12-17 12-17 12-18 12-18 12-24 12-29 13-1 13-2 13-4 13-7 13-13 14-1 14-2 14-2 14-2 14-3 14-5 14-5 14-6
vii
Table of Contents
The Parallel Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Perpendicular Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Center Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Distance Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tangent Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraint / Object Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Mating Conditions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Mating Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vary Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Degree of Freedom Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The OK, Apply, and Cancel Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tree Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mating Constraint Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mating Condition Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reposition Component Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Objects or Move Handles Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance or Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snap Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vector Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snap Handles to WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motion Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collision Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop on Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning Components by Dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Mating the Nut Cracker Components . . . . . . Activity 2 - Remember Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Component Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Component Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating a Circular Component Array . . . . . FeatureBased Component Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Template Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Arrays and Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . FeatureBased Array Associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
14-7 14-8 14-9 14-10 14-11 14-11 14-12 14-13 14-14 14-14 14-15 14-15 14-16 14-16 14-17 14-17 14-18 14-20 14-20 14-21 14-21 14-21 14-21 14-21 14-21 14-21 14-22 14-22 14-23 14-24 14-38 15-1 15-2 15-2 15-3 15-4 15-6 15-6 15-7 15-8
Unigraphics NX
Table of Contents
Activity 2 - Creating Feature ISET Component Arrays . . 15-9 Part Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capabilities and General Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Families Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attribute Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chosen Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Part Family Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Family Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating a Family of Standard Parts-Excel Activity 2 - Creating a Family of Standard Parts-Xess . Adding Part Family Members to an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining Information on Family Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Family Of Parts Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Adding a Standard Part to an Assembly . . . . Revisions and Substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Versioning/Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracking Revisions By Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disadvantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revising a Component and Assembly Using Save Part As. The Part Modification Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Assembly Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-1 16-2 16-2 16-3 16-3 16-4 16-4 16-5 16-5 16-5 16-5 16-6 16-6 16-6 16-6 16-6 16-7 16-8 16-8 16-9 16-9 16-9 16-9 16-10 16-15 16-19 16-20 16-22 16-22 16-23 17-1 17-2 17-2 17-2 17-2 17-3 17-4 17-6 17-6
ix
Table of Contents
Where Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Session Where Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Revising Components Using Save As" . . . . . Load Options and Revisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Search Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partial Loading Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legacy Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing Assembly Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reopening Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substituting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Unique Identifier (UID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allow Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substituting Components Using Substitute . . . . . . . . . . . . Substituting Components Using Reopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substituting Components Using the Assembly Navigator Activity 2 - Substituting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternate Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Alternates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Defining and Verifying Alternates . . . . . . . . . Additional Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x
17-7 17-7 17-8 17-12 17-14 17-15 17-15 17-15 17-16 17-17 17-19 17-19 17-20 17-21 17-23 17-24 17-25 17-30 17-31 17-32 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-6 A-9 A-10 A-12 A-14 A-16 A-18 A-20 A-22 A-24 A-26 A-28 A-30 A-32 A-34 A-36
Unigraphics NX
Table of Contents
System Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Interpart Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Versioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Versioning Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expression Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precedence and Associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Builtin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scientific Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1 B-2 B-3 B-3 B-4 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-4
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GL-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN-1
xi
Table of Contents
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
xii
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Course Overview
Course Description
Design Applications Using Unigraphics is a method based course that will focus on creating parametric models that captures design intent in a Master Model environment. Some of the functionality used to accomplish this is: building associativity between expressions, interpart modeling (linking geometry across part files), creating sketches, building assemblies, and creating mating conditions.
Intended Audience
Designers, Engineers, and CAD/CAM managers who have a need to create parametric solid models that capture design intent while working in a Master Model environment.
Course Objectives
After successfully completing this course, the student should be able to:
DCreate DApply
sketches.
Top Down assembly modeling. Interpart expressions. Geometric expressions. a feature.
DCreate DCreate
DCopy/Paste DApply
the Load Options. Reference Sets. in Context.
DCreate DDesign DApply DTrim
Interpart modeling using the WAVE geometry linker.
a solid body. a variable blend.
DCreate
-1
Course Overview DCreate DCreate
an offset face a taper features
DReorder DCreate DCreate
mating conditions between component part files simple part families
Prerequisites
Practical Applications of Unigraphics course Basic understanding of parametric/explicit modeling, and the Master Model Concept. Working knowledge of the following:
DUnigraphics DPart
interface
file saving conventions Curve Creation Primitives Features with Offsets
DBasic DSolid
DSwept DWCS DLayer DForm
& Absolute coordinate systems control Features & positioning dimensions blends
DSimple
How to Use This Manual

It is important that you use the Student Manual in the sequence presented because later lessons assume you have learned concepts and techniques taught in an earlier lesson. If necessary, you can always refer to any previous activity where a method or technique was originally taught.
-2
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
The general format for lesson content is:

Dlecture Dactivity Dproject Dsummary
The format of the activities is consistent throughout this manual. Steps are labeled and specify what will be accomplished at any given point in the activity. Below each step are action boxes which emphasize the individual actions that must be taken to accomplish the step. As your knowledge of Unigraphics increases, the action boxes will seem redundant as the step text becomes all that is needed to accomplish a given task. Step 1 Open part file dau_topic_1.
-
From the menu bar, select File Choose Open. Double-click on the parts sub-directory. Select the file dau_topic_1 and choose OK.
While working through lesson activities, you will experience a higher degree of comprehension if you read the CUE and Status lines. It is recommended that students who prefer more detail from an Instructor Led Course ask questions, confirm with restatement, and, more importantly, attend and pay attention to the instruction as it is given. Obviously, it is always necessary for students to consider the classroom situation and be considerate of other students who may have greater or lesser needs for instruction. Instructors cannot possibly meet the exact needs of every student. At the start of each class day you will be expected to log onto your terminal and start Unigraphics, being ready to follow the instructor's curriculum. At the end of the day's class you should always quit Unigraphics and log off the terminal.
-3
Course Overview
Classroom System Information

Your instructor will provide you with the following items for working in the classroom: Student Login: Username: Password: Home Directory: Parts Directory: Instructor: Date:
-4
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Class Standards
The following standards will be used in this class. Standardization allows users to work with and predict the organization of parts created by others . All work should be performed in accordance with these standards.
About Part File Naming

In order to facilitate the identification of design models without requiring the user to open a part file, the user community must establish standard names for the various files associated with the part definition. The following is a sample usage of a filenaming standard:
part name (25 characters) revision (4 characters)
xxx_xxxxxxxxxxxx_xxxx_xxxxprt
identifier (3 characters) configuration (4 characters) extension (4 characters)
TIP
Currently up to 128 characters are valid for file names. A four character extension (.prt) is automatically added to define the file type. This means the maximum number of user defined characters for the file name is actually 124.
Class Part File Naming

This course utilizes the following filenaming standard:
underscore delimiter part name unique identifier number
dau_ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x _ x p r t
course identifier (3 characters) underscore delimiter extension (4 characters)
-5
Course Overview
Where the student is requested to save a part file for later use, the initials of the student's given name, middle name, and surname replace the course identifier dau" in the new filename with the remainder of the filename matching the original.
Seed Part
Seed parts are an effective tool for establishing customer defaults or any settings that are partdependent (saved with the part file). This may include nongeometric data such as:
D D D D D
Preferences Commonly used expressions Layer categories Userdefined views and layouts Part attributes
TIP
Once a seed part is established, it should be writeprotected to avoid accidental modification of the seed part.
Two seed part files are available for use in this course. These files incorporate the standards described above, and include the TFRTRI view as the default view.
D D
dau_seedpart_in (Inches) dau_seedpart_mm (Millimeters)
-6
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Expressions
The student will notice that there is a standard set of expressions resident in each of the part files as follows:
Expression Name bend_r=.5 dia=.5 h=1 l=1 out_r=.625 rad=.25 thk=.06 w=1 Intended Use identifies bend radius for sheet metal parts identifies diameter identifies height identifies length identifies the outside radius for sheet metal parts identifies Radius identifies thickness identifies width
These expressions could be entered by the user in each file or could be a standard expression file that could be imported into the part file by the user. Expression files that are valid for importing carry the file extension of .exp. The total number of characters allowed in an expression is 132.
Colors
The following colors are preset to indicate different object types:
Object Bodies Solid Sheet Generating Curves (nonsketch) Lines and Arcs Conics and Splines Sketches Sketch Curves Reference Curves Datum Features Valid colors Green Yellow Orange Blue Cyan Gray Aquamarine
-7
Course Overview
Points and Coordinate Systems System Display Color
White Red
-8
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Unigraphics Interface
Unigraphics utilizes a toolbar interface which is customizable for each user. Many of the options located under the Menu bar and various cascades can be accessed by selecting an icon from the appropriate toolbar. It is the intent of this course to emphasis ease of use". Lessons will introduce functions and identify their location with respect to toolbars and icons. The session of Unigraphics that will be initiated has an out of the box" interface, therefore the Gateway and Modeling applications will be customized through an activity. Control of Toolbar display may be accessed from one of 3 places:
D D D
Choose Tools"Customize from the main menu. Choose View"Toolbars from the main menu. Use the Third Mouse Button within the Unigraphics window, outside the Graphics window.
The display of each toolbar, as well as each element of each toolbar, is user customizable. To turn ON or OFF the display of a toolbar choose Tools"Customize or click MB3 in the toolbar area and select Customize. Placing a check in the box next to the toolbar name will instantly display the toolbar in the graphics area.
-9
Course Overview
To turn ON or OFF the display of a toolbar element choose the Commands tab. Placing a check in the box next to the toolbar command will instantly display the command in the appropriate toolbar. Removing the check turns off the display.
-10
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Activity 1 - Toolbars in Gateway Application

This activity will demonstrate working with toolbars to establish an efficient working environment in the Gateway application. Step 1 Open the part file dau_seedpart_in.
Choose the Open icon.
Step 2 Display the Standard toolbar in the Gateway Application.

-
Click Mouse Button 3 (MB3) in the toolbar area and choose Customize.
Click MB3 within toolbar area.
-11
Course Overview
The Customize Dialog box appears and shows the current toolbars which are displayed.
Verify that the Standard toolbar is checked ON.
The Standard toolbar should be displayed on the screen docked in the upper left corner under the Menu bar.
Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box.
-12
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Step 3 Display the View, Selection and Utility toolbars.

-
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and verify the View, Selection and Utility toolbars are checked ON.
The toolbars are displayed on the screen in an Docked state. Remember that toolbars may be docked horizontally on the top or bottom and vertically on the left or right. Locate the toolbars.
View
Selection
Utility
NOTE: Icons may vary for each toolbar
Locate the Utility toolbar in the Unigraphics window, it may be docked or undocked.
NOTE: Icons may vary.
-13
Course Overview
Step 4 Move a docked toolbar.

-
Place the cursor on the handle portion of the Utility toolbar and press and hold down MB1.
Select Here
Drag the toolbar such that it is aligned under the Standard toolbar completely to the left side of the window. Release MB1.
The Utility toolbar remains docked to the Unigraphics window in the proper position.
Select the View toolbar on the handle and drag the toolbar such that it is aligned to the right of the Standard toolbar.
Locate Here
-14
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview -
Select the Selection toolbar on the handle and drag the toolbar such that it is aligned to the right of the Utility toolbar.
Locate Here
Step 5 Display the Application toolbar in the Gateway Application.

-
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and check ON the Application toolbar.
Click MB3 within toolbar area.
Checked ON
Locate the Application toolbar in the Unigraphics window, it may be docked or undocked.
NOTE: Icons may vary.
-15
Course Overview
Step 6 Customize the Application toolbar.

-
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize.
Select the Commands tab and highlight Application in the Toolbars column.
Select these options
A listing with the commands for the Application toolbar is displayed. The commands displayed on the toolbar are checked in the Commands column.
-16
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview -
Scroll down to see all of the options in the Commands column. Turn ON the Modeling, Drafting and Assemblies commands and turn OFF all others options. Also, turn ON the Separator above the Assemblies command.
Scroll down here
Note that the display of the toolbar changes immediately upon selection of commands.
-
Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box. Locate the Application toolbar as shown below.
Locate here
These toolbar settings will be retained for the Gateway application for the rest of the course.
-17
Course Overview
Activity 2 - Toolbars in Modeling Application

This activity will establish toolbars in the Modeling application for future lessons. Step 1 Enter the Modeling Application.
Select the Modeling icon
in the Application toolbar.
Entering a different application will introduce a new set of toolbars. The toolbars that were established in the Gateway application may move and have different commands in them.
-18
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Step 2 Display the common toolbars from the Gateway application.

-
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and verify that the Standard, View, Selection, Utility and Application toolbars are checked ON. Turn OFF all other toolbars. Other toolbars will be turned ON throughout the course as they are needed.
Dock the toolbars in similar locations as defined in the Gateway application.
Step 3 Customize the toolbars.

-
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize.
-19
Course Overview -
Select the Commands tab and adjust the toolbars to match the commands in the table below. View Refresh Fit Zoom Selection Utility Application Select Work Drafting General Layer Objects Select Layer Assemblies Features Settings Select Separator Gateway Components Separator WCS Dynamics Type Filter Orient WCS Reset Separator Select All
Toolbars
Standard New Open Save Separator
Zoom In/Out Delete Rotate Commands Undo Pan Separator Separator Information Wireframe Settings Shaded Deselect All Settings Wireframe Separator View Up One Orientation Level
-
-20
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Step 4 Display additional toolbars in the Modeling application.

-
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and turn ON the Form Feature, Feature Operation, Edit Feature and Modeling Toggles toolbars.
Form Feature
Feature Operation
Edit Feature
Modeling Toggles
NOTE: Icons may vary for each toolbar
-21
Course Overview -
Dock the toolbars horizontally or vertically in the locations defined below.

Edit Feature Modeling Toggles
Feature Operation
Form Feature
Step 5 Customize the toolbars.

-
Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize. Select the Commands tab and adjust the toolbars to match the commands in the following table.
-22
Unigraphics NX
Course Overview
Toolbars
Form Feature Sketch Extruded Body Revolved Body Sweep along Guide Separator Hole
Feature Operation Taper Edge Blend Edge Chamfer Hollow Instance Feature Offset Face Separator Trim Body Separator Unite Subtract Intersect
Edit Feature Edit Feature Parameters Edit Positioning Move Feature Separator Suppress Feature Unsuppress Feature Separator Delay Update on Edit Update Separator Feature Playback
Modeling Toggles Form Feature Toolbar Feature Operation Toolbar Edit Feature Toolbar
Commands
Boss Pocket Pad Slot Groove Separator Datum Plane Datum Axis Datum CSYS Separator Block Cylinder
-
Step 6 Choose File"Close"All Parts. Do not save.
-23
Constraining Sketches
Lesson 1
PURPOSE This lesson describes geometric and dimensional constraints. It also covers modifying the constraints in sketches. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D D D D D D D D D D
Identify Constraint types. Define Sketch Points & Degree of Freedom Arrows. Create and edit Dimensional Constraints. Create Geometric Constraints. Work with System Applied Geometric Constraints. Auto Create and Display Geometric Constraints. Work with Constraint Conditions. Convert Sketch Curves To Reference Curves. Update The Model. Add Objects to Sketch. Constrain the Perimeter of a Sketch.
1-1
Sketch Points
Sketch objects are defined by theoretical points. A line, for instance, is defined by two points. The sketcher attempts to mathematically solve for the location of the points by analyzing the constraints (rules) that are placed on objects. The points that the sketch solver analyzes are referred to as sketch points. By controlling the locations of these sketch points the line itself may be controlled. There are various ways to control these points. The sketch points associated with different types of curves are illustrated in the graphic below.
Line
Fillet Arc Circle
Spline
+ Point Ellipse
DegreeofFreedom Arrows (DOF)

Degree of freedom arrows occur at sketch points to indicate that the solver is unable to fully define where the sketch point exists on the sketch plane. DOF arrows are only displayed during the creation of dimensions or constraints; they are yellow, and their base emanates at the sketch point with arrowheads pointing in both the horizontal or vertical directions (when the sketch point has no constraints). An arrow pointing to the right means that the sketch point in question is free to move in the horizontal direction, both to the right and left. An arrow pointing up means that the sketch point in question is free to move in the vertical direction, both up and down. If there are DOF arrows at a given point in both directions, the point is free to move in both directions.
1-2
Unigraphics NX
These arrows provide visual feedback to the user while in the process of constraining the sketch.
(no display) Undefined in X and Y Directions Undefined in Y Direction only Undefined in X Direction only Defined in X and Y Directions
The system removes DOF arrows as rules are written that define the location of the sketch points.
D
Arc - Arcs have sketch points at the center and at either end. These sketch points as well as the radius of the arc may be defined if the user so desires. Circle - Circles may have the center point as well as a radius or diameter defined. Ellipse -An ellipse may have the location of its center defined; also, the parameters for the size and orientation of the ellipse are stored for future editing. Fillet - Fillet is a specialized case of an arc. By definition a fillet is tangent to the objects with which it is associated. The system applies this rule as the fillet is created. Fillets may have the same information defined as other arcs, and in some cases the tangency that is assigned will define the endpoints. Line - Lines may have the sketch points at either end defined. Point - Points may be defined relative to other objects or at specific locations in space. Spline - Degree three splines may have their defining points located. Slopes of the spline at the defining points may also be defined. Splines that are of a degree other than three may be added to sketches however, since their defining points are not located at their knot points, there is no way to locate their defining points using constraints.
D D
1-3
Design Intent
The power in sketching is derived from the ability to capture design intent. This is accomplished by setting up rules that dictate how sketch objects will react to changing input. These rules are called constraints. As many or as few constraints as necessary may be applied to cause the sketch profile to update in the manner desired. Unigraphics sketches are not required to be fully constrained. A group of these rules may be thought of as a constraint set. The constraint set is comprised of two types of constraints, dimensional and geometric and are accessed from the Sketch Constraints tool bar.
The Sketch Constraints Tool Bar
Create Constraints Dimensions
Creating Dimensional Constraints

A dimensional constraint establishes the size of a sketch object (such as the length of a line or radius of an arc) or the scalar relationship between two objects (such as the distance between two points). Dimensional constraints appear in the graphics window. Unlike drafting dimensions, changing the value of the dimensional constraints changes the shape and or size of the sketch objects that are controlled by the sketch points. This changes the feature of the solid model that the sketch curves control.
1-4
Unigraphics NX
The Dimensions icon
accesses the Dimensions dialog.
You can use the dialog to create and edit dimensions, as well as change some of the preferences. There are nine icons located near the top of the dialog box. The top lefthand icon is the most useful as it infers the dimension type based on the objects that are selected and where their dimension text is located. It is also the default icon. The other eight icons are supplied for times when the system is unable to infer the desired dimension type. These different options are filters" that when selected will only allow a specific dimension type to be created. Because of this, certain types of geometry may not be selectable if they do not coincide with the dimension type selected. As dimensional constraints are being created, the dimension, its extension lines, and arrows are displayed as soon as the geometry has been selected. Drag the dimension to the desired location and place it by clicking the left mouse button. When dimensioning from a datum axis or datum plane, the dimension will not display until the location is selected. During some dimensioning the system infers a dimension type before all of the geometry has been selected. In these instances continue to select geometry until the correct dimension type is displayed, or select the icon for the dimension type desired and reselect the geometry.
1-5
As dimensional constraints are being created, the system creates an expression. This expression's name and value are displayed in the current expression fields of the Constraints dialog box. This places the value field in overstrike mode so the user may enter the desired dimensional constraint. A slider is also provided below the value text and may be used to change the value.
Enter new name Enter new statement or numeric value
Use slider bar to change value
Below the value slider are two option menus for manipulating the appearance of the dimensional constraint. The lefthand option menu is for defining how the text and arrows of the dimensional constraint will be displayed. Options are for automatic text placement where the system decides the appearance, manual text placement with the arrows inside the extension lines, or manual text placement with the arrows outside the extension lines.
Auto Placement
Manual Placement, Arrows In Manual Placement, Arrows Out
The righthand option menu is for defining whether the dimension's leader is attached to the right or left of the dimension text.
Leader From Left
Leader From Right
1-6
Unigraphics NX
Both of these option menus may be used before, during or after dimension creation.
Text Height
The display height of the dimension text is controlled by the text entry field at the bottom of the dialog box. This value may be changed any time the Dimensions dialog box is active. The default value is .150 for inch part files and 4mm for metric part files. There are no limits to values for this field. Modifying this value changes all the dimensional constraints in the active sketch.
Dimensional Constraint Types

Inferred - Allows the system to select any of the dimension types listed below, (except perimeter) based on object selection and cursor location. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, arcs, datum planes, and datum axes are selectable using this method. Horizontal - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint between two points with respect to the Xaxis of the sketch coordinate system. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, and arcs are selectable using this method.
YC ZC XC
.500
4.000
1-7
Vertical - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint between two points with respect to the Yaxis of the sketch coordinate system. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, and arcs are selectable using this method.
YC
2.000
ZC
XC
.500
Parallel - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint directly between two sketch entities. The parallel dimension is the shortest distance between the two points. All sketch objects are selectable using this method. The points selected will be inferred from the objects selected.
Arcs selected for 1.23 dimension
1.23
.500
Line endpoints selected for .500 dimension
1-8
Unigraphics NX
Perpendicular - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint measured perpendicular to a selected line and a point or the normal distance. The first object selected using this method must be linear; the second will be a point inferred from the next object selected.
.8502
.6302
Angular - Used to filter the system to specify an angular dimensional constraint between two lines. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the ends of the lines nearest the cursor upon selection. Only linear objects may be selected with this method.
p0=45.507
1-9
Radius - Used to filter the system to specify a radial size constraint for an arc or circle. Only arcs and circles may be selected with this method.
R p4=0.250
Diameter- Used to filter the system to specify a diametral size constraint for an arc or circle. Only arcs and circles may be selected with this method.
p1=2.568
Perimeter- The Perimeter constraint is used to constrain the collective lengths of lines and arcs to a desired value. After the desired curves are selected the user chooses OK, a dimensional constraint is created and its name is prefixed with Perimeter, i.e. Perimeter_p7=6.456. There is no graphical representation of this constraint on the graphics screen.
1-10
Unigraphics NX
Activity 1 - Taking Control of the Angular Adjustment

In this activity, you will capture the design intent for a part by adding rules that will control how the part is to change. These rules allow the part to be easily modified. The included angle of the adjustment slot should change from 45 to 75. Dimensional type constraints will be used to do this. Step 1 Open the part file.
-
Open dau_angleadjbrckt_1 and save as ***_angleadjbrckt_1.
Step 2 Add the required dimensional constraints. Choose Modeling. Doubleclick on one of the sketch curves to activate the sketch.
Choose Dimensions. In the Text Height text box, key in .06 and press Enter. Select the right end (over halfway, not endpoint) of the lower angled line.
Select Here
1-11
The system infers that you wish to create a horizontal, vertical, or parallel dimensional constraint depending on the placement of the cursor relative to the geometry. DO NOT PLACE THE DIMENSION!
-
Select the right end (not endpoint) of the upper angled line.
The system now changes the ghosted dimension to an angular dimension.
Select Here
Select a cursor location to place the dimension. Select the right end (not endpoint) of the line across the bottom. Select the right end (not endpoint) of the lower angled line.
Second Selection
First Selection
1-12
Unigraphics NX
Constraining Sketches -
Select a cursor location to place the dimension, choose OK to dismiss the Dimensions dialog box.
Step 3 Change the viewpoint.

-
Choose Orient View to Model. Choose Finish.
There are times, such as geometry creation, when looking directly at the plane of the sketch is beneficial. At other times it is beneficial to change the view point to more accurately understand the effects of changes on the geometry. Step 4 Choose File"Save.
1-13
Editing Dimensional Constraints

The editing of dimensional constraints may be achieved as follows:
D
To edit the value, simply double click on the dimension and edit the value in the text box and press Enter. To edit the position, simply drag a dimension's location.
Additional editing that may be done with the Dimensions dialog as listed below:
D D D
Name - Enter a new name in the text entry field. Value - Enter a new value in the text entry field or use the slider. Position - Click and hold the left mouse button to drag the dimension to its new position. Text placement method - Select a different option from the option menu. Leader side - Select a different option from the option menu. Text height - Enter a new text size in the text entry field.
D D D
NOTE: The name and value of a dimensional constraint may also be edited by using the Expression Editor. As dimensional constraints are edited, the constraints are evaluated and the geometry is modified.
1-14
Unigraphics NX
Delay Evaluation
At times it is advantageous not to have the geometry change until all of the dimensional constraints have been modified. The Delay Evaluation is a toggle on the Sketch tool bar that controls this condition.
Evaluate Sketch
The Evaluate Sketch button is provided so that the user may control sketch evaluation when the Delay Evaluation toggle is on. Sketches are evaluated automatically when the Constraints dialog box is exited.
Update Model
The Update Model icon located on the Sketch tool bar may be used to force the model to update without leaving the sketch function. When a sketch is deactivated the display of the dimensional constraints is disabled. A toggle switch labeled Retain Dimension is supplied on the Sketch Preferences dialog box to enable the display should there be a need to display dimensions without an active sketch (such as to reference expression names between sketches, plotting, etc.).
1-15
Activity 2 - Editing the Adjustment Angle Sometimes you need more rules.... 1 Continue using the part ***_angleadjbrckt_1.
Step 1 Change the layer settings.
-
Make layer 1 Selectable. Fit the view.
Step 2 Edit a dimensional constraint.

-
Doubleclick on a sketch curve to activate the sketch. Doubleclick on the 455 dimension.
Choose Orient View to Model.
1-16
Unigraphics NX
In the Dynamic Input Field text box, key in 75 and press Enter.
Step 3 Edit another dimensional constraint.

-
Doubleclick on the 155 dimension.
1-17
In the Dynamic Input Field text box, key in 255 and press Enter.
Notice how the geometry updates. Basic geometric assumptions that we make when we look at this geometry are not specified to the system, i.e. the bottom line has no horizontal constraint applied. If the geometry was created in the sketch rather than added to the sketch, some of these geometric assumptions would be added to the geometry as constraints during the creation process. Step 4 Reopen the part file. Choose Undo twice.
Choose Finish. Choose File"Close"Reopen All Modified Parts. Do not save at this time.
1-18
Unigraphics NX
Creating Geometric Constraints

A geometric constraint establishes a geometric characteristic of a sketch object (such as defining a line as being horizontal) or the type of relationship between two or more objects (such as requiring that two lines be parallel or perpendicular, or that several arcs have the same radius). Geometric constraints have no editable numeric values; a constant angle constraint, for instance, simply dictates that the line stay at the angle it is at when the constraint is applied.
The Create Constraints icon There is no dialog.
activates the process of creating constraints.
Constraints are created by selecting the geometry, and then choosing the desired constraint icon from the upper left corner of the graphics screen. Only icons for constraints that are possible for the selected curves will be displayed.
If you wish to assign multiple constraints at one time, you can control-select the objects. Then the icons for constraints will remain on the screen after you choose the first constraint. You can use MB2 to cancel creation of constraints.
1-19
Listed below are all the possible constraints and their respective icon.
Fixed Collinear Horizontal Vertical Parallel Perpendicular Equal Length Constant Length Displaying Constraint Symbols
Constant Angle Concentric Tangent Equal Radius Coincident Point on Curve Midpoint Point on String
Constraint symbols are displayed when a sketch is active. Symbols for Coincident, Point on Curve, Midpoint, Tangent, and Concentric are always displayed. The other symbols are not displayed at all times.
The Show All Constraints icon constraints in the active sketch.
will display the symbols for all the
Sometimes, when the curves are very small on the screen (the view is zoomed out), the symbols may not be displayed. You may need to zoom in to see them. The following is a definition of each of the available geometric constraints: Coincident - Defines two or more points as having the same location. Collinear - Defines two or more linear objects as lying on or passing through the same theoretical straight line.
1-20
Unigraphics NX
Concentric - Defines two or more arcs as having the same center. Constant Angle - Defines a line as having a constant angle. Constant Length - Defines a line as having a constant length. Equal Length - Defines two or more lines as being the same length. Equal Radius - Defines two or more arcs as having the same radius. Fix - Defines fixed characteristics for geometry, depending on the type of geometry selected, as follows:
D D D D D D D D D D
Arc or circle - defines the radius and the location of the centerpoint. Arc center, elliptical arc center, circle center, or ellipse center - locates the centerpoint. Arc or elliptical arc endpoint - locates the endpoint. Ellipse - locates the centerpoint and defines the radii. Ellipse center - locates the centerpoint. Elliptical arc - locates the centerpoint and defines the radii. Line - defines the angle and length. Point - defines the location. Spline - removes all of its rigid DOFs (it cannot be rigidly rotated or rigidly dragged). Spline control point - locates the control point.
Horizontal - Defines a line as horizontal. Midpoint - Defines a point to lie on an imaginary line that is perpendicular from the midpoint of the selected line. NOTE: For the Midpoint constraint, select the curve anywhere other than at its end points. Mirror - Defines two objects as being mirror images of each other. This constraint is automatically created when the mirror function is used. It cannot be created manually.
1-21
Parallel - Defines two or more linear objects as being parallel to each other. Perpendicular - Defines two linear objects as being perpendicular to each other. Point on Curve - Defines the location of a sketch point as lying on a curve. Point on String - Defines the location of a sketch point as lying on an extracted string. Slope of Curve - Defines a spline, selected at a defining point, and another object as being tangent to each other at the selected point. Scale, NonUniform - Thus constrained, a spline will scale in the horizontal direction while keeping the original dimensions in the vertical direction during modification. Scale, Uniform - A spline will scale proportionally in both the horizontal and vertical when the horizontal length changes. A Scale constraint may not be mixed with fixing of an internal spline point as the uses of the two different constraint types are mutually exclusive. Tangent - Defines two objects as being tangent to each other. Vertical - Defines a line as vertical.
1-22
Unigraphics NX
Show/Remove Constraints
The Show/Remove Constraints is a tool that aids you in the management of constraints. The constraints may be listed by object/s or all of the constraints of the active sketch may be listed at once.
Determines which objects will have their constraints listed. Determines what type of constraints will be listed.
Determines if the filtered constraint will be included or excluded in the list. Determines what category of constraints will be listed.
Actions that can be taken on the listed constraints.
1-23
Constraint Interrogation
One way to determine what geometric constraints are present is to pass the selection ball over a sketch object. If the object has a constraint associated with it, the sketch object will be prehighlighted as well as other sketch objects that share the constraint and the constraint marker will appear next to the sketch objects. If the selection ball passes over an object which has no constraints associated with it, prehighlighting does not occur. The constraint types and their markers are shown in the figure below.
Fix Concentric Coincident Colinear Point on Curve Point on String Midpoint on Curve Horizontal Vertical Parallel
Perpendicular Tangent Equal Length Equal Radius Constant Length Constant Angle Mirror Slope of Curve Scale, Uniform Scale, NonUniform
Constraint Categories
There are two major categories of geometric constraints, Explicit and Inferred. Explicit constraints are constraints that the user has created by assignment using the constraints dialog or by virtue of the creation method. Inferred constraints are Coincident constraints that the system has inferred and created during the curve creation process. The user has the option to list only the Explicit, or Inferred constraints, or both may be listed at the same time.
1-24
Unigraphics NX
Constraint Listing
The constraints may also be listed in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog by selecting one of the three options at the top of the dialog window. They are: Selected Object Once an object is selected, the associated constraints, depending on the selected constraint category, are listed in the dialog box. To view constraints associated with a different sketch object, simply select the new object. Selected Objects Allows the selection of multiple objects; the associated constraints, depending on the selected constraint category, are listed in the dialog box. Objects may be deselected by holding the shift key down and selecting the object. All in Active Sketch List all the constraints of the active sketch, depending on the selected constraint category.
Listing Box
Any time that there are constraints listed in the list box they may be browsed by selecting the constraint to highlight it. When the constraint is highlighted in the list box, the sketch object(s) that is associated with it is also highlighted in the graphics area. The Step Up the List and Step Down the List buttons allow easy navigation through the various constraints. The Up and Down arrows on most keyboards will mimic this behavior.
Information
The Information button located on the Show/Remove Constraints dialog box will list all of the geometric constraints in the active sketch to the information window. This is useful should there be a need to make a hard copy of the constraints or save them as a text file.
1-25
Removing Constraints
Constraints may be deleted 3 ways:
D D
Highlight them in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog List box and select Remove Highlighted Constraint(s). Turn on Select Constraints (on the Selection tool bar), select the constraint symbol on the graphics screen, and then choose the Delete icon. Turn on Select Constraints, select the constraint symbol on the graphics screen, and then use MB3Delete to delete selected constraint.
Undo
The user may access undo from the edit pulldown on the main menu, the icon on the standard toolbar, the third mouse button popup menu, or the accelerator keys. Undo takes the creation procedure back one step at a time.
Dragging Geometry
Underconstrained geometry can be dragged by simply holding down and dragging MB1 while on the selected curve(s) or point(s).
Selection
When in the Sketcher Task Environment, the selection toolbar changes. It has two icons that are only available in the Sketcher.
Select Sketch Objects curves and dimensions.
allows selection of all objects in the sketch -
Select Constraints screen.
allows selection of constraint symbols on the graphics
Deselect All
deselects all objects that are currently selected.
1-26
Unigraphics NX
1 When the Constraints dialog box is active, the status line lists the constraint condition for the active sketch. A sketch may be fully constrained, under constrained, or over constrained. When the sketch is under constrained the status
Constraint Conditions
line will indicate the number of constraints needed. A sketch is evaluated each time a constraint is placed upon the sketch. Each time a sketch is evaluated, the system attempts to solve the set of constraints that describe how the geometric objects are positioned and their relationships with each other.
In order to completely capture the design intent of a particular profile, it may be beneficial to fully constrain the sketch. This occurs when the solver is able to completely define all sketch geometry. It is important to remember that there is no requirement to fully constrain a sketch. The design intent has been captured sufficiently when the constraint set applied to the profile causes it to update in the intended manner. A sketch is under constrained when there is insufficient information to completely locate each sketch point. Degreeoffreedom arrows are displayed at each point that could not be solved to identify the direction in which that point remains free to move.
1-27
Activity 3 - Adding Geometric Constraints to the Project In this activity you will add geometric constraints to the angle adjustment 1 to cause the expected update to occur when the dimensional constraint bracket is modified.
Continue working with ***_angleadjbrckt_1. Step 1 Add the required geometric constraints.
-
Make layer 1 Selectable. Doubleclick on a sketch curve.
Fit the view.
Choose Create Constraints.
1-28
Unigraphics NX
Select the line at the bottom of the sketch. Choose Horizontal.
Select this line
This constraint will keep the line from rotating around when dimensional constraints are modified.
1-29
There are six places where the curvature transitions needs to maintain tangency.
-
Select the tangent curve pairs two at a time and Apply Tangency constraints to each set. Be careful to select on the correct half of the arc.
Lastly, the two arcs at the top of the slot should remain concentric.
1-30
Unigraphics NX
Select the two upper arcs and Apply a Concentric constraint.
Select these two arcs
The slot should now be constrained such that the angle may be adjusted while the configuration remains as intended.
Toggle Create Constraints
off.
Step 2 Edit the dimensional constraints.

-
Doubleclick on the 455 dimension and change it to 755.
The sketch geometry changes in the expected manner.
1-31
Step 3 Apply the change to the solid geometry.
Choose Update Model.
Choose Finish.
Step 4 Choose File "Close"Save and Close.
1-32
Unigraphics NX
Add Existing Curves to a Sketch

Unigraphics affords the user the flexibility to sketch or not to sketch. Should the user decide not to control a swept feature with a sketch, he/she may do so at a later date. This is accomplished by using the Add Existing Curves function. An example of this situation could be that the user has the general idea of what a cross sectional profile looks like, but does not quite understand how form, fit, and function of the part will drive the design intent. As the design matures and the definition is recognized, the designer may then create a sketch and add the geometry that has already been swept to create a solid feature. When a sketch is active, the user may choose the Add Existing Curves icon and simply select the curves or points required. Curves that are added to a sketch have their layer reassigned to that of the sketch.
TIP
No constraints are applied to curves created outside of the sketcher, regardless of how the curves were created. The user must add constraints, as required, to curves added to sketches.
Developed" or associative" curves may not be added to sketches. The shape of these curves are controlled by other means, such as the associative faces for projected points or curves, or the law functions that control certain types of splines and helixes.
1-33
Automatic Constraint Creation 1 The system has the ability to create certain types of geometric constraints in an
automated fashion. This functionality is especially useful when geometry is added to a sketch rather than created as sketch objects. To create geometric constraints in this manner, choose the Automatic Constraint Creation icon. Toggle the desired constraints to on, and choose Apply or OK. Ensure that the proper distance and angle tolerances are set.
The Set and Clear buttons, on the Auto Create Constraints dialog box, may be used to turn all of the constraint fields on or off respectively.
1-34
Unigraphics NX
When using the horizontal, vertical, parallel, and perpendicular auto create options, the system evaluates lines using the specified Angle tolerance to apply the proper constraints. When using the other types of auto create constraints, the system uses the Distance tolerance to apply the constraints. Using the Distance tolerance with the Coincident constraint will have the effect of closing gaps that occur between geometric objects. This condition is common with objects that have been translated from other systems.
1-35
Activity 4 - Adding Objects to a Sketch This activity will explore adding objects to a sketch, various curve operations 1 and auto creation of geometric constraints.
Step 1 Open dau_iges_1 and start the Modeling application.
Step 2 Create a Sketch.

-
Change the Work Layer to 21. Choose Sketch. Click on the sketch name; key in s21_profile and press Enter. Choose OK to accept the XC-YC plane.
Step 3 Add the curves to the sketch.

-
Fit the view. Choose Add Existing Curves. Choose Select All from the Add Curve dialog box.
Notice that the top arc does not highlight. This is due to the arc lying outside the plane of the sketch. In order to add the curves to the same sketch they must first be coplanar. Do not choose OK to add the curves.
-
Choose Cancel.
1-36
Unigraphics NX
Step 4 Project the curves onto a plane.
Choose Finish. Choose InsertCurve OperationProject. Drag a rectangle to select all of the curves. Change the Copy Method radio button to Move. Change the Direction Method option menu to Along Vector. Choose the ZC Axis icon and choose OK.
Change the Directions radio button to Both.
Choose the Faces/Planes icon Select the fixed datum plane that was created with the sketch. Choose OK to perform the projection.
Notice that the arc at the top of the profile is blue while the other curves are orange. By consulting the standards at the beginning of this manual, it becomes apparent that a spline or conic was created rather than the intended arc. Step 5 Convert the blue curve to an arc.
-
Choose InsertCurve OperationSimplify. Choose Delete as the method of dealing with the original curve. Select the curve at the top of the profile.
1-37
Choose OK to perform the simplify operation.
The status line states that 2 lines or arcs were created in place of the conic. Step 6 Delete the extra curve that was created during the Simplify operation. Choose Delete. Select one of the arcs that was created and choose OK to delete it.
Step 7 Modify the remaining arc to close the profile.

-
Choose EditCurveParameters. Select the endpoint of the curve toward the opening.
1-38
Unigraphics NX
Select the endpoint of the line where the arc should end to limit the curve.
Select this end of the arc to stretch
Select this end of the line to limit the curve.

-
Choose Sketch. From the Sketch Name pulldown select S21_PROFILE. Fit the view. Choose the Add Existing Curves icon. Choose Select All and choose OK.
The curves are added to the sketch as evidenced by the color change to cyan. Step 9 Analyze the curves.
-
Choose AnalysisDistance.
1-39
Select the two endpoints of the curves shown below

Endpoint of this arc Endpoint of this line
Notice that the curves are not contiguous. This is very common when geometry is translated into a double precision system, like Unigraphics, from a single precision system. These values are fractions of a millimeter in this case; however, trying to extrude these curves into a solid body will fail because of the gaps.
Exit the Information dialog box.
1-40
Unigraphics NX
Step 10 Close the gaps between the curves.
Choose Automatic Constraints Creation. Choose the Clear button to clear all constraint types. Choose the Coincident constraint to toggle it ON. Change the Distance tolerance value to .25. Choose OK to create the constraints.
Unigraphics interrogates each sketch point for other sketch points within the Distance tolerance and combines the points to one. The profile will now extrude properly to create a solid body.
-
Choose AnalysisDistance and check the two endpoints again.
Choose Finish.
Step 11 Extrude the sketch into a solid feature.
Choose Extruded Body. Replace the view with the TFRTRI view. Select a sketch curve to extrude.
The entire sketch highlights. Unigraphics treats the sketch as a single modeling operation for swept features.
-
Choose OK to accept the sketch as the section string. Choose Direction_Distance.
1-41
Choose OK in the Vector Constructor dialog box to accept the default direction. Enter a Start Distance of 50 mm and an End Distance of 200 mm. Use the defaults of zero for the First and Second Offsets, as well as the Taper Angle. Choose OK to create the body.
Fit the view.
The solid body is created. This profile could be further controlled by adding other constraints to capture design intent. Step 12 Choose File "Close"All Parts.
1-42
Unigraphics NX
Activity 5 - Auto Creating Geometric Constraints

This activity will explore Auto Creation of geometric constraints. Step 1 Open the part.
-
Open dau_pipevise and start the Modeling application.
Step 2 Activate the sketch.

-
Doubleclick on a sketch curve.
Step 3 Analyze the existing constraint set.
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon.
1-43
Ensure the radio button for All In Active Sketch is ON.
Toggle the Show Constraints option to Both and notice the different types of Explicit and Inferred constraints that exist in this part. They are: Collinear Midpoint Vertical Equal Length Point on Curve Coincident Horizontal Tangent
Step 4 Remove the geometric constraints.

-
Select Remove Listed.
1-44
Unigraphics NX
Choose OK.
Step 5 Selectively Auto Create the geometric constraints.
Choose Automatic Constraint Creation. Choose the Clear button in the All Constraints area of the dialog box. Toggle ON the buttons for Horizontal, Vertical, Coincident, and Tangent only. Choose OK to create the constraints.
Step 6 Manually create the rest of the constraints.

-
Make layer 61 Selectable.
Choose Create Constraints. Select the leftmost vertical line. Select the vertical datum axis. Choose Collinear. Select the bottom horizontal line. Select the horizontal datum axis. Choose Collinear. Make layer 61 Invisible.
1-45
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the two horizontal lines at the top of the profile. Choose Collinear and Equal Length.
Choose Deselect All. Hold the Ctrl key down and select the bottom end point of the vertical line controlling the slot location and the bottom horizontal line. Choose Point on Curve and Midpoint.
The Status line should now inform you that the sketch is fully constrained.
-
Click MB2 to exit the function.
Choose Finish.
Step 7 Choose File "Close"All Parts.
1-46
Unigraphics NX
Activity 6 - Applying Design Intent

Design Intent
Apply dimensional and geometric constraints to control the following:
D D D
The height and width of the part. The depth and width of the slot. The slot should always stay in the middle of the part along the X axis.
slot width slot depth
height
width
Step 1 Open dau_seedpart_in. Step 2 On Layer 21, create sketch S21 in the XCYC plane. Step 3 Create curves to produce the profile shown above. Step 4 Fully constrain the sketch according to the design intent. Step 5 After constraining the sketch, edit the dimension for the width of the part to verify that the slot remains in the center. Use any reasonable value of your choice. Step 6 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
1-47
Convert To/From Reference

At times it is nice to be able to see what the effects of a change are numerically, but adding a dimensional constraint to do this causes the sketch to be over constrained. Additionally, sketch curves may need to be associated to other sketch curves that are not intended to represent a portion of the swept feature. To support these needs, Unigraphics allows Reference objects within sketches. These reference objects may be either curves or dimensional constraints. The Convert To/From Reference icon is located on the Sketch Constraints toolbar.
To change the status of the objects, set the radio button to the status desired, select the object(s) and choose OK or Apply. An option menu is provided to filter for All (the default), Curve, or Dimension. Reference curves are displayed in gray color and phantom line font. Reference curves are ignored during sweep operations. Reference dimensional constraints are shown in white color and only the value portion of the expression is shown, regardless of the preference setting. The value for this reference dimension will be updated as the sketch is changed, but it does not control the sketch geometry with which it is associated.
1-48
Unigraphics NX
Activity 7 - Constraining Tangent Curves

Design Intent
Apply dimensional and geometric constraints to control the following:
D D
The width of the slot. The total length of the slot.
Dia (width)
length
Step 1 Open the part file.

-
Open dau_straightslot_1 and save it as ***_straightslot_1 where *** represent your initials.
You will now constrain the slot in its current configuration. Later, the constraint set will be changed to accommodate two other changes.
Choose Modeling.
Step 2 Create a sketch Choose Sketch. Click on the sketch name; key in s21_slot and press Enter.
1-49
Select the front face as the attachment face.
Attachment Face
Horizontal Reference here. -
Select the horizontal reference as shown above. Choose OK.

-
Choose Add Existing Curves. Choose Select All and then choose OK.
Step 4 List the constraints currently on the sketch. Choose Show/Remove Constraints. Ensure the radio button for All In Active Sketch is toggled ON.
No explicit constraints exist in this sketch because the curves were added to the sketch and not created with the sketch active. There will be four inferred constraints
1-50
Unigraphics NX
Cancel the Show/Remove Constraints dialog box.
Step 5 Fully constrain the sketch according to the design intent. Use Dimensions to locate the left arc center 1 inch from the left side of the part and 2 inches from the bottom of the part. Add the following geometric constraints: Horizontal constraint to both lines Tangent constraint to arcs and lines (4 places)
-
Add the following dimensional constraints:
Step 6 After constraining the sketch, edit the dimensions for the slot to ensure that it updates properly. Use any reasonable values of your choice.
1-51
Design Change
Change the design intent on the previous sketch: modify dimensional and geometric constraints so that one end may be made larger than the other. The total length still needs to be controlled. Examine the diagram below and follow the steps to perform the design change.
Radius 1 Radius 2
length
Step 7 List the constraints currently on the sketch and identify any that do not meet the new design intent. Delete the constraints that do not meet the new design intent and add new constraints. Select the Show/Remove Constraints icon. Verify the radio button for All In Active Sketch is selected. Delete the horizontal constraints. Delete the slot width dimension and replace it with a radius dimensional constraint on each arc.
The sketch is not fully constrained but, it does meet the design intent; one end may be made larger than the other. Step 8 Edit the dimensions for the slot to ensure it updates properly.
-
Assign a value of .5 to the left radius dimensional constraint.
1-52
Unigraphics NX
Assign a value of .25 to the right radius dimensional constraint.
Another Design Change

Change the design intent again so that the sketch may be oriented at various angles other than horizontal. The total length of the shape should still be controlled.
Angle
1-53
Step 9 Create reference geometry.

-
Create the two lines shown below and apply the constraints as instructed below.
Assign a Vertical and Constant Length constraint to this line.

This line is created from arc center to arc center.
Step 10 Converting Curves to Reference Lines.
Choose the Convert To/From Reference icon. Select the two lines just created. Ensure that the radio button is set to Reference. Choose OK.
1-54
Unigraphics NX
Step 11 Add dimensional constraints shown below.
NOTE: If a horizontal dimension for the slot length was inferred or manually defined, delete it and replace with a parallel dimension. Step 12 After constraining the sketch, edit the dimensions for the slot to ensure that it updates properly. Use any reasonable values of your choice. Step 13 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.
1-55
Activity 8 - Constraining the Perimeter of a Sketch In this activity, you will constrain the perimeter of a swimming pool sketch. 1
Step 1 Open the part file dau_skt_perimeter and start the Modeling application. Step 2 Activate the SWIMMING_POOL sketch. Step 3 Investigate the existing constraints using Show/Remove Constraints.
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon. If necessary, toggle on All in Active Sketch. Verify the Constraint Type is set to All.
1-56
Unigraphics NX
Verify the Show Constraints option is set to Explicit.
Choose the first constraint in the list, A5 Equal radius to A7. Investigate the highlighted curves on the screen. Select the Step Down The List button or use your down arrow key and read through the constraints to get an idea of the existing constraints in the sketch. Then Cancel the dialog box.
1-57
Step 4 Add the two dimensional constraints shown.
Step 5 Constrain the perimeter of the sketch.

-
Choose the Perimeter icon from the dimension types. Select all of the curves, a total of eight. Select the middle mouse button to signify that you are finished selecting curves.
TIP
If you do not get all of the curves selected, highlight the perimeter constraint in the Dimensions list and choose the Remove Highlighted button.
1-58
Unigraphics NX
Verify that a Perimeter dimension appears in the Dimensions list. (It may be a different p"number.)
Step 6 Edit the perimeter.

-
Slide the slider bar to the left and right and observe the changes in the sketch.
Slider Bar
Edit the Perimeter and other dimensions by entering values and/or using the slider bar.
Step 7 Close the part. Do not save it.
1-59
Activity 9 - Controlling Heat Transfer in a Cooling Pipe In this activity, you will apply a dimensional perimeter constraint to a cooling 1 The purpose of this constraint will be to control the cross sectional area of pipe. the fin relative to the flow of the coolant.
Step 1 Open the part file dau_perim_1 and start the Modeling application.
This part contains the following features:

D D
Cylinder Thru Hole - The diameter of the thru hole controls the diameter of the cylinder by maintaining a constant wall thickness. Sketch Step 2 Interrogate the sketch.
-
Activate the FIN sketch.
Fit the view.
1-60
Unigraphics NX
The sketch is located by 2 geometric constraints, collinear and concentric, as show below.
Reference curve and datum plane (layer 61) are collinear. Sketch arc and OD of cylinder feature are concentric.
Step 3 Add a dimensional perimeter constraint to the sketch. The sketch needs one more constraint to be totally constrained.
Make layer 1 invisible.
Choose Dimensions. Choose Perimeter.
1-61
Select the curves shown below.
Select the middle mouse button to signify that you are finished selecting curves.
Note that there is a new dimensional constraint called Perimeter_p## and that the sketch is now fully constrained.
-
Choose Cancel.
TIP
If you do not get all of the curves selected, highlight the perimeter constraint in the Dimensions list and choose the Remove Highlighted button. Step 4 Extrude the sketch.
Choose Finish.
Choose Extruded Body. Select a sketch curve and choose OK. Choose Trim to Face/Plane.
1-62
Unigraphics NX
Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the extrusion vector points in the negative ZC direction and choose OK. Toggle Extend Trim Face to ON. Select the face shown below.
Select this face.
Choose OK. Make sure taper angle is set to 0 (zero) and choose OK. Choose Unite.
Step 5 Create a circular array of the extruded fin.

-
Make layer 61 Selectable. Choose Instance. Choose Circular Array. Select the Extruded feature and choose OK. Enter: Number = 8 Angle = 45
Choose OK.
1-63
Choose Datum Axis. Select the datum axis in the graphic window. Choose Yes. Choose Cancel.
Make all but the work layer invisible.
Step 6 Capture the design intent for the fin.

-
Choose Tools"Expression. Select the ID expression and change it to 4. Choose Apply.
1-64
Unigraphics NX
Fit the view.
Notice that the fins have retained their original profile. If the cooling pipe's volume is going to increase the cooling fins will also need to increase. For this application, each fin's profile should equal 1.25 of the cross sectional flow area. An expression has been created for you that represents the area of the flow cross section; it is called Flow_area. This expression is associative to the hole feature and will update automatically.
Undo the last expression operation to return the heat pipe to its original configuration. Select the expression called Perimeter_p21 (the two digits following the p in your expression may be different). Edit the expression as follows: Perimeter_p21=Flow_area*1.25 and choose Apply.
Select the ID expression and change it to 4. Choose Apply.
1-65
Fit the view.
Notice how the fins have updated to meet the new flow requirement. Step 7 Close the part. Do not save it.
1-66
Unigraphics NX
1
SUMMARY Sketch constraints allow you to capture and maintain design intent even after design changes occur. Through dimensional and geometric constraints, you can adapt your solid models to the design intent of the final product. In this lesson you:
D D D D D D D D D D D D
Applied Design Intent. Defined Sketch Points. Identified Degree of Freedom Arrows. Created Dimensional Constraints. Edited Dimensional Constraints. Created Geometric Constraints. Auto Created Geometric Constraints. Displayed Geometric Constraints. Converted Sketch Curves To Reference Curves. Updated the Model. Added Objects to a Sketch. Constrained a Sketch by its perimeter.
1-67
1-68
Unigraphics NX
Constraint Management
Lesson 2
PURPOSE This lesson describes other constraint management tools as well as additional ways to use sketches. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D D D D D
Create an Alternate Solution. Drag a sketch curve. Reorder sketches. Position Sketches on a Solid Body. Locate a Sketch with Constraints. Move a sketch using Reattach.
2-1
Alternate Solution
Constraint sets may be valid in one or more configurations depending on the given geometry. Scalar dimensional constraints have no positive or negative sign, they specify only an absolute value. This absolute value may be applied to specify a given distance between objects in one direction or the other.
There are times when multiple solutions may be available for a given constraint set. At these times there is a need to ask the system to change the configuration based on the given set of constraints. Unigraphics provides this functionality as an Alternate Solution. Selecting the Alternate Solution icon from the Sketch Constraints toolbar will bring up a small dialog box containing the options OK, Back, or Cancel. The Cue line prompts the user to Select a dimension or circle/arc".
One alternate solution as it applies to a dimensional constraint would be the fairly simple case illustrated below. Geometric constraints for horizontal and vertical have been applied to the appropriate lines, as well as collinearity between the two horizontal segments as shown. The dimensional constraint is selected for an alternate solution with the results as shown. The vertical dimension is valid in either case when it is applied as an absolute value.
p4=1
p4=1
2-2
Unigraphics NX
Two alternate solutions as applied to a circle or an arc, are when two circles are constrained tangent to each other or a line is constrained tangent to an arc. This is illustrated below. In the case of the two circles, either solution is valid given the constraints supplied. Alternate Solution may be used to switch between the two, should some other constraint cause the system to select the wrong configuration.
First selection
Two tangent circles
Second selection
OR A line tangent to an arc

First selection
Second selection
2-3
Activity 1 - Alternate Solution

In this activity you will explore alternate solutions to constraint sets and the effects that different constraints have as they are applied. Step 1 Open dau_alternate_1.
Step 2 View the constraints.
Choose Modeling. Doubleclick on a sketch curve.
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon. Ensure the List Constraints for radio button is set to All In Active Sketch.
2-4
Unigraphics NX
Constraint Management -
Change the Constraint Type to Tangent.
Select A1 Tangent to L6 to see the only tangent constraint in the sketch. Choose Cancel.
Step 3 Add dimensional constraints as shown. Choose Dimensions. Select the bottom horizontal line and place the dimensional constraint on the screen.
2-5
Choose Radius. Select the circle and place the dimensional constraint on the screen.
2
-
Choose OK.
Step 4 Obtain an Alternate Solution. Choose the Alternate Solution icon.
The Cue line prompts you to Select a dimension or circle/arc".

-
Select the arc and the center vertical line.
2-6
Unigraphics NX
The circle flips to the other side of the line. This is a valid alternate solution, the circle is still tangent to the line. Step 5 Obtain another Alternate Solution.
-
Select the circle and the center horizontal line.
2
Since there is no constraint associated to the two objects selected, there is no alternate solution available. Unigraphics displays a message stating that there is no valid alternate solution for the selected objects.
-
Choose OK to dismiss the message. Choose Cancel in the Alternate Solution dialog box.
Step 6 Add a Tangency constraint. Choose the Create Constraints icon. Select the circle and the center horizontal line. Apply a Tangent constraint.
Step 7 Obtain an Alternate Solution.
Choose Alternate Solution.
2-7
Select the arc and the center horizontal line.
Here's what happened. The center horizontal line has six constraints associated to it: Horizontal Tangent to the arc Left endpoint is located midpoint of the left vertical line. Left endpoint is located on the left vertical line. Right endpoint is located midpoint of the right vertical line. Right endpoint is located on the right vertical line. When the alternate solution is applied to the line and circle, the top horizontal line collapses onto the bottom horizontal line. The two vertical lines now have a theoretical length of 0 (zero), which allows the middle horizontal line to meet its midpoint, point on curve, and tangent constraints.
Choose Undo
to restore the geometry.
Step 8 Add constraints to the center horizontal and vertical lines. Choose the Create Constraints icon. Select the left vertical line and the bottom horizontal line and apply an Equal Length constraint to them.
2-8
Unigraphics NX
Step 9 Obtain an Alternate Solution.
Choose Alternate Solution. Select the arc and the center horizontal line.
With the addition of the Equal Length constraint, the geometry now updates in the desired manner.
Choose Finish.
Step 10 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
2-9
Drag
Unigraphics provides a variety of feedback about the sketch. The user may find information about the constraint condition of a sketch, list current constraints, or obtain information about sketch objects. Degree of freedom indicators are provided to help gain insight into information that the system does not have. There are occasions when the user considers a sketch constrained and the system still lists the status of the sketch as under constrained. One method of interrogating the sketch is to drag the geometry. Dragging allows under constrained geometry to be moved in the unconstrained directions. Dragging is accomplished by selecting curve/s or end point/s and then click and drag the selected objects. Objects that share sketch points with the object being dragged remain connected to the object and stretch to accommodate the movement. In the figure below, L6 is being dragged while L4 and L5 stretch to accommodate the movement of the line. L6 maintains its angular and length relationship during the drag operation.
This line selected for drag L4 L6 p1=2 L5 p3=45
p2=3.75
These two lines stretch
p1=2
p3=45
p2=3.75
2-10
Unigraphics NX
Drag may be used to drag multiple sketch curves. Select the curves to be dragged, then use the left mouse button to click and drag to move the objects in their unconstrained directions. Selecting two or more objects to drag causes different results as the constraints applied to different curves have different effects on how the group of curves react.
These two lines are selected to drag
p1=2
p3=45
p2=3.75 These two lines also stretch
2
p3=45
p1=2
p2=3.75
Drag may be used to drag a single sketch point. Select the point to be dragged, then use the left mouse button to click and drag to move the sketch point in its unconstrained directions. Objects that share the sketch point stretch to accommodate the movement.
2-11
In the figure below, V1 is being dragged. The lines that share the sketch point stretch to accommodate the movement of the point. Their angle and length are modified by the drag operation.
V1 p1=2 p3=45
p2=3.75
p1=2
p3=45
p2=3.75
2-12
Unigraphics NX
Drag may also be used to approximate the correct location of a sketch profile relative to other objects. This may be useful when the process of constraining distorts the sketch profile so that it would be difficult to undo.
Undesired Results
Vert. Axis Distortion caused by the act of constraining Vert. Axis
Horz. Axis
Horz. Axis
Desired Results
Vert. Axis
Horz. Axis
Desired results entire profile dragged from quadrant to quadrant
2-13
Activity 2 - Dragging Sketch Objects

Step 1 Open the part file dau_drag_1. Step 2 Activate a sketch.
-
Choose Modeling. Doubleclick on a sketch curve. Zoom out the view to give yourself some working room around the geometry. Toggle Show All Constraints on.
Notice that the constraint set is presently made up of 1 vertical and 11 tangent constraints. Step 3 Drag a curve.
-
Place the cursor over the curve at location 1 shown below. Hold MB1 down and drag the curve to location 2.
1 2
2-14
Unigraphics NX
Notice how the vertical and tangent constraints impacted the drag operation. Also notice how the circle was left behind.
2
-
Choose Undo.
Choose Create Constraints. Select the arc and circle shown below. Apply a concentric constraint,
2-15
off (or MB2).
2
1 2
Notice how this time the circle moved with the drag operation.
-
Undo the last Drag.
2-16
Unigraphics NX
Step 4 Dragging curves versus endpoints.

-
Notice how the two lines remained tangent to the arcs that they are constrained to.
Choose Undo.
2-17
Select and drag the endpoint shown below from location 1 to 2.
Choose Undo.
2-18
Unigraphics NX
Select and drag the endpoint shown below from location 1 to 2.
1 2
Choose Undo.
As you can see the selection of an end point compared to that of an entire curve may produce different results.
2-19
Step 5 Drag several curves at one time.

-
Select the curves shown below by dragging a rectangle around them.
Drag the selection to the position shown below.
Step 6 Drag all of the sketch geometry to a new position.

-
Select all of the sketch curves by dragging a rectangle around the geometry.
2-20
Unigraphics NX
Drag the geometry to the location shown below.
Step 7 Locate the sketch. Choose Create Constraints. Select the arc center of the arc and the horizontal datum axis.
Apply a Point on Curve constraint. Select the same arc center and the vertical datum axis. Apply a Point on Curve constraint.
off (or MB2).
2-21
Notice what happened to the sketch geometry. The arc center moved to the prescribed location and the vertical line still meets the vertical and tangent constraints assigned to it.
2
-
Fix the geometry by dragging the vertical line to the other side of the arc. Try to maintain the same size of the upper and lower arcs.
Choose Finish.
2-22
Unigraphics NX
Placing sketches where they are needed

Locating a sketch in the correct position and orientation relative to other objects is very useful. By creating an association between the objects in a sketch and a governing object, the correct modification of a solid during a change process may be assured. Sketches may be located relative to datum axes, datum planes, objects belonging to other sketches, nonsketch curves, or solid edges. Remember that sketches are features, and as such may only be located relative to features that are higher in the creation hierarchy (have a lower time stamp number). Sketches may be located by one of two methods:
D D
Combination of dimensional and geometric constraints. Positioning dimensions.
Resolving DOFs
As points on a sketch are resolved the DOFs for that point will be removed. To resolve a DOF, it must be located in space. When using dimensional and geometric constraints, an individual object is located and the DOF is resolved by relating back to an external object, i.e. datum axis, datum plane, solid edge. When using positioning dimensions the entire sketch is being located. In order for the DOFs to be resolved, a point must be fixed. The following activities will guide you through the application of both methods.
2-23
Activity 3 - Creating and Positioning a Sketch

Design Intent
The function of this part requires a triangular pocket located from a certain angled face. By creating the sketch on the solid, the sketch position can update automatically if the angle of the face changes.
Step 1 Open dau_fence_1. Step 2 Start the Modeling application and make layer 21 the work layer. Step 3 Create a sketch of the pocket. Choose Sketch. Click on the sketch name, key in s21_pocket and press Enter.. Select the larger top face of the block as the placement face.
By design, the pocket should be oriented with respect to the pad such that the two legs of the triangle at right angles to each other can be constrained as horizontal and vertical.
2-24
Unigraphics NX
Select the upper half of the angled edge of the pad as the horizontal reference. By selecting the edge on its upper half, the positive direction of XC will point away from the pointed end of the pad.
2
-
Choose OK.
If your display does not look like the graphic below, start over (choose FileCloseReopen Selected Parts).
YC ZC XC
The shape of the pocket in this sketch may be defined with only three lines. The corner radii of the pocket will be applied later as blends.
2-25
Choose Profile. In the middle of the placement face, create the three lines as shown below.
2
Step 4 List the current constraints. Choose Show/Remove Constraints. Ensure List Constraints for is set to All in Active Sketch, Constraint Type is set to All, and Show Constraints is set to Explicit.
-
There should be one horizontal and one vertical constraint.

-
Choose Cancel.
Step 5 Constrain the sketch. By design, the size of the pocket should be controlled by defining the lengths of the horizontal and vertical sides.
Choose Dimensions. Select the horizontal line and place the dimension. Change the value to 6 and press Enter.
2-26
Unigraphics NX
Select the vertical line and place the dimension. Change the value to 4 and press Enter. p34=6.000
p35=4.000
Choose Finish.
Step 6 Extrude the sketch. Choose Extruded Body. Extrude the sketch to a depth of 1 inch and subtract it to create a pocket. Add a .5 inch blend to the inside pocket corners.
Step 7 Constrain the sketch position. Locate the sketch .75 inch away from the pad with the 90 degree corner of the pocket 1 inch from the back edge of the part.
-
Doubleclick on a sketch curve. Choose Fit.
Choose Dimensions.
2-27
Create the dimensional constraint as shown below.
0.750
2
Now add another dimensional constraint to locate the sketch from the back of the part.
-
Select the edge at the rear of the part as shown. Select the Point at the 90 corner.
1.000
Note that the status line indicates that this is a perpendicular dimension.
-
Use a cursor location to place the dimensional constraint.
2-28
Unigraphics NX
Enter a value of 1 and press the Enter key.
The dimensional constraint will update to display the new expression. The two constraints applied give the system enough information to determine the exact position of the sketch. The sketch then automatically moves into position. Choose Update the Model.
Choose Finish.
Step 8 Maintain the sketch position. Dimensional constraints associate the sketch to the target edges selected. Now edit one of those edges and observe how the sketch is affected. Since the pad has been positioned relative to the block, its angle may be changed by editing the appropriate expression.
-
Choose ToolsExpression.
In the expression listing is an expression named fence_angle, that is currently equal to 20 degrees. This value controls the angle of the pad. If this value changes, the angle of pad will change.
-
Change the value for fence_angle to 35, press Enter and choose OK.
2-29
Note that the sketch remains parallel to the pad, .75 inch away, and remains 1 inch from the back of the part. In some cases if the edit to an edge used to position the sketch is great enough, an Alternate Solution to a dimensional constraint may occur. If either of the locating dimensional constraints have flipped, perform an Alternate Solution on the applicable dimension to resolve the flip. Step 9 Choose File"Close"All Parts.
2-30
Unigraphics NX
Activity 4 - Positioning a Sketch

This activity will demonstrate how to create a sketch and position it with alignment methods. This structural frame requires pockets to minimize its weight. The thickness of the walls and the webs should be controlled.
2
Step 1 Open dau_frame_1 and save it as ***_frame_1 where *** represent your initials. Step 2 Constrain the sketch using both dimensional and geometric constraints to position the sketch curves relative to the solid edges and datum planes.
Choose Modeling. Doubleclick on a sketch curve.
Choose Fit.
2-31
Select the 3 sketch arcs and the solid edge shown below and Apply a Concentric constraint.
Sketch arcs
Solid edge -
Select the 3 sketch arcs and Apply an Equal Radius constraint. Choose Dimensions. Enter a Radius constraint of 2.25 to the curve shown below.
Apply a 2.25 radius constraint to this arc.
2-32
Unigraphics NX
Create the dimensional constraint as shown below. Note the name of the expression.
2
-
NOTE: When applying geometric constraints between datum features and sketch curves the constraints have to be applied individually. In the next example one line and one datum plane should be selected and a parallel constraint applied and then repeated for the rest of the lines.
2-33
Apply a Parallel constraint to the objects as shown below.

Parallel constraint
Parallel constraint
2
-
Parallel constraint
Apply the dimensional constraints as shown below.
2-34
Unigraphics NX
Apply the remaining dimensional constraint as shown below. Apply Alternate Solution where required.
2
The sketch is now fully constrained and positioned on the solid body. Step 3 Extrude the sketch and subtract it from the solid to create the pockets. Use a Start Distance of 0 and an End Distance of 0.56.
Step 4 Edit the chamfer feature.

-
Choose EditFeatureParameters.
2-35
Select the Chamfer feature and choose OK. Choose the Feature Dialog option and change the offset values to 1.5 and 2.0 and choose OK 3 times. Examine the part to ensure the update was correctly applied. Look to see if any Alternate Solutions need to be applied to the dimensions from the datum planes.
Step 5 Optional: Add blends to the solid edges.

-
Create 0.125 blends on the walls of the pockets. Create 0.0625 blends on the floors of the pockets. Create 0.325 blends on the vertical outside edges of the solid.
Step 6 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.
2-36
Unigraphics NX
Activity 5 - Using Positioning Dimensions

Step 1 Open dau_position_1. Step 2 Start the Modeling application. Step 3 Locate the sketch on the placement plane.
-
Choose Fit.
Choose Show All Constraints.
Notice that there are 2 vertical,1 horizontal and 2 tangent constraints.
Choose Dimensions. Select the arc center and the bottom horizontal edge of the solid body. Place a vertical dimension to the right of the part. Change the value to 3 and press Enter.
Notice that the status line indicates that 1 constraint is needed. Also notice that the vertical DOFs no longer appear.
-
Select the arc center again and the right vertical edge of the solid body. Place a horizontal dimension above the part.
2-37
Change the value to 2 and press Enter.
The sketch is now fully constrained
2-38
Unigraphics NX
Step 4 Apply a design change. Due to a design change the sketch needs to be rotated 20 as shown below. This set of instructions will demonstrate how Positioning Dimensions can accomplish this.
Choose Angular.
2-39
Select the objects in the order and at the locations as shown below.
2 1 -
Place the dimension to the right of the part.
Notice how the dimension and horizontal constraint are displayed in yellow. Also notice that the status line indicates that the sketch is over constrained. The angular dimension and horizontal constraint are presently redundant (over constrained). If you were to change the angular dimension value, the dimensional constraint would then be in conflict with the horizontal and both vertical constraints. Since we do not want to delete and reassign geometric constraints, we will reposition the sketch using positioning dimensions. Step 5 Create positioning dimensions. Choose Undo.
Choose Positioning Dimensions.
2-40
Unigraphics NX
An error window popsup informing you that you cannot apply positioning dimensions when there are sketch constraints to external objects. This message is referring to the dimensions going to the solid body.
Choose OK. Select the two dimensions that position the sketch to the solid body.
Choose Delete.
Choose Create Constraints. Choose the endpoint shown below and apply a Fixed constraint.
2-41
Choose Positioning Dimensions.
Choose Perpendicular. Select the bottom horizontal edge of the solid body. Select the arc and choose Arc Center. Choose OK to accept the value of 3.
Choose Perpendicular. Select the right vertical edge of the solid body. Select the arc and choose Arc Center. Choose OK to accept the value of 2.
Choose Angular.
2-42
Unigraphics NX
Select the objects in the order and at the locations as shown below.
2
2 1
Key in 20 and choose OK.
Notice how the sketch rotated even though there are vertical and horizontal constraints present. This is because positioning dimensions operate on the entire sketch as a feature, where dimensional and geometric constraints operate on objects.
Choose Orient View to Sketch.
2-43
Choose Fit.
Now you can see that the sketch was rotated and that the vertical and horizontal constraints are still valid relative to the sketch plane. Step 6 Edit the angle positioning dimension.
-
Choose Edit Positioning Dimension from the pulldown.
In the graphic window select the angle positioning dimension.
2-44
Unigraphics NX
Key in a value of 45 and choose OK twice.
Choose Orient View to Sketch.
Fit the view.
Choose Finish.
Step 7 Close the part do not save.
2-45
Reattaching the sketch

When a sketch has been created on the wrong sketch plane, or needs to be moved for some other reason, the Reattach icon located on the Sketcher toolbar may be used. Reattach allows for the redefinition of a sketch's sketch plane and reference direction.
Below, the extruded feature was reattached to a new face and a new horizontal reference was specified.
Original feature
Reattached to a new placement face
2-46
Unigraphics NX
Reordering the sketch

Since sketches are features they appear in the Model Navigator as well as the list of features presented when performing an EditFeatureReorder. This allows sketches to be located anywhere in the creation hierarchy. Reordering will become necessary when attempting to add generating or guide curves, of a swept feature, that occurs before the sketch. The sketch will need to be relocated in the build order so that it occurs before the swept feature that is generated or guided by the curves. Once the timing of the sketch relative to the swept feature is resolved, and the curves are added to the sketch, the curves may be treated as any other sketch curve for the purposes of constraining.
2-47
Activity 6 - Reattaching a Sketch

Step 1 Open dau_reattach_1 and save as ***_reattach_1. In this activity you will reattach a sketch that defines two cam blocks. The arrows in the illustration point to the cam blocks.
Step 2 Reattach a sketch.
Choose Modeling. Change the display to Visible Hidden Edges. Make layer 62 selectable. Activate the INSERT_RELIEF sketch.
Choose Reattach.
2-48
Unigraphics NX
Select the face shown below.
Click on the Y axis of the coordinate system. Select the datum plane to define the vertical direction. Choose OK. Choose Finish. Shade the model and review the part.
The sketch is now reattached to the defined face and the cam block features are rebuilt. Step 3 Save and close the part.
2-49
Activity 7 - Moving Sketches

This activity highlights moving sketches into the proper positions to create a model of a switch base. Step 1 Open dau_switchbase_1 and save it as ***_switchbase_1 where *** represent your initials.
Notice that the geometry is two dimensional and appears as if it was brought into this Unigraphics file from another system where it was used to define a drawing. You will selectively eliminate some of the resultant geometry and constrain the remainder in sketches so that parametric control over the model may be defined by the geometry.
2-50
Unigraphics NX
The two dimensional curves from the views in the drawing can be used to define three orthogonal profiles and added to sketches. The sketches will initially be created on the same plane. Two of the sketches will later be moved into the proper positions to create the extruded features on the solid model.
Step 2 Move the curves required for each profile sketch to separate layers.
-
Choose Modeling. Choose FormatMove to Layer. Select only the two circles in the top" view and choose OK.
Key in 21 and press Enter. Move the lines shown below in the front" view to layer 22.
2-51
Move the curves shown below in the right" view to layer 23.
This part file has existing standard expressions which will be referenced by the dimensional constraints in the sketches. They should be edited to the desired values. Step 3 Edit the expressions for the diameter and height.
-
Choose ToolsExpression. Change the value of the expression dia to 3.75 and the value of the expression h to 5.75. Choose OK.
Step 4 Create a sketch for the top profile.

-
Change the work layer to layer 21 and make all other layers invisible. Create a sketch named S21_TOP on the XCYC plane.
Choose Fit. Add the two circles to the sketch.
Step 5 Constrain the sketch for the top profile.

-
Add constraints to position the sketch so that the centers of the circles are aligned with the two datum axes.
2-52
Unigraphics NX
Add a dimensional constraint for the outer diameter. Change the value of this expression to dia to associate it to the expression.
2
-
Choose Finish. Choose Fit.
Step 6 Move the datum plane and two datum axes to layer 61. They are no longer required for this sketch but will be referenced by the other sketches. Step 7 Create an extruded feature using the top profile.
-
Change the work layer to layer 1 and keep layer 21 selectable. Replace the view with the TFRTRI. Extrude the sketch S21_TOP in the +ZC direction using a start distance of 0 and an end distance of h.
2-53
Step 8 Create a sketch for the front profile.

-
Change the work layer to layer 22. Make layer 61 selectable and all other layers invisible. Choose Fit. Create a sketch named S22_FRONT. Define the placement face with the existing datum plane and select the datum axis parallel to the XC axis as the horizontal reference. Choose Fit. Add all of the curves on layer 22 to the sketch.
Step 9 Constrain the front profile sketch. Use the Automatic Constraint Creation to create horizontal and vertical geometric constraints. Add dimensional constraints for the total height and width as shown below.
Test the behavior of the sketch by changing the height constraint to 7.0 and the width to 5.0.
2-54
Unigraphics NX
Notice that the sketch does not satisfy the design intent and remain symmetrical when the expressions are changed. To satisfy the design intent you can add a reference line and additional geometric constraints.
2
-
Choose Cancel. Choose Undo, twice if necessary, to change the dimensions back to their original values. Create a vertical line between the midpoints of the two horizontal lines as shown and convert it to reference. Add the dimension, Collinear and Equal Length constraints as shown below.
Collinear Equal Length and Collinear
Change the value of the expression for the total width to dia and the total height to h.
2-55
Choose Finish.
Step 10 Create associative reference features to be used as attachment faces for the front and right profile sketches, and as location aids.
-
Change the work layer to layer 62. Make sure layers 1 and 61 are selectable to display the solid and the other datum objects. Choose Datum Plane and create a Datum Plane through the axis of the outer cylindrical face of the solid. Create another Datum Plane through the axis of the cylindrical face and at a 90 degree angle to the plane you just created. Create a Datum Axis through the axis of the cylindrical face of the model.
The front profile sketch will be attached to the datum plane that is parallel to the ZC-XC plane. However, the plane was created after the sketch and cannot be referenced as a target face unless it precedes the sketch. Step 11 Reorder the sketch after the datum planes.
-
Choose the Model Navigator icon.
2-56
Unigraphics NX
In the Model Navigation window, place the cursor on the S22_FRONT:SKETCH node. Press the right mouse button to display the popup menu, slide the cursor down to the Reorder After option, and select the last datum axis from the cascading menu.
Step 12 Attach the front profile sketch to a datum plane.

-
Choose Reattach. Select the datum plane that lies in the ZC-XC plane as the target face.
Notice the Datum Axis used for Horizontal Reference is still valid. It is not necessary to redefine all steps during the reattach operation.
Choose OK.
2-57
Step 13 Position the sketch. Choose Fit. Add a constraint to make the centerline of the sketch Collinear with the datum axis through the cylindrical face axis. Add another constraint to make the lower horizontal line in the sketch Collinear with the datum axis that is parallel to the XCaxis.
Collinear
Collinear
Choose Finish.
Step 14 Extrude the front profile sketch.
Choose Extruded Body.
2-58
Unigraphics NX
Extrude the sketch S22_FRONT along the YC axis using a start distance of -dia/2 and an end distance of dia/2 and choose the Intersect operation.
2
Step 15 Create the sketch for the right profile.
-
Change the work layer to layer 23, make layer 61 selectable, and all other layers invisible. Create a sketch named S23_RIGHT. Once again, define the placement face with the datum plane defined for the S21_TOP sketch and select the datum axis parallel to the XC axis as the horizontal reference.
Choose Fit. Add all of the curves to the sketch.
Step 16 Constrain the right profile sketch.
Choose Automatic Constraint Creation. Set the Distance value to .01. Toggle on: horizontal, vertical, coincident, tangent, and equal length.
2-59
Choose OK. Create two vertical reference lines between the midpoints of the horizontal lines as shown below.
Add the dimensional constraints as shown above.
2-60
Unigraphics NX
Change the value of the expression for the width to dia" and the value of the expression for the height to h" to associate them to the other sketches.
Step 17 Attach the right profile sketch to a new datum plane.

-
Make layer 62 selectable. Choose Orient View to Model. Choose Fit. Choose Reattach. Select the datum plane that lies in the YCZC plane as the target face. Choose OK.
2-61
Step 18 Add geometric constraints to position the sketch.
Choose Fit. Add a geometric constraint to make the centerline of the sketch collinear with the datum axis through the cylindrical face axis. Add another constraint to make the lower horizontal line in the sketch collinear with the datum axis that is parallel to the XC axis.
Collinear
Collinear
Choose Finish.
Step 19 Extrude the right profile sketch.

-
Change the work layer to layer 1.
Choose Fit.
2-62
Unigraphics NX
Choose Extruded Body. Extrude the sketch S23_RIGHT along the XC axis using a start distance of -dia/2 and an end distance of dia/2 and choose an Intersect operation. Choose Cancel. Make all layers invisible.
Step 20 Edit the expressions to modify the part.

-
Choose ToolsExpression. Change the value of the expression dia to 4.25 and the value of the h to 6.5. Choose OK to update the model.
2-63
Mirroring in a Sketch
The sketch mirror functionality provides a means for copying geometry and constraints within the context of a sketch whenever a sketch design intent is meant to be symmetrical. The mirror function may provide a time saving option. To mirror sketch curves:
D D D D
Choose Mirror. Choose the mirror line. Choose the curves to be mirrored. Choose OK or Apply.
2-64
Unigraphics NX
Activity 8 - Mirroring Sketch Objects

Step 1 Open the dau_mirror_1 part file and rename as ***_mirror_1.
2
This part file contains a sketch and a solid body that was extruded from the sketch. When the model is complete it will represent a VBlock.
Step 2 Activate the sketch.

-
Double click on a sketch curve.
2-65
The status line indicates that the sketch is fully constrained. The sketch represents half of the Vblock. The left side will be identical to the right. Step 3 Mirror the sketch curves. Choose Mirror. Select the line, pointed to in the illustration below, as the mirror line.
Click MB2 to advance the selection step to Mirror Geometry. Select the remaining sketch geometry.
2-66
Unigraphics NX
Choose OK.
2
-
Because the extrusion feature is based on the sketch the model updates to reflect the current sketch. Step 4 Edit the angle of the Vblock.
-
Doubleclick on the P2=60.000 dimension. Key in 50 and press Enter.
Choose Finish.
Step 5 Save and close the part.
2-67
SUMMARY Sketches can be reconfigured by using an alternate solution when more than one configuration applies to a given set of constraints. Sketches also can be dragged to other locations or in relation to their own members. Managing sketches will allow you more flexibility when you create your designs. Positioning sketches using dimensional or geometric constraints or a combination of both can help you maintain design intent when related features change. Reattaching a sketch to another sketch plane offers you greater flexibility in your final configuration. In this lesson you:
D D D D D
Created an Alternate Solutions to obtain the appropriate profile. Dragged sketch objects to analyze constraint sets. Located sketches using constraints. Reattached sketches. Reordered sketches.
2-68
Unigraphics NX
Additional Sketching Techniques

Lesson 3
PURPOSE This lesson describes additional techniques that may be used to manipulate sketches. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D D
Edit a Defining String. Suppress and Delete Sketches. Animate Sketch Dimensions.
3-1
Edit Defining String

Sketches are used to define profiles or paths for swept features. The profiles are called Section Strings and the paths are called Guide Strings. Sketch objects that define another feature of the solid model cannot simply be deleted due to the parent/child dependency relationship.
Edit Defining String
is accessed in the Sketch Operations toolbar.
This option allows objects to be added to or removed from a string of objects defining a Section String or Guide String that has been swept into a solid feature. This is useful when the shape of a string member changes, or when the number of objects changes.
When the Edit String dialog box displays, the system shows a list of features associated with the active sketch. By default, the top feature in the list is highlighted in the dialog box and the sketch objects associated with the feature are highlighted in the graphics area.
To add objects to the defining string, simply select them. To remove objects from the defining string, hold down the Shift key while selecting them.
3-2
Unigraphics NX
The closure condition of the string may not be altered while adding or removing objects. A closed loop of objects must remain closed.
An option menu is provided to allow filtering of selectable objects. Options are provided for All (the default), Curve, Edge, Face, and Sketch. The radio buttons at the top of the dialog box, Section and Guide, are for instances where sketches are used both as a section string for one feature and as a guide string for another feature. In these cases the system provides for editing of defining strings of the nonactive sketch because of the associativity of the sweep along guide feature.
3-3
Deleting or Suppressing Sketches

Since sketches are features of the model, they may be deleted or suppressed by choosing EditDelete or EditFeatureSuppress.
Sketches may also be deleted or suppressed from the Model Navigator.
3-4
Unigraphics NX
Activity 1 - Edit Defining String

In this activity you will modify the profile of a part that already exists by changing the curves that define the profile. Step 1 Open dau_bbqcover_1 and save it as ***_bbqcover_1 where *** represent your initials.
Step 2 Activate the sketch defining the profile. Choose Modeling.
Choose Sketch. From the sketch name pull down select S21_CROSSSECTION.
Step 3 Change the profile defining the part.

-
Make layer 1 Invisible. Choose the Spline icon on the Sketch Curve toolbar.
3-5
Additional Sketching Techniques -
Choose the Through Points creation method. Verify that the Curve Degree is set to 3, and that the Curve Type is set to Multiple Segments; choose OK. Choose Point Constructor as the Point Specification Method. Start with the upper left endpoint on the sketch as shown. Follow with points 2, 3, and 4 as cursor locations. Finish with the upper right endpoint as shown.
2 3 4
3
-
Choose OK to signal the end of point specification at the same point last specified. The Cue line prompts to ask if you are Done specifying points?"; choose YES or OK.
The Cue line now prompts to Specify constraints or choose OK to proceed", the slope at the ends of the spline should match the slope of the angled lines at the ends of the sketch to assure a smooth transition. This could be done using the dialog box shown, but it would not assign a constraint. We will assign a slope constraint using Geometric Constraints.
-
Choose OK to create the spline. Cancel the Spline Through Points dialog box.
3-6
Unigraphics NX
Choose Create Constraints. Select the left angled line and the left endpoint of the spline as shown below. Make sure the spline is highlighted when selecting the left endpoint.
Apply a Slope of Curve
constraint to these objects.
Repeat the previous action for the right angled line and the right endpoint of the spline.
3-7
Step 4 Constrain the sketch as shown below.
Step 5 Edit the defining string for the model. Choose the Edit Defining String icon. Select the spline to add it to the string. Hold down the Shift key and select the top horizontal sketch line to remove it from the string. Choose OK.
Step 6 See the change to the model.

-
Make layer 1 selectable.
3-8
Unigraphics NX
Step 7 Convert the extraneous line to a reference line.
Choose the Convert To/From Reference icon. Select the top horizontal line that was just removed from the string, ensure that the radio button is set to Reference, and choose OK.
This line is still needed because the spline is constrained to the point.
Choose Finish. Examine the new and improved barbecue cover.
3-9
Activity 2 - Suppressing and Deleting Sketches

In this activity you will suppress and delete a sketch that has features associated to it. Step 1 Open dau_delete_1.
Step 2 Suppress a sketch. Choose Modeling. Choose EditFeatureSuppress. Choose the sketch named S21_CAM from the Feature Selection dialog box. Choose OK.
The dependents of the sketch are also selected. This includes all of the features except the datum plane and axes used to define the sketch plane. Step 3 Unsuppress the sketch.
-
Choose EditFeatureUnsuppress from the main menu bar. Choose all of the suppressed features from the Feature Selection dialog box (Choose the top feature in the list and drag with the left mouse button to the bottom of the list).
3-10
Unigraphics NX
Choose OK.
Step 4 Delete a sketch.

-
Choose Model Navigator. Place the cursor over S22_EAR. Click MB3 and choose Delete from the popup dialog.
A Notification window pops up informing you that deleting this feature will affect other features.
Choose Information.
The Information window list the other features that will also be deleted.
-
Close the Information window. Choose OK in the Notification window.
The dependents of the sketch are also selected. This includes two circular array instances and a blend.
3-11
Animate
The Animate function dynamically displays the effect of varying a given dimension over a specified range. Any geometry affected by the selected dimension is also animated. The behavior of the animation is relative to the existing dimensional and geometric constraints.
3
Dimensions list box: Lists the dimensions that can be animated. Value: The value of the currently selected dimension. Lower Limit: The smallest value that the dimension will be during the animation. The default limit is the selected dimension value minus 10%. Upper Limit: The largest value that the dimension will be during the animation. The default limit is the selected dimension value plus 10%. Steps/Cycle: The number of times that the dimension value changes when it moves from the upper limit to the lower limit (or vice versa). Display Dimensions: Optional: lets you display the original sketch dimensions during the animation.
3-12
Unigraphics NX
Activity 3 - Animating Sketch Dimensions

Step 1 Open dau_animate_1 and save it as ***_animate_1 where *** represent your initials. Step 2 Animate the first sketch. Choose Modeling. Doubleclick on a sketch curve.
3
-
Toggle Show All Constraints
on.
The constraints that presently exist in this sketch are: Lines are either horizontal or vertical. Lines are equal length to each other. Arcs are equal radius to each other. Lines are tangent to adjacent arcs. Choose Animate Dimension. Pan the sketch to the right so that none of the geometry is hidden behind the dialog.
3-13
Select the p5=1.000 dimension. Key in the following values: Lower Limit = .125 Upper Limit = 2.875 Steps/Cycle = 10
Choose Apply.
The sketch animates the radius dimension within the animate limits and the present constraints of the sketch.
-
Choose OK to stop the animation. Change the Steps/Cycle value to 20 and choose OK.
Changing the number of steps per cycle slows down the animation.
Choose OK. Choose Finish.
Step 3 Animate the second Sketch.

-
Change the work layer to 22 and make layer 21 invisible. Doubleclick on a sketch curve.
The constraints in the sketch consist of a fixed horizontal line and 4 angular dimensions that are associative to each other.
3-14
Unigraphics NX
Choose Animate Dimension. Select the p0=43.200 dimension. Key in the following values: Lower Limit = 10 Upper Limit = 60 Steps/Cycle = 20
Choose OK.
NOTE: If you are using a space ball, you may zoom and pan during the animation so that you can see the entire range of motion.
-
Choose OK. Edit the p2 dimension to have a value of p1*9 (p2=p1*9).
Choose Animate Dimension. Select the p0=43.200 dimension. Key in the following values: Lower Limit = 10 Upper Limit = 60 Steps/Cycle = 20
Choose OK.
The animation now dynamically reflects the new dimensional value.

-
Choose OK.
Choose Finish.
3-15
Step 4 Animate the third Sketch.

-
Change the work layer to 23 and make layer 22 invisible. Doubleclick on a sketch curve.
Review the sketch constraints. Notice the reference line with the constant length constraint. Choose Animate Dimension. Select the p9=3.000 dimension. Key in the following values: Lower Limit = .625 Upper Limit = 4.49 Steps/Cycle = 20
Choose OK. Choose OK when you done viewing the animation.
Choose Finish.
Step 5 Save and close the part.
3-16
Unigraphics NX
SUMMARY The Edit Defining String feature in Unigraphics provides the ability to add or remove objects from sketches to change the shape of the sketch. When the strength analysis of your design proves you need another rib, you can accommodate the change with a minimum of delay. Suppressing or deleting sketches can provide you a means to create varying configurations of your final product. In this lesson you:
D D D
Edited the defining string of a swept feature. Deleted, suppressed, and unsuppressed sketches. Animated sketch dimensions.
3-17
3-18
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Expressions
Lesson 4
PURPOSE functionality.
This lesson describes various aspects of the expression
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

D D D D D
Cut, Copy, and Paste functions in Expressions. Use the Expression Editor as a Calculator. Create comments in Expressions. Create Conditional Expressions. Create Geometric Expressions.
4-1
Expressions
The Expressions Dialog Box Window
Name Filter
Expression List
Expression Editor & Calculator
Geometric Expressions Interpart Expressions
4-2
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
How to use Cut, Copy, and Paste

D
Highlight the statement in the expressions editor field by doubleclicking or by clickinganddragging over the text. With the cursor inside the editor field, use the third mouse button (MB3) and choose Copy or Cut. From the expression list, click on the expression that you want to add the information to, move the cursor to the position for inserting the text, use MB3, and choose Paste.
Calculator Capabilities
You can use the expression editor field to perform calculations. You may then copy the value into an actual expression. If you enter an arithmetic statement without an expression name, the system will simply evaluate your statement and will place the value below the expression editor field. For example, entering the following expression in the editor field will create a new expression: length = 3 * (pi() * 6) / 3.4 However, if you had entered the following and pressed Enter: 3 * (pi() * 6) / 3.4 No expression is created, because no name (left side) is given in your statement. The system would evaluate the statement and place the value in the Value= area as shown below. Value = 16.63196 The statement in the text entry box can be cut or copied and pasted into actual expressions.
4-3
Expressions
Comments In Expressions
You can create comments in expressions by inserting double forward slashes //" after the mathematical statement. Anything appearing after the forward double slashes is ignored. The <Enter> key terminates the comment. If an expression statement is to exist on the same line as a comment, the expression needs to be stated first. Examples are shown below: length = 2*width //comment //comment// width'0 = 5 :Valid :Invalid
Expression Operators
Expression operators can be found in Appendix C.
4-4
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Other Expressions Options

List By
The List by: option automatically reorders the expressions. The three ways to order the list are:
D
by the Creation order, where the expressions are listed in the order they are created (first to last), by Reverse Creation order, where the most recently created expressions are listed first (a very effective option), or by Name, where they are listed in alphanumeric order. Uppercase expressions are listed before lowercase expressions.
Filter
The Filter option displays a list of expressions containing a userspecified string. The filter text is case sensitive. For example, if the following is entered in the field: p* *rad* To use filter:
D D D
only expressions starting with a 'p' are listed only expressions containing the string rad" are listed
Choose to Include or Exclude string. Enter a string in the filter field and press the Enter key. Expressions that contain the specified string are displayed or not displayed in the expressions list dialog box, depending on the chosen Filter Action (Include or Exclude). Choose Save Current Filter if you wish to retain the new setting in place of the default.
4-5
Expressions
Delete
To delete an expression:
D
Choose the expression that you want to delete from the expression list. Choose Delete in the dialog box.
D D
Choose Undo from the Standard Toolbar or EditUndo List and select Expression from the list if you decide that you do not want to delete the expression.
NOTE: You cannot delete an expression that is still in use. To delete all unused expressions, use File"Utilities"Part Cleanup"Delete Unused Expressions.
Rename
To rename an expression:
D
Choose the expression you wish to rename from the expression list. Choose Rename. Enter a unique name in the Rename Variable dialog box. (To cancel the rename action, choose Back.) Choose OK on the Rename dialog box. Choose Undo from the Standard Toolbar or EditUndo List and select Expression from the list if you decide that you do not want to keep the name change.
D D D D
When the expression is renamed, it is changed in every occurrence where used. Remember that all expression names must be unique. It is often helpful to rename the expressions, which are automatically generated by the system, to more descriptive names.
List
The List option displays an information window with all of the expressions in the current part file by name and the current value of each of those expressions. You may save the listing to a text file by choosing FileSave As from the listing window. Also, you have the option of printing the entire listing window to your default printer, without saving it to a text file by choosing FilePrint from the listing window.
4-6
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Activity 1 - Working with Expressions

In this activity, you will make the expressions easier to understand by renaming and adding comments. Step 1 Open dau_express and save as ***_express.
Step 2 Rename some of the expressions.

-
Choose InformationExpressionList All.
Notice how some of the expression names are not very descriptive, i.e. p0, p1, etc. .
-
Exit the Information window. Choose InformationExpressionList All by Reference. In the Information window choose EditFind. Enter p0 and press Enter.
4-7
Expressions
The window scrolls down till it finds the first occurrence of p0. Notice that p0 is used in the EXTRUDED(1) feature and controls the taper angle. You will use this information to rename the expressions that control the extruded feature.
-
Exit the information window. Start the Modeling application, if needed. Choose ToolsExpression. Select p0=0.
Choose Rename. Enter, ext_taper_ang and choose OK. Continue by renaming the following expressions as shown in the table below. Old Name p1 p2 p3 p4 New Name ext_lim1 ext_lim2 ext_offset1 ext_offset2
Step 3 Build associativity between the inside blend and outside blend.
-
Select blend_outside=.25. With the Backspace key, remove .25. Select blend_inside=.25.
Notice how the expression name has been placed to the right of the equals sign.
-
Enter a +
4-8
Unigraphics NX
Expressions -
Select thickness=.25.
The expression should now read as follows: blend_outside=blend_inside+thickness

-
Press Enter.
Now the part will maintain a constant wall thickness. If the inside blend changes the outside blend will update accordingly. Step 4 Add a comment to an expression.
-
Select the hole_v=height/2. Edit the expression by adding a comment as shown below: hole_v=height/2 // hole vertical position and press Enter.
Select the hole_h=length/2. Edit the expression as shown below: hole_h=length/2 // hole horizontal position and press Enter.
Choose List.
Adding comments is another way of making your partfiles easier to understand, not only for you but for down stream users.
-
Exit the information window. Choose OK.
Step 5 Save the part, do not close it.
4-9
Expressions
If (then) Else or Conditional Expressions

You have the ability to develop design rule relationships between certain elements of your model. One way to accomplish this is through conditional expressions or conditional equations. Conditional expressions are created by using the if (then) else structure that uses the following syntax: single_variable = if (this condition is true) (then this) else (this) For example: width = if (length>=8) (3) else (2) Alternative syntax shown below without some of the parentheses. width = if (length>=8) 3 else 2 Means that: If the length is greater than or equal to 8, the width shall be 3. If the length is less than 8, the width shall be 2.
Syntax and the command portions of the statement must be lower case.
4-10
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Suppression by Expression
Using this option, you can use an expression to suppress a feature using the expression editor, which provides a list of suppress expressions to edit. This function is not available if Delayed Update on Edit is active.
4
If a child feature has its own suppress expression, its suppression status will be controlled by that instead of by its parent's suppress status (i.e., the child is not automatically suppressed when its parent becomes suppressed). Child features that do not have their own suppress expressions are automatically suppressed when their parents suppress.
4-11
Expressions
Suppress by Expression Dialog Box Options

Function Create for each Create shared Delete for each Description Allows you to create an expression for the suppression of individual features selected from the list box. Allows you to create a single expression that controls the suppression of all features selected from the list box. Allows you to delete the selected feature's suppression expression. The list box displays all features which contain a suppression expression. Allows you to delete the selected features' shared suppression expression. The list box displays all features which contain a shared suppression expression. If you se lect a feature, the list box highlights the other features which share that same expression. Allows you to limit the features that appear in the list box. Lists the features that can be selected for a suppress by expression operation. Allows you to generate a report that lists features which contain a suppression expression.
Delete shared Filter List box List
Procedure
Once you have selected the appropriate option, choose Apply, and the system generates the new expressions and updates the selection feature list. All previous selected features are removed from the list.
4-12
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Activity 2 - Creating Conditional Expressions

In this activity, you will continue working with the ***_express partfile by developing conditional expressions to capture a revised design intent.
Design Intent Change

Assume that the design intent of the part has changed as follows:
D D D
The length is 2 times the height. The width is equal to the height. The hole diameter is a function of the height as illustrated in the table below.
Part Height Hole Diameter
> 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 > 4 but <= 6 . . . . . . 3.5 > 2 but <= 4 . . . . . . 1.5 > 1 but <= 2 . . . . . . 0.75 <= 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0
The hole will be constrained by conditional expressions as follows:

hole_dia=if(height>6)(5.5)else(hole_c) Translation -If the height is greater than 6, hole_dia will equal 5.5; otherwise go to expression hole_c. hole_c=if(height>4)(3.5)else(hole_b) Translation -If the height is greater than 4, hole_dia will equal 3.5; otherwise go to expression hole_b. hole_b=if(height>2)(1.5)else(hole_a) Translation -If the height is greater than 2, hole_dia will equal 1.5; otherwise go to expression hole_a.
4-13
Expressions
hole_a=if(height<1)(hole_sup)else(.75) Translation -If the height is less than 1, go to expression hole_sup; otherwise the hole diameter will be 0.75. hole_sup=if(height<=1)(0)else(1) Translation -If the height is less than or equal to 1, suppress the hole feature; otherwise do not suppress the hole feature. Step 1 Change the height and width Expressions.
-
Choose ToolsExpression. Choose length from the Edit Expressions dialog box.
press Enter.
Edit the right side of the expression to be 2*height, and Choose width from the Edit Expressions dialog box.
Enter.
Edit the right side of the expression to be height, and press Choose OK.
Choose Fit.
The model updates to reflect the changes. Step 2 Create the Hole Suppression Expression. The design intent specifies that if the height is less than 1 then the hole diameter will be 0.0. If you attempted to edit the hole diameter to 0.0 you would receive an error. This aspect of the design intent will be accomplished by creating an expression that controls feature suppression.
4-14
Unigraphics NX
Expressions -
Choose EditFeatureSuppress by Expression. Ensure that Create for each is selected. Select the Simple Hole feature. Choose OK. Choose ToolsExpression. List the expressions by Reverse Creation.
The expression at the top of the list is the one that was just created to control the suppression status of the hole feature. A value of 1 and the hole feature is unsuppressed. A value of 0 and the hole feature is suppressed.
-
Click on the top expression. Choose the Rename icon. Enter hole_sup. Choose OK. Choose hole_sup from the Edit Expressions dialog box. Edit the right side of the expression to be if(height<=1)(0)else(1) and press Enter.
Now the hole_sup expression has captured the design intent as specified at the beginning of the activity. Step 3 Develop the remaining Conditional Expressions. NOTE: Variables used on the right hand side must be previously defined on the left hand side of an earlier expression.
-
Enter hole_a=if(height<=1)(hole_sup)else(.75) and press Enter.
4-15
Expressions -
Enter hole_b=if(height>2)(1.5)else(hole_a) and press Enter. Enter hole_c=if(height>4)(3.5)else(hole_b) and press Enter. Choose hole_dia from the Edit Expressions dialog box. Edit the right side of the expression to be if(height>6)(5.5)else(hole_c) and press Enter. Choose Apply.
Step 4 Test the Design Intent.

-
Choose height from the Expressions dialog box.
Enter.
Edit the right side of the expression to be 7, and press
Choose Apply and choose Fit. Choose height from the Expressions dialog box.
Enter.
Edit the right side of the expression to be 5, and press Choose Apply. Choose height from the Expressions dialog box.
Enter.
Edit the right side of the expression to be 3, and press Choose Apply. Choose Fit (MB3).
4-16
Unigraphics NX
Expressions -
Choose the hole_dia expression. Look at the Value under the text box. Is the value correct in regards to table at the beginning of the activity?
Choose height from the Expressions dialog box.
Enter.
Edit the right side of the expression to be .75, and press Choose OK.
Did the hole update as required by the design intent? Step 5 Save and close the part file.
4-17
Expressions
Geometric Expressions
Geometric expressions reference geometric properties to create defining feature parameters. There are three types of geometric expressions: distance, length, and angle. Geometric expressions are features, and can be found in the Feature Browser (InformationFeature) and Feature Selection dialog boxes (EditFeature Parameters).
When you choose Geometric Expression on the Edit Expressions dialog box, the Geometric Expression dialog box appears.
Infer Existing Point End Point Control Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Quadrant Point
Type
The Distance type lets you create a distance expression based upon the minimum distance between two objects, a point and an object, or two points.
The Length type lets you create a length expression based upon the length of a curve or edge.
4-18
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
The Angle type lets you create an angle expression based upon the angle between two lines, planar faces, linear edges, datums, or a combination of these objects.
Selection Steps
The Selection Steps are used to select the objects for the geometric expression. The objects that you can select vary according to the Type you chose:
D
For Distance, you can select curves, edges, faces, bodies, datum planes, and points. For Length, you can select curves and edges. For Angle, you can select curves, edges, faces, datum planes, and datum axes.
D D
Select the First Object when this selection step is active. The Filter options can help you select the object.
Select the Second Object when this selection step is active. The Filter options can help you select the object. (This icon is not available when the Type is set to Length.) If you choose Point for the Filter option, the Point Method options become available to help you define the point.
4-19
Expressions
Procedure
To create a geometric expression, follow these steps:
D D
Choose the geometric expression Type: Distance, Length, or Angle. Select the First Object, using the Filter if you wish. If your Filter option is Point, choose the Point Method option that you want.
Select the Second Object, using the Filter and Point Method options, if appropriate. Choose OK or Apply to create the geometric expression.
Editing Geometric Expressions

Geometric expressions can be edited by selecting EditFeatureParameters or through the Model Navigator. If you choose EditFeatureParameters, the geometric expressions appear in the Feature Selection dialog box. Select a DISTANCE_EXP, LENGTH_EXP, or ANGLE_EXP feature from the Feature Selection dialog box, and the appropriate dialog box (Edit Distance Feature, Edit Length Feature, or Edit Angle Feature) appears. The options on these dialog boxes are the same options on the Geometric Expression dialog box. Options that you cannot change, such as Type, are grayed out. You can reselect the objects; in some cases, you will have to deselect the original ones first. To delete a geometric expression, choose EditFeatureDelete and select the expression from the Feature Selection dialog box, or use the Model Navigator. You can use the InformationExpressionList All Geometric operation to get additional information on geometric expressions.
4-20
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
Activity 3 - Applying a Geometric Expression

In this activity, you will capture an aspect of the design intent by applying a geometric expressions to the location of a form feature. The design intent for the part that you are about to create is as follows:
D
Line A, an imaginary line, always starts and ends at the corners as illustrated below. Line B, the center line of the hole, is always 90 to Line A and passes through Edge C. The hole depth is always 80% of the F value. The intersection of Line A and Line B is always located at the center of Line A.
F F x 0.8 D/2
Line A Line B
D D
Edge C
4-21
Expressions
Step 1 Open dau_seedpart_in and rename it to ***_geo_express. Step 2 Create a 4x4x10 primitive block, locate it at 0,0,0, and Fit the view. Step 3 Create the reference features that will orient the hole feature.
Choose Datum Axis. Select the two endpoints as shown below and choose OK.
Endpoint
4
-
Endpoint
Choose Datum Plane.
Choose Datum Plane Dialog.
4-22
Unigraphics NX
Expressions -
Select the two edges shown below and choose Apply.
Edge Edge
Select the datum plane and datum axis, enter 90 for the angle, and choose Apply.
4-23
Expressions -
Select the datum plane and endpoint as shown below and choose OK.
Endpoint
Datum plane
Step 4 Create the geometric expressions. The first geometric expression to be created will provide the D" value as illustrated at the beginning of this lesson.
-
Choose ToolsExpression.
Choose the Geometric Expression icon.
Be sure the Distance
icon is selected.
4-24
Unigraphics NX
Expressions -
Select the endpoints as shown below and choose OK.
Endpoint
Note: Reference features not shown for clarity.
Endpoint
List the expressions in Reverse Creation.
Notice the new expression created in the Edit Expression dialog box, p4=distance(5), (the name of your expression may be different). Remember, this expression is a feature; thus it has a time stamp, [ (5) ].
-
Rename the expression just created to geo_dist_1.
The next geometric expression will control the depth of the hole.
Choose Geometric Expression.
4-25
Expressions -
Select the datum plane and endpoint as shown below and choose OK.
Endpoint
Datum plane
Rename the expression just created to geo_dist_2. Choose OK.
Step 5 Create the hole feature. Choose Hole. Ensure the Simple icon is selected. Select the last datum plane created as the placement face.
Select this datum plane.
4-26
Unigraphics NX
Expressions -
Select Reverse Side, if required, so the vector points toward the solid body. Enter: Diameter = 1
Depth = geo_dist_2*.8
-
Press Enter to preview the diameter and depth parameters on the graphics screen. Choose OK. Choose Point onto Line Choose Horizontal. Choose the Datum Axis as the Horizontal Reference. Select the endpoint shown below as the target object. and select the datum axis.
Endpoint
Note: Reference features not shown for clarity.
Enter geo_dist_1/2 and press Enter.
Step 6 Edit the values of the block feature to test the design intent.
-
Select the solid block feature.
4-27
Expressions -
On the block, right click and choose Edit Parameters. Click on p2=10.00. Key in 5 and press Enter. Choose OK.
The solid body updates per the design intent.
Step 7 Save the part and close.
4-28
Unigraphics NX
Expressions
SUMMARY You can use the expression editor field to perform calculations. You may then copy the value into an actual expression. If you enter an arithmetic statement without an expression name, the system will simply evaluate your statement and will place the value below the expression editor field. You can create comments in expressions using double forward slashes //" before the actual comment. When the expression is renamed, it is changed in every occurrence where used. Also, all expression names must be unique. Conditional Expressions allow you to develop design rule relationships between certain elements of your model. Suppression by Expression is a tool that may be used to suppress individual or groups of features based on the value of a single expression. You may use Geometric Expressions to create a feature which contains a numeric value based on some geometric distance, length, or angle. In this lesson you:
D D D D D D
Used Cut, Copy, and Paste on expressions. Used the calculator capabilities in expressions. Suppressed a feature using an expression. Created comments in expressions. Created conditional expressions. Created geometric expressions.
4-29
Expressions
4-30
Unigraphics NX
Duplicating Features
Lesson 5
PURPOSE This lesson describes some of the various options you may use to create duplicate features. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D D
Create a Mirror body feature. Create a Mirror Feature. Copy and Paste Features.
5
5-1
Mirror Body
Mirror Body lets you mirror an entire body about a datum plane. You can use this, for example, to form the other hand of a left or righthand part. When you use this option, the system creates a separate feature whose name is Mirror. This feature is listed when you use InformationFeature, just like other features. When you mirror a body, the Mirror feature is associative to the original body; it has no editable parameters of its own. By default, the Mirror Body function is set to use an At Timestamp option. This means that any additional features added to the master body will not be reflected in the mirrored body. If the design intent for the mirrored feature is to reflect all future features in the master body, then the At Timestamp option should be toggled OFF by editing the parameters of the mirror feature. To apply the mirror feature functionality, choose Insert"Feature Operation"Instance and then choose the Mirror Body button. The following statements describe the mirror feature and its relationship to the original body and the datum plane:
D
If you change the parameters of a feature in the original (master) body, causing the original body to change, those changes are reflected in the mirrored body, providing that those features occurred before the mirror feature (if the At Timestamp option is toggled ON). If you edit the parameters of the associated datum plane, the mirrored body changes accordingly. If you delete the original body or datum plane, the mirrored body is also deleted. If you move the original body, the mirrored body also moves. Features can be added to the master body, but will only be added to the mirrored body if At Timestamp has been toggled OFF. Features can be added to the mirrored body, however, the features will exist only in that body. Features created in the master body, after a mirror instance operation, can be reordered before the mirror instance so that they are also reflected in the mirrored body.
D D
5
5-2
Unigraphics NX
Duplicating Features D
If At Timestamp is toggled OFF, reordering the mirror function is not possible. You can combine the original and mirrored bodies, using the Unite option on the Create Feature dialog box, to create a symmetrical model, as shown below.
Original body
Datum plane
BEFORE
Mirrored body AFTER
Procedure
D D
Select one or more bodies to mirror. Select a datum plane.
5
5-3
Activity 1 - Rectangle Instance Arrays & Mirrored Body

You will now create a rectangular instance array of simple through holes and create a mirrored body. Step 1 Open the part file.
-
Open part file dau_mirror_body. Enter the Modeling application.
You will be creating a rectangular instance array of the small hole along the top flat face of this part.
ZC YC XC
Step 2 Create a Rectangular Instance Array.

-
Choose Instance Feature. Choose the Rectangular Array option.
You will be creating a row of holes, so you will choose the simple hole listed in the dialog box as the feature to instance.
-
Choose SIMPLE_HOLE(3) and then OK. Enter these values: Number Along XC = XC Offset = Number Along YC = YC Offset = and choose OK. 5 7 1 0
5
5-4
Unigraphics NX
A temporary display of the elongated hole locations are displayed in the graphics area.
Choose OK (or Yes.)
The rectangular instance array is complete.
Choose Back so that you can try Mirror Body.
5
5-5
Step 3 Create a Mirrored Body Instance. You will now learn how to use the Mirror Body Instance option to create a feature that is an inverse copy of the selected solid.
Datum plane
Solid
Choose the Mirror Body option.
The cue prompts you to select the bodies to mirror.

-
Select the solid and choose OK.
You must mirror the body about a datum plane. The cue prompts you to select the datum plane.
-
Select the datum plane to complete the feature.
The mirrored body is created as a separate solid.

Note the edges of the two solid bodies
5
5-6
Although the mirrored body is a separate solid, it is still associated to the other solid and the datum plane. If you were to delete the original body or datum plane, the mirrored body would also be deleted.
Unigraphics NX
Step 4 Verify the new feature.
Choose Model Navigator.
Notice the new MIRROR feature at the bottom of the list.
Since the entire body is mirrored, subsequent changes to a feature's parameters in the original body would be reflected in the mirrored copy.
-
Close the model navigator by moving the cursor into the graphics area.
Step 5 Unite the two solid bodies into one solid.

-
Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite. Select both the original and the mirrored bodies and choose OK.
5
5-7
The two solids are united into one solid body.
Choose Model Navigator. Notice the new feature UNITE(7) at the bottom of the list.
Step 6 Close all part files.
5
5-8
Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved
Unigraphics NX
Mirror Feature
Mirror Feature lets you create symmetrical models by mirroring selected features through a datum plane or planar face. To create a mirrored body you would normally use the Mirror Body option. Mirror Feature, however, lets you mirror features within a body. Output from this option is a feature named MIRROR_SET. During the edit of a MIRROR_SET feature, you can redefine the mirror plane and add and remove features to it. To apply the mirror feature functionality, choose Insert"Feature Operation"Instance and then choose the Mirror Feature button.
Feature to Mirror
Mirror Plane
Add
Remove
5
5-9
Selection Steps:
D
Feature to Mirror - Lets you select the features in the part that you wish to mirror. To specify a feature to be mirrored, highlight it in the Features in Part listing and use the Add button to add it to the Features in Mirror listing. Mirror Plane - Lets you specify the planar face or datum plane through which to mirror the selected features.
Function Filter Add Dependencies All in Body Features in Part Features in Mirror Add Remove
Description Allows you to limit the number of entries displayed in the Features in Part listing. Standard wildcards can be used (i.e. EX*, * or *PROFILE). Allows you automatically add the dependent features of another feature to the Features in Mirror list. When ON, specifies that all features in the body will be included in the Features in Mirror list. One feature from the Features in Part column must be selected and added to the Features in Mirror list for this to take effect. Displays the names of features that exist in the part. Displays the names of features that have been selected from the Features in Part listing. Allows you to add selected features in the Features in Part listing to the Features in Mirror listing. Allows you to remove selected features from the Features in Mirror listing.
5
5-10
Unigraphics NX
Procedure
D D D D D D D
Select Feature Mirror from the Instance dialog box. If desired, toggle on Add Dependencies or All in Body Select the features to Add. Choose the Add button. Choose the Mirror Plane button. Select the plane to mirror through. Choose Apply.
5
5-11
Activity 2 - Creating a Mirror Feature

In this activity you will apply the mirror feature in several different ways. Step 1 Open the part file.
-
Open part file dau_mirror_feature_1. Enter the Modeling application.
Step 2 Mirror the boss feature. Choose Instance Feature. Choose Mirror Feature. Ensure that Add Dependencies and All in Body are toggled OFF. Select BOSS(6) and choose Add.
Choose Mirror Plane. Select the datum plane in the graphics window. Choose OK.
Notice that the boss sticks out the bottom of the block feature. It is important that you understand the construction techniques that were used to create the solid body. In this case a trimming function was used on the original boss.
-
Choose Cancel.
5
5-12
Choose Undo.
Choose Instance Feature.
Unigraphics NX
Duplicating Features -
Choose Mirror Feature. Select BOSS(6) and TRIM_BODY(8). Choose Add.
Notice that the boss does not protrude through the bottom of the block.
-
Choose Cancel.
Choose Undo.
Step 3 Mirror the boss and its dependencies.
Choose Instance Feature. Choose Mirror Feature. Toggle Add Dependencies to ON. Select BOSS(6) and choose Add.
Notice that the dependencies were automatically added but the TRIM_BODY(8) feature was not.
-
Select TRIM_BODY(8) and choose Add.
5
5-13
Choose Model Navigator.
Notice the new feature that was created, MIRROR_SET(15).

-
Choose Cancel.
Choose Undo.
Step 4 Identify dependencies of one of the counter bore holes.
Choose Model Navigator. Select COUNTER_BORE_HOLE(11).
Notice that BLOCK(0) is highlighted in magenta. This indicates that it is the parent feature of the selected feature. Also notice that CHAMFER(13) is highlighted in cyan. This marks it as a child feature of the selected feature. Step 5 Mirror the counter bore hole.
Choose Instance Feature. Choose Mirror Feature. Ensure that Add Dependencies is toggled ON.
5
5-14
Unigraphics NX
Select COUNTER_BORE_HOLE(11) and choose Add.
Notice that the chamfer feature was not added automatically.

-
Choose Cancel. Choose Model Navigator. Select CHAMFER(13) feature.
Notice that the chamfer feature is applied to both counter bore features. If an attempt would have been made to mirror the chamfer feature with only one counter bore hole feature, an error would have been encountered. This is because there would not have been an edge present for both chamfers. The next step will show how to remedy this situation. Step 6 Remove an edge from the chamfer feature.
-
Select the green check mark in front of the CHAMFER (13) feature to Suppress it. Right click (MB3) on the CHAMFER (13) feature in the Model Navigator and choose Edit Parameters. Choose Add/Remove Chamfer Edges. Remove the edge shown below by holding the shift key down and selecting it.
Select the top edge of this counterbore.
5
5-15
Choose OK two times.
Choose Model Navigator. Select the empty box in front of the CHAMFER (13) feature in the Model Navigator to Unsuppress it.
The chamfer is no longer applied to the edge of the second counter bore hole. Step 7 Mirror the counter bore hole.
Choose Instance Feature. Choose Mirror Feature. Ensure that Add Dependencies is toggled ON. Select COUNTER_BORE_HOLE(11) and choose Add.
Notice that the chamfer feature is added automatically.
Step 8 Close all part files; do not save.
5
5-16
Unigraphics NX
Copy/Paste Feature
The EditCopy Feature and EditPaste functions let you copy features and paste them within the same part, or from one part file to another. When you paste a feature, you can define whether the new feature should be connected to its original feature.
Copy Feature
When you choose EditCopy Feature, the Feature Selection dialog box appears. You can select the feature that you want to copy from this dialog box or from the graphics window. Toggle Add Dependent Features ON if you want to select a feature's dependents when you select the feature. You can select more than one feature.
Paste
When you choose EditPaste, the Paste Feature dialog box appears.
5
5-17
Expression Transfer Mode

The Expression Transfer Mode options define how the expressions in the pasted feature should be related to the original expressions:
Function New
Link to Original
Instance of Original
Description Creates a new expression for the pasted feature that is sep arate from the original feature. The value of one expression can be changed without affecting the other. Creates an expression for the pasted feature that is associated to the original feature (i.e. p10=p4). This link can be broken by simply removing the reference to the original expression and replacing it with another value. If the copy is in the same part file the expressions of the original feature are used. If the copy is to a different part file then Instance of Original works the same as Link to Original, and an interpart expression is created.
Parent Transfer Mode

The Parent Transfer Mode options specify how parent curves of pasted features should be defined:
Function Copy Original Curves Prompt for New Instance of Original
Description Creates a copy of the parent curves for the pasted feature. The system prompts you for new curves that will replace the original curves in the pasted feature. The parent curves of the original features are also the par ent curves of the pasted feature within the same part.
5
5-18
Unigraphics NX
Other Options
The list window shows all the external references for the feature you are pasting. Each unresolved reference has the symbols (-) in front of it. As you resolve a reference (e.g., by selecting placement faces, etc., on the part where you are pasting the feature), the symbols change to (+). You do not always have to resolve all of the references before you can paste the feature. For example, if you copied a sweep feature with 10 curves, the unresolved references include 10 curves. But if you only supply 5 curves before choosing OK, the system may succeed in creating the sweep. If the Parent Transfer Mode is Copy Original Curves, the references for the external curves are marked as resolved. (There may be other unresolved references.) If you select geometry that has a direction vector, Reverse Direction lets you reverse that vector. If the feature has no external references, the Paste Feature dialog box appears without the list window and Reverse Direction option.
Considerations when using the Copy/Paste Feature

Before using the Copy/Paste feature across part files you should evaluate the downstream impacts. In general there are no issues to consider when the use of the Copy/Paste feature is in a single part file. However, when the feature is applied across part files with any intended associativity, the user must consider if those part files will always maintain a relationship where the system may apply the associative feature.
5
5-19
Activity 3 - Applying the Copy / Paste Feature

This activity is an example of a situation where an instance of a feature is needed, yet the desired orientation of the new features do not lend themselves to the circular or rectangular array functions. Step 1 Open dau_seedpart_in. Step 2 Create a 4x10x.50 primitive block, locate it at 0,0,0, and Fit the view.
Step 3 Create a .50 diameter x .50 high boss and locate it as shown below.
Step 4 Copy and Paste the boss feature.

-
Select the boss feature. Choose EditCopy Feature. Choose EditPaste.
5
5-20
Unigraphics NX
Toggle Instance of Original to ON for the Expression Transfer Mode. Since there is no parent geometry, the Parent Transfer Mode setting is of no consequence. Select the planar placement face as shown below and choose Apply.
Select this face.
Position the boss as show below and choose OK.
The Paste Feature dialog box reappears because you chose apply after selecting the placement face.
-
Choose Apply to place another boss on the same surface. Position the boss as show below and choose OK.
5
5-21
Choose OK to add the last boss. Position the boss as show below and choose OK.
The four bosses created are not instances, however they all share the same expressions that define diameter and height.
-
Choose InformationExpressionList All by Reference. Scroll through the information window.
5
5-22
Unigraphics NX
Notice how p3, p4, and p5 are used to control the same parameters of each boss.
Exit the Information window.
Step 5 Close all dau" part files; do not save.
5
5-23
Activity 4 - Copying a Sketch

In this activity you will use a profile captured in a sketch in more than one place in the model.
Step 1 Open dau_cover_valve_body_2 and start the Modeling application. Step 2 Copy a sketch to create a new feature.
-
Choose EditCopy Feature. Select S21_FLANGE:SKETCH(5). Choose OK.
Step 3 Paste the sketch feature to the top of the block.

-
Change work layer to 22. Choose EditPaste from the main menu bar. Set the Expression Transfer Mode to New.
5
5-24
Since the actual sketch itself was copied there is no need to select an option for Parent Transfer Mode.
Unigraphics NX
Select the placement face, vertical reference, and the sketch external reference as shown below.
Sketch External Reference
Target Placement Face
Vertical Reference -
Choose OK to paste the sketch.
The different Vertical Reference caused the sketch to rotate and the External Reference was needed to locate the sketch. In the original sketch there was a concentric geometric constraint between the arc and the boss. By selecting the circular edge of the boss as an external reference it will be used as the edge for the concentric constraint for the pasted sketch. Step 4 Rename the sketch. Choose Model Navigator. With MB3, click on S21_FLANGE_0:SKETCH(6) and choose Rename.
The layer assignment for the sketch is 22, the name suggests differently.
5
5-25
Edit the New Sketch Name text entry field to the correct name of S22_Flange. Press the Enter key and the sketch name will update. Choose OK.
Step 5 Change the sketch.

-
Doubleclick on a sketch curve of the copied sketch (top face).
Choose Fit. Doubleclick on the radius dimension, enter .5 and press Enter. The sketch is modified. Doubleclick on the horizontal dimension, enter 4 and press Enter. The sketch is modified.
Choose Finish.
5
5-26
Step 6 Use the sketches to create features of the model.
Choose Extrude Body.
Unigraphics NX
Select one of the curves from the original sketch (S21_FLANGE) and extrude it in the positive ZC direction from 0 to 1 inch. Unite the feature.
Select one of the curves from the copied sketch (S22_FLANGE) and extrude it in the positive ZC direction from 0 to 1.625 inches. Unite the feature.
Choose Cancel.
Step 7 Test the associativity.

-
Select the boss feature. With the cursor on the boss feature, click MB3 and choose Edit Parameters. Click on p5=2.250. Key in 2.75.
5-27
OK until the part updates.
Step 8 Close the part; do not save.
5
5-28
Unigraphics NX
SUMMARY Duplicating features reduces the time you use to create multiple occurrences of the same or mirrored feature. Mirror Body lets you mirror an entire body about a datum plane. You can use this, for example, to form the other hand of a left or righthand part. When you use this option, the system creates a separate feature whose name is Mirror. Mirror Feature allows you to mirror features within a solid body about a datum plane on planar face. The copy/paste feature allows the duplication of features within or across part files. It also can be used where feature orientation does not conform to either circular or rectangular array envelopes. In this lesson you:
D D D
Created a Mirrored Body. Created a Mirror Feature. Copied and Pasted Features.
5
5-29
5
5-30
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Assembly Functions
Lesson 6
PURPOSE
This lesson introduces the Assembly Navigator functionality.
OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

D D
Activate and interpret the Assembly Navigator window. Use the popup and pulldown menu options in the Assembly Navigator window to manipulate the assembly. Rearrange Components in the Assembly Navigator. Check clearances of components within an assembly. Preview a component before adding it to an assembly.
D D D
6-1
Assembly Functions
Assemblies Application 6 licenses are controlled by the Assemblies option on the Assemblies Applications pulldown menu. Toggling Assemblies ON starts the Assemblies license, displays the new Assemblies toolbar, and expands the functions
by choosing the Assemblies icon from the application toolbar.
available in the Assemblies pulldown menu. Assemblies may also be toggled on
NOTE: By default, the Assemblies application will be toggled OFF at the beginning of a Unigraphics session. This setting can be remembered between sessions by changing Assemblies_RestoreApplication to yes in the ug_english.def or ug_metric.def customer default files.
6-2
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Assemblies Pulldown Menu

Turning ON the Assemblies application will expand the Assemblies pulldown menu. Some assemblies functions are still available when the Assemblies application is toggled OFF.
Assemblies Application OFF Assemblies Application ON
NOTE: Some of the functions in the Assemblies pulldown menu are dependent on the availability of other licenses such as UG/WAVE and Advanced Assemblies.
6-3
Assembly Functions
Assemblies Toolbar
If the Assemblies toolbar is not visible, choose View"Toolbars"Customize or Tools"Customize to bring up the Customize dialog box. Scroll down the Toolbars list on the Toolbars page, then turn ON the Assemblies toolbar by setting its checkbox. You can control which icons appear on this toolbar by selecting the Commands page of the Customize dialog box, and choosing Assemblies from the Toolbars list. Then choose the items that you want from the Commands list. For more information about customizing toolbars, see the Gateway Help.
6-4
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
The Assembly Navigator

The Assembly Navigator gives you a graphical display of the assembly structure of the displayed part in a separate window, and provides a quick and easy method of manipulating components in an assembly. For example, you can use the Assembly Navigator to select components for various operations, as well as to perform assembly management functions such as changing the work part, changing the displayed part, blanking and unblanking components, and more. The Assembly Navigator represents the assembly structure displayed as a tree. Each component is displayed as a node in the assembly tree structure. Many of the functions in the Assembly Navigator can also be found in cascade menus under the Assembly pulldown, however to have the options available you must first start an Assemblies license by selecting Application "Assemblies.
Opening the Assembly Navigator
To open the Assembly Navigator, click the Assembly Navigator tab on the right side of the Graphics window. Once open, you may choose to keep it open by selecting the pin in the upper left corner. If you wish to open the Assembly Navigator in a separate window, simply double-click the tab.
6-5
Assembly Functions
The Assembly Navigator Window

When you open the Assembly Navigator the window may be resized, and scroll bars are available to enable you to see the entire tree structure.
Node Display
Each component of an assembly is displayed as a node in the assembly tree structure. If you select on a node with MB1, the system will highlight the component geometry in the graphics window. Each node consists of a checkbox, an icon, and the part name, plus the other columns. If the part is an assembly or subassembly, an expand/collapse box will also be present. Components may be selected for various operations, (i.e. AssembliesChange Work Part, EditObject Display, etc.), by choosing the appropriate node in the Assembly Navigator with Mouse Button 1.
6-6
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Assembly Navigator Icons

Assembly (or subassembly). If the icon is yellow, the assembly is within the work part. If the icon is colored gray, but has solid black borders, the assembly is a non-work part. If the icon is grayed out, the assembly is closed. Component (not an assembly or subassembly). If the icon is yellow, the component is within the work part. If the icon is gray, but has solid black borders, the component is a non-work part. If the icon is grayed out, the component is closed. Expand/Collapse Box Children of a node are only displayed when it is expanded. To expand or collapse the node, place the cursor over the box and click MB1. When a node is collapsed, the expand/collapse box is marked with a +. An expanded node is marked with a -. Checkbox Provides a quick means of determining a part's status. A checkbox also lets you load and show a part with a single action. NOTE: You cannot close a part by clicking on its checkbox. To close a part, use the FileClose options or the Close options on the Assembly Navigator popup menu. The part's status is shown by the checkbox indicator:
No check
D D D
The part is closed. Clicking on this type of checkbox:
Loads the component and its children partially or fully, depending on the load options. Unloaded parents may also be loaded at this time. Any components that were blanked are now unblanked. Afterwards, the checkboxes of the part and its children have large red checks, except for those whose loading failed, who have an excluded reference set, or are on invisible layers.
A thin gray check The part is blanked, and at least partially open. It also appears for unblanked parts which either have an excluded reference set or are on invisible layers. Clicking on this type of checkbox:
6-7
Assembly Functions
Unblanks the component, along with any of its children that were blanked. If any of its children were unloaded, they are now loaded. Afterwards, the checkboxes of the part and its children have large red checks, except for those whose loading failed, who have an excluded reference set, or are on invisible layers.
D D
A large red check The part is unblanked, at least partially open, in a visible reference set, and on a visible layer. Clicking on this type of checkbox:
D D
Blanks the component and its unblanked children. Afterwards, the component's checkbox has a thin gray check, and its children have gray checks (if blanked) or no checks (if unloaded).
6-8
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Selecting Components
When you can select components using a dialog box, you can also select them using the Assembly Navigator by choosing the appropriate node with MB1. You can select single or multiple components. When selection is complete, you can process the components in the list by choosing OK from the dialog box. To select multiple components in the Assembly Navigator, select the first component and then either:
D
Use <Shift>MB1 (together) on another component to select all the components between those components Or use <Ctrl>MB1 on another component if you want only it and the first component
You can also use <Shift>MB1 on components in the graphics screen or <Ctrl>MB1 on components in the Assembly Navigator to deselect them.
Identifying Components
If you click MB1 while the cursor is over a non-work part whose checkbox has a red check, that part is highlighted. The highlighting stays until you select another part. (Hovering the cursor without clicking MB1 has no effect.) If you hover the cursor over a part that is not visible (e.g., blanked, on another layer, out of the reference set, unloaded), a box defining the boundaries of the component appears in the graphics window. The box disappears when you move the cursor to another part. This only happens when the Preselect Invisible Nodes preference is toggled ON. Checkboxes for parts that are not visible will have a thin gray check or no check. NOTE: Because of configuration differences, you may have to hold MB1 down for a couple of seconds before the box is drawn. In some cases, the box may not be drawn until you release MB1. Also, the box will not be drawn if you double-click MB1.
6-9
Assembly Functions
PopUp Menu Options If you position the cursor over a node in the tree that represents a component 6 click MB3, a popup menu with the following options appears. Depending and on the type of component; all options may not be available.
Component's node that MB3 was applied on. The parent assembly for the node's component that MB3 was applied on.
Blank / Unblank
Blank or unblank components and subassemblies. (Blanking a subassembly causes it and all its components to be removed from the graphics display. Unblanking a component restores it to the graphics display.)
Pack or Unpack
Pack removes multiple occurrences from the Assembly Navigator display and replaces each multiple occurrence with a single icon. (Multiple occurrences are components with the same parent, and whose prototype is the same part.) Unpack reverses this process; it lets you show all occurrences.
Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete

Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete are selfexplanatory.
6-10
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Replace Reference Set

Replaces the display of a component in the graphics screen with one of its reference sets.
Make Work Part

Selects the part in which to create geometry, giving you the ability to design in context. NOTE: Double clicking on a component's node in the Assembly Navigator will also make that component the Work Part. In addition the reference set is changed to Entire Part. When the component is no longer the work part, the reference set is returned to its original condition.
Make Displayed Part

Switches the display between currently loaded parts. The displayed part becomes the top node of the Assembly Navigator display.
Display Parent
Switches the Displayed Part from a component or an assembly to one of its parent assemblies, including the Start Part if the current node represents a linked part. NOTE: Under Preferences"Assemblies the option Maintain Work Part allows control of the work part setting when displaying a parent assembly. If turned ON, the work part will be unchanged when displaying a parent assembly. When turned OFF, the displayed parent will become the work part.
Open"
Opens various components within the assembly structure.
6-11
Assembly Functions
Close"
Closes the selected component (the Part option) or the entire assembly (the Assembly option). If the part has been modified, the Part (Modified) option will be active to alert you that you might wish to first save the file. Once you have closed the component part, you can later reopen it using the Open option. If you selected multiple components, Part closes only the components that are not modified, while Part (Modified) closes all of them.
Edit
Substitution, Mate, and Reposition dialog boxes are available through this menu option.
Properties
Duplicates the AssembliesComponentsProperties option for assembly components. This will be discussed in depth later in this lesson.
6-12
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Drag and Drop in the Assembly Navigator

While holding down MB1, you can select a component, drag, and drop it into another subassembly. If the component is dropped onto a piece part, the piece part will turn into a subassembly. Only loaded components can be dragged. Drag and Drop will not work under the following conditions:
D D
The target is not loaded. The dragged component already has an instance of the target as its child, which would create a cyclic assembly structure.
You can choose to receive a warning message after you have dragged and dropped components. This can be toggled ON and OFF in Preferences"Assemblies"Warn on Drag and Drop.
6-13
Assembly Functions
Activity 1 - Activating and Using the Assembly Navigator In this activity, you will explore Assembly Navigator functionality. 6
Step 1 Open dau_hole_punch_assm and start the Modeling application. Verify the Assemblies application is ON. Step 2 Activate the Assembly Navigator.
Choose Assembly Navigator.
Step 3 Verify the structure of the assembly

-
Select various nodes in the Assembly Navigator, notice the associated component geometry highlights in the graphics screen.
Step 4 Use the Assembly Navigator to select components when the Set Work Part dialog box is active.
-
From the Assembly Navigator window, select one of the dau_hp_punch_block nodes. Choose AssembliesContext ControlSet Work Part. In the Assembly Navigator, double click on the dau_hole_punch_assm node to make it the Work Part.
6-14
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Step 5 Collapse and expand the assembly node.

-
Click on the Expand/Collapse button, as shown below, to collapse the assembly tree.
Click on the Expand/Collapses box
Click on the Expand/Collapse button again to expand the assembly tree.
Step 6 Pack a component that has multiple occurrences.

-
Place the cursor over one of the dau_hp_punch nodes. Press Mouse Button 3 and choose Pack from the popup menu.
Step 7 Blank and Unblank components.

-
Using the Mouse Button 3 popup menu, Blank the dau_hp_lever.
Note that the dau_hp_lever component geometry has disappeared from the graphics display.
6-15
Assembly Functions
Using the Mouse Button 3 popup menu, Unblank the dau_hp_lever.
Blanking and unblanking can also be accomplished by simply clicking on the checkmark. Step 8 Change the Displayed Part and the Work Part using the Assembly Navigator popup menu.
-
Using the Mouse Button 3 popup menu, make the dau_hp_frame the Displayed Part.
Step 9 Change the Displayed Part back to the dau_hole_punch_assm.

-
Place the cursor over the node in the Assembly Navigator. Press Mouse Button 3 and choose Display Parentdau_hole_punch_assm.
Step 10 Close all parts.
6-16
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Specifying Columns
6 You specify which columns appear in the Assembly Navigator by selecting in an open area of the Assembly Navigator with MB3 and sliding down to Columns in the subsequent menu. When that menu expands you may choose to turn on or
off a particular column, or choose Configure to open the Assembly Navigator Properties dialogue.
6-17
Assembly Functions
Assembly Navigator Properties
Columns list box - The list of possible columns that may appear in the Assembly Navigator. The columns that are currently visibly are checked. The position of the columns in the Assembly Navigator may be modified by choosing the Move Up or Move Down buttons. The first column in the Assembly Navigator must be one that identifies the component, such as Part Name, Component Name, or Descriptive Part Name. The system will not allow you to move any other choices to the top of the list. Attribute - Allows you to enter an Attribute Name which may then be added to the Column List Box by selecting the Create icon beside the window. Any Attribute added to the list box may be deleted by choosing the Delete icon below the Move Down icon.
6-18
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
The columns that can appear in the Assembly Navigator are:
Column Descriptive Part Name Component Name Part Name
Read Only
Modified
Description Displays the descriptive part name of the part. Displays the component name of the part. This column will be blank for the displayed part. Displays the file name of the part. Displays the current read status of the loaded parts: = Read & Write = Read Only = Partially Loaded blank = Unloaded part Tells if a part has been modified in the current session: = Yes blank = No Displays the mating or variable position of the parts: = Unconstrained = Partially Unconstrained = Fully Constrained Displays the number of components in the assembly or subassembly, including the assembly or subassembly itself. Displays the name of the current reference set. This column will be blank for the displayed part. Tells whether a part is out of date: = Out of date blank = Current Displays the file description, where one is defined, of the part Indicates whether part is inch or metric. List the weight of the part in pounds. List the weight of the part in grams. List the weight of the part in kilograms.
Position
Count Reference Set Out of Date File Description Units Weight (lbs) Weight (grams) Weight (kgs)
6-19
Assembly Functions
Weight Status
Indicates whether: = This weight is okay. = This weight has been asserted. = Something with this weight may need attention. = There is a problem with this weight. Displays the color of the part, if it has been modified in the assembly. "Not Set" indicates that the color attribute from the component part file is being used. Displays the current layer of the component. "Original" indicates that the original layers of the component file are being used. Tells whether a part has been deformed.
Color Layer Shape
6-20
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Component Properties
The Component Properties dialog box provides status information about the selected component(s), as well as the ability to modify many of the component properties (such as blank, layer, suppress, attributes, and the component name). The Component Properties dialog box may be accessed in several ways:
D
Select the component from the Assembly Navigator and choose Properties from the MB3 popmenu. Select the component from the graphics screen and choose Properties from the MB3 popup menu.
6-21
Assembly Functions
Assembly Property Page

The Assembly page lists the Load Status, and has options to Blank, change the Layering method, or open the Information window. The component display properties, Color, Translucency, and Partial Shading will be available for you to revert to attributes of the component part file, if they have been overridden at the assembly level.
6-22
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
6 The Attributes page provides the Title and Value of each existing attribute, a button that lets you Delete the highlighted attribute, and text fields that let you create new or edit existing attributes. When editing attributes, you can only edit
Attributes Property Page
or delete part attributes if the component is the displayed part. Creating attributes while the assembly is the displayed part will generate assembly level object attributes.
6-23
Assembly Functions
Parameters Property Page

The Parameters page shows the Component Name, Suppression options (plus an Expression field to be used if you choose the Suppress by Expression option), and the Part Family options Update and Information. The part family Information option is also available from Assemblies"Reports"Family Report.
6-24
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Weight Property Page

The Weight page shows information about the component's weight (if loaded) and options as to when to update the Weight data (On Save or Now).
6-25
Assembly Functions
Part File Property Page

The Part File page shows information about the component's part file (if loaded) such as: Header Status, Header Description, Machine Format, File Compression, Part File Format, Part File Type, Creation Date, and Creation Time. If the Mating Constraints of any component have been saved they will be listed at the bottom of this page.
6-26
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
General Property Page

The General Property Page is another opportunity to change the Component Name of the part. On this page the names can be indexed, specifically located, or deleted. Access to the information widow is also available.
6-27
Assembly Functions
Check Clearances
This provides a simple way to check the clearances for your changed components prior to saving the changes. This may be accessed by choosing Assemblies"Components"Check Clearances or the Check Clearances icon on the Assemblies toolbar.
6-28
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Activity 2 - Assemblies User Interface

Step 1 Open the part file dau_plate_assm. Start the Modeling application and verify that the Assemblies application is on. Step 2 Change the columns in the Assembly Navigator.
-
Right-click (MB3) in an open area of the Assembly Navigator, then select Columns"Configure. Click on the empty box in front of Descriptive Part Name to activate that column. Choose OK to finish changing the Assembly Navigator columns.
Step 3 Rename a component object using the Component Properties dialog box. Make sure Select Components is ON Selection toolbar. from the
In the graphics screen, select the top dau_mt_plate_1 components.

dau_mt_plate_1 component
6-29
Assembly Functions
With the cursor on the selected component, click Mouse Button 3. On the popup menu, choose Properties.
Choose the Parameters tab from the Component Properties dialog box.
6-30
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions -
Change the Component Name to PLATE_1, and Apply the dialog box.
Notice the component name has changed in the Assembly Navigator.

-
Choose Cancel.
Step 4 Check clearances for one of the plate components.

-
Choose Assemblies"Components"Check Clearances. Select the upper dau_mt_plate_1 component and OK.
6-31
Assembly Functions
The system will identify touching interferences with the bushings and spacers.
Select one of the interferences from the list and choose Isolate Interference.
All components except those involved in the selected interference will be blanked. You can also doubleclick on an interference to perform an isolation.
-
Choose Cancel.
Step 5 Close all parts without saving.
6-32
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
Preview Component on Add

With this option ON, an additional graphics window is displayed to show the component before adding it to the assembly.
6-33
Assembly Functions
Activity 3 - Preview Component on Add 6 Step 1 Open the part file dau_plate_assm, start the Modeling application, and ensure that the Assemblies application is on.
Step 2 Preview a component before adding it to your assembly.
-
Choose Preferences"Assemblies. If necessary, toggle Preview Component on Add to ON and choose OK.
Choose the Add Existing Component icon Assemblies toolbar.
from the
Choose the part dau_bolt_1 from the list of components. Choose OK. Notice the picture of the component in the right hand corner. Choose Cancel.
Step 3 Close all parts without saving.
6-34
Unigraphics NX
Assembly Functions
6
SUMMARY The Assembly Navigator provides a graphical display of an assembly which allows you to quickly and easily select components and manipulate the assembly. Searching for components, opening only components within close proximity of a component, and checking clearances between components prevent delays in design and manufacturing of your final product. In this lesson you:
D D D
Activated the Assembly Navigator for an existing assembly. Interpreted the display of the nodes in the Assembly Navigator window. Used the popup and pulldown menu options to perform operations on components in the assembly. Checked clearances between components within an assembly.
6-35
Assembly Functions
6-36
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Reference Sets
Lesson 7
PURPOSE Reference sets allow you to limit the amount of information brought into an assembly from component parts. When you add all of the data that is contained in the component parts to an assembly, the assembly can become very cluttered and difficult to manage. Reference sets will also allow you to show alternate representations or simplified versions of the model. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D D D D
Create reference sets in components. Replace reference sets for individual components in an assembly. Create reference sets for subassembly components. Perform mass replacement of reference sets. Define default reference sets in Load Options.
7-1
Reference Sets
General Concepts Concerning Reference Sets

A reference set is a named subset" or group" of data that is defined in a component part (a piece part or subassembly). Reference sets can be used at the next level assembly to control what is brought up from the component part.
Assembly
Only the data in the specified reference set is brought into the assembly from the component.
Component Part
A user creates a reference set here containing only the solid.
A reference set may contain the following data:

D D D
Name, Origin, and Orientation (translation matrix) Geometric Objects, Datums, Coordinate Systems, Component Objects Attributes (nongeometric information used for a parts list)
Using Reference Sets

After a reference set is defined in a component part it can be used in the assembly. There are two primary reasons for using reference sets.
D
Exclude, or filter" unwanted objects in a component part so that they do not appear in the assembly. Represent a component part in the assembly with alternative or simpler geometry than the complete solid body.
7-2
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Excluding Unwanted Objects

A component part may contain many objects used to help define a solid body including sketches, datums, sheets, and construction geometry. Displaying the entire contents of all of the component parts in a large assembly can be confusing and difficult to manage, especially when you are working in context and reference specific objects in the components.
7
By defining a reference set in each of the component parts which contain only the solid body, unnecessary geometry can be left out of the assembly making it easier to manage.
This use of reference sets also works in accordance with the Master Model concept, allowing downstream users to access different sets of data from the master part file. There is no limit to the number of reference sets that may be created in a single part file and the same object may belong to multiple reference sets.
7-3
Reference Sets
Representing Components with Simple Geometry

Another use of reference sets is to represent the components with simpler geometry in the assembly. One reference set called BODY" could consist of the complete solid body while another reference set called SIMPLE" could consist of only a simplified solid or minimal wireframe geometry, (i.e. the guide string of a tube).
BODY" Reference Sets SIMPLE" Reference Sets
Using these SIMPLE reference sets in the assembly will let the component load faster, use less system memory, and allow for quicker graphic updates, yet still display selectable geometry for the component.
Default Reference Sets

By default, every component in an assembly has access to two reference set conditions:
D D
Entire Part" condition Empty" condition
The Entire Part" Condition

The Entire Part condition is the default component part condition and refers to all model geometry in a part regardless of any defined reference sets. Displaying the Entire Part is a quick way to address all model geometry in a component.
7-4
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
The Empty" Condition

The Empty" reference set is used as a place holder in an assembly when the part geometry need not be seen.
This reference set (EMPTY) serves as a place holder for the component (does not display).
This reference set (BODY) contains the solid geometry of the component part.
NOTE: When a component is replaced with its Empty reference set, any associative drafting objects in the assembly will be retained according to the Retain Annotations setting in Preferences"Drafting. When the geometry reappears by replacing reference sets, the drafting objects will return to their active state. NOTE: When an assembly is opened, a component represented by an empty reference set will remain unloaded.
7-5
Reference Sets
Display Techniques for Assemblies

The Simplified Assembly
A major benefit of reference sets is to represent component objects with simpler geometry in an assembly. This technique has several advantages.
D D D D
Retrieval is faster. Less system memory is used. Attribute information is still available. Dimensions to the assembly are associative.
There are different methods to simplify an assembly.
Simplified Solids
To use this technique, an associative copy of the complete solid model is created in the component part using the InsertForm FeatureExtract functionality in the Modeling Application. Then, unwanted faces are removed from the extracted body using the InsertFeature OperationSimplify function. A separate reference set that contains only this simplified solid is created and displayed in the assembly.
BODY" Reference Set SIMPLE" Reference Set
This method may be useful for manipulating complex solid models so that you can hide their internal detail in an assembly.
7-6
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Simple Curves
To use this technique, simple curves are created in the component part. These curves could be existing sketch, generator, or guide curves that are associated to the solid body. An additional reference set is created that includes only these curves. The display of the component in the assembly is controlled by replacing the reference set. This method may be useful for tubing, which can be represented by the guide string that was used to construct the solid.
BODY" Reference Set CENTERLINE" Reference Set
Faceted Representations
This display technique involves the use of the functionality that is a part of the Advanced Assembly Application. For more information on this application, you can refer to the technical documentation under Assembly Modeling.
7-7
Reference Sets
Right Hand and Left Hand Parts

One application of reference sets is to control the use left and righthand parts in an assembly when both configurations are in the same component part file. This can be achieved with the following procedure.
D D
Create a solid for either the right or left hand part. Mirror the solid body using InsertFeature OperationInstanceMirror Body. Create a reference set named RHBODY" and add the right hand solid to it. Create another reference set named LHBODY" and add the mirrored solid to it Specify the appropriate reference set when adding the part to the assembly. Specify attributes for the right and left hand reference sets to differentiate them in the assembly, especially if generating a parts list.
NOTE: Right and left hand parts can be created in separate part files using the Wave Geometry Linker. In this case, different reference sets would not be required.
Tools to Automate the Creation of Reference Sets

This course will utilize a function in a default file (ug_english.def or ug_metric.def) to automatically create a reference set which contains the model" geometry. The reference name for this course is BODY and will be created and saved with each part file. The variable set in the default file is: Assemblies_ModelReferenceSet: BODY Automating the creation of reference sets will ensure that you include the correct data, eliminate spelling errors, and proliferate the use of standard names. Reference Sets for Faceted Representations and light weight or wrapped" geometry can also be automatically created by adding names to the appropriate variables in the ug_english.def or ug_metric.def files.
7-8
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Creating Reference Sets

There are three situations in which you can create a reference set:
D
In a component part, outside of an assembly, when the component is the displayed part and the work part. In a component part, when designing in context of an assembly with the assembly being the displayed part and the component the work part. From an assembly during creation of a new component. (TopDown). The reference set will exist in the new component.
Reference Sets may be created and edited by choosing FormatReference Sets from the menu bar.
Create
After choosing the Create icon you will be prompted to enter a name for the reference set and select the objects to include in the reference set.
7-9
Reference Sets
The following rules apply to reference set names:

D D D
Must be 30 characters or less. Must have no embedded spaces. They are not case sensitive. The system automatically converts all names to uppercase characters. It is recommended that you use a common name for reference sets to make it easier to replace them in the assembly and to assist those using the component as a master model. Using the automated reference set creation function found within the default files ug_english.def or ug_metric.def can eliminate these concerns.
TIP
Origin and Orientation

You can define a reference set coordinate system and origin in the Create Reference Set dialog box.
If Create Ref Set, CSYS is toggled to No, the reference set will use the Absolute orientation and origin by default. If Create Ref Set, CSYS is toggled to Yes, you will be prompted to specify an orientation using the coordinate system orient menu and specify an origin point using the Point Subfunction dialog box. The orientation and origin of the reference set will not effect the location of the components in existing assemblies.
7-10
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Reference Set Information

You can obtain information about reference sets that reside in the work part by choosing InformationAssembliesReference Set from the main menu bar or by selecting the information icon from the FormatReference Sets dialog box.
7
Information
When you request information on a reference set using the InformationAssembliesReference Set method, the system will:
D D D
Highlight the members of the set in the graphics window. Display the origin and orientation in the graphics window. Provide a listing of relevant data in the Information window.
When you request information on a reference set by selecting the information icon from the FormatReference Sets dialog box, the system will:
D
Provide a listing of relevant data in the Information window.
7-11
Reference Sets
Activity 1 - Taking a look at Reference Sets

This activity will work with a subassembly of a vise assembly.
Fixed Jaw SubAssembly
7
In this activity, you will create a reference set in each of the three piece parts of a subassembly (dau_fixed_jaw_assm) which is a component of a larger assembly (vise_assm). You will give the reference sets a common name BODY" and add only solid bodies to them. Step 1 Change the Load Options.
-
Choose File"Options"Load Options. Change the Load Components option to All Components.
Step 2 Open the part dau_fixed_jaw_assm and start the Modeling and Assemblies applications.
7-12
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Step 3 Open the Assembly Navigator, if necessary.
Choose Assembly Navigator
and pin open.
Step 4 Verify the reference set in the fixed jaw.

-
In the Assembly Navigator, select the dau_fixed_jaw node with MB3 and choose Make Displayed Part.
Choose FormatReference Sets. Notice the BODY reference set is already created but is listed as Model ("BODY"), which identifies that it was created automatically. We are taking advantage of a customizable default file that allows us to give a name to the reference set that contains only the appropriate model geometry, in this case just the solid body.
Step 5 Verify the contents of the reference set.

-
Select Model ("BODY") from the dialog box and choose the information icon.
Note the data in the Information window and Exit it. Choose Cancel.
7-13
Reference Sets
Step 6 Make the fixed_jaw_assm the displayed part and work part.
-
In the Assembly Navigator window select the dau_fixed_jaw node with MB3 and choose Display Parent"dau_fixed_jaw_assm.
Step 7 Verify a reference set in the context of the assembly.
In the Assembly Navigator, double-click on the dau_jaw_plate node to make it the Work Part. Choose InformationAssembliesReference Sets. Choose the BODY reference set from the list. Choose OK. Note the data in the Information window and Exit it. Now notice the highlighted geometry in the graphics window.
Notice similar information is shown using this method of interrogation, however if you dismiss the information window the geometry that is contained in the reference set is highlighted in the graphics window and a CSYS is displayed at the origin.
-
Choose Cancel in the Choose Name dialog box.
Step 8 Do not close this part, you will use it in the next activity.
7-14
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Replacing Reference Sets

Although reference sets are created in the component parts, you actually use them in the next level assembly. You can benefit from using reference sets by:
D D
excluding unwanted objects from the assembly to reduce clutter. representing components with simpler geometry to improve system performance.
While working in context of an assembly, you may often need to change the display of various components to show different reference sets. The action of changing the currently displayed reference set of components in an assembly is termed replacing reference sets.
Replacing Reference Sets with the Assemblies pulldown

One way to replace reference sets in an assembly is by choosing AssembliesComponentsReplace Reference Set from the main menu bar.
7-15
Reference Sets
After selecting AssembliesComponentsReplace Reference Set, a Class Selection dialog box will become available for component selection from the graphics area. Once the desired component(s) has been selected a Replace Reference Set dialog box appears.
The system displays all of the reference sets available for the selected component(s). You can identify the reference set to display by:
D D
choosing a name from the list. entering the name of the reference set.
NOTE: You can select all components listed by entering an asterisk (*) in the name field of the Class Selection dialog box and clicking Enter.
7-16
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Replacing Reference Sets in context of an Assembly

Another way to replace reference sets in an assembly is by choosing FormatReference Set from the main menu bar and then choosing Set as Current. This option only works if your work part is set to the component of which you would like to replace the reference set. One benefit with this dialog box is that you can create the reference set in context of the assembly and then immediately use the new reference set by choosing the Set as Current icon in the same dialog box.
Set as Current
Reference Sets on the Assembly Toolbar

The Assemblies toolbar has an option to change the reference set of a component.
Reference Set
To change a Reference Set of a component, use the pulldown menu to choose any available reference set.
7-17
Reference Sets
Replacing Reference Sets with the Assembly Navigator

The Mouse Button 3 popup menu in the Assembly Navigator is a convenient way to replace reference sets for individual components. When you select the Replace Reference Set option on a component node in the Assembly Navigator, a menu of existing reference sets in that component appears with the one currently displayed in the assembly grayed out.
Choosing a reference set from the list changes the display of that component as it appears in the assembly. NOTE: Although you perform this action on a component node in the Assembly Navigator, you are actually changing the reference set name that is stored with the component object in its parent assembly.
7-18
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Activity 2 - Replacing Reference Sets in an Assembly

In this activity you will replace the reference sets displayed in the fixed jaw assembly. Step 1 Make the fixed_jaw_assm the work part.
-
In the Assembly Navigator, double-click on the fixed_jaw_assm node to make it the Work Part.
Step 2 List the components in the fixed jaw assembly.

-
Choose AssembliesReportsList Components.
NOTE: The term None appears in the Ref Set Name column for each component. This is a default condition that actually means the entire part is being referenced (no reference set). Even though there are reference sets named BODY in each of the three components of the fixed jaw assembly, you have not yet told the assembly to display them.
7-19
Reference Sets -
Choose FileExit in the Information window.
Step 3 Replace the reference set for the fixed jaw.

-
Choose AssembliesComponentsReplace Reference Set. Select DAU_FIXED_JAW from the graphics area and OK.
Fixed Jaw
Choose BODY as the new displayed reference set and OK.
The system updates the display of the fixed jaw so that you only see the solid. The other components will still be displayed in their entirety. Step 4 Replace the reference set for the jaw_plate while working in context of the assembly.
-
In the Assembly Navigator window, select the dau_jaw_plate node with MB3 and choose Make Work Part from the popup menu. Choose FormatReference Sets. Select Model ("BODY") from the list then choose the Set as Current icon.
Choose Close
7-20
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets -
In the Assembly Navigator, doubleclick on the dau_fixed_jaw_assm to make it the work part.
Step 5 Replace the reference set for the dau_plate_screws using the Assembly Navigator and the Assemblies Toolbar.
-
In the Assembly Navigator window, select the dau_plate_screw node with MB3 and choose Replace Reference SetBODY from the popup menu.
TIP
You can easily replace the reference set for multiple occurrences of a component on the same level of an assembly by packing the nodes first.
-
Select the second dau_plate_screw node in the assembly navigator with MB1. In the assemblies toolbar, select the down arrow in the reference set area and choose BODY.
All components are displaying their BODY" reference sets so only the solid bodies are displayed.
7-21
Reference Sets
Step 6 Verify that the reference sets were replaced.

-
Choose AssembliesReportsList Components. The reference set column now lists BODY for all of the components.
Exit the Information window.
7-22
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
SubAssembly Reference Sets

Just as you can create reference sets in piece parts to include or exclude geometric objects in an assembly, you can create reference sets in subassemblies to include or exclude component objects in the next level assembly. You are already familiar with using layer categories to organize part files, typically creating designdriven categories for each layer so that you can make all" invisible, then turn specific layers on, such as uppercavity" or drivetrain". You can use this same idea using reference sets to organize various ways to display your assembly. Use reference sets as assembly management tools, much like layers are used as part management tools. Example: The total assembly of a car has subassemblies relating to specific areas of the automobile:
D D D
engine drive train electrical, etc.
The engine block component has its model geometry added to an engine reference set. Now if, when viewing the entire car assembly, you want to look at only the engine, you can:
D
replace all components with their empty reference sets (model display will be empty). replace the empty reference sets with the engine reference sets.
Components that have data in the engine reference set will appear. Components that do not have that set will keep their last used reference set (empty). The result is that your assembly will show all of the components in the engine area.
7-23
Reference Sets
Activity 3 - Mass Replacement of Reference Sets

In this activity, you will work with a vise assembly and create a custom reference set. It will be named fastener on both the piece part and subassembly levels. Then you will perform mass replacements of the different reference sets throughout the assembly. You will see the display of the assembly change as different reference sets are employed.
All Components using Entire Part reference set
All Components using Body reference set
Only Fastener reference sets displayed
To do this, the body reference sets for solid bodies in the assembly have been created automatically by the system because of a default definition file setting.
7-24
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Second, you will create a fastener reference set in the three fastener parts, adding the solid body to it.
D D D
dau_plate_screws dau_shaft_nuts dau_screw_nuts
Third, you will create a fastener and body reference set in the four subassemblies and add only those components that have their own fastener and body reference sets.
D D D D
dau_fixed_jaw_assm dau_guide_assm dau_moving_jaw_assm dau_handle_assm Step 1 Open the part dau_vise_assm and start the Modeling and Assemblies applications.
In steps 2 through 10, you will create the different reference sets for the assembly. Keep in mind that, ordinarily, the reference sets would be created at the time the part was modeled. Step 2 Create reference sets for the shaft nut.
Choose Assembly Navigator
and pin it open.
7-25
Reference Sets -
Place the cursor over one of the headers in the Assembly Navigator and with MB3 choose Expand All
Place the cursor over a header
Select the dau_shaft_nut node and with MB3 choose Make Displayed Part. Create a Reference Set named fastener and add the solid body. Choose Close.
7-26
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets -
In the Assembly Navigator with MB3, select the node and choose Display Parent"dau_vise_assm.
NOTE: Since the reference sets are created in the component part, all occurrences of the components will be able to use them. Step 3 Create reference sets for the plate screw.
-
Make dau_plate_screw the Displayed Part. Create a Reference Set named fastener and add the solid body to it. In the Assembly Navigator with MB3, select the node and choose Display Parent"dau_vise_assm.
Step 4 Create reference sets for the screw nut.

-
Make the dau_screw_nut the Displayed Part. Create a Reference Set named fastener and add the solid body to it. In the Assembly Navigator with MB3, select the node and choose Display Parent"dau_vise_assm.
Step 5 Create reference sets in dau_fixed_jaw_assm.

-
Make dau_fixed_jaw_assm the Displayed Part and Work Part. In the Assembly Navigator select both dau_plate_screws and with MB3 choose Replace Reference Set"FASTENER. Create a Reference Set named fastener, selecting both plate_screws from the Assembly Navigator and choose OK.
In order for the reference set FASTENER, to display the desired objects, the correct objects must be added to it. If the dau_plate_screw nodes had been selected while their reference sets were set to Entire Part, then all of the plate_screw's objects would be displayed in the subassembly's FASTENER reference set. That is why both dau_plate_screw reference sets were changed to FASTENER, and then added.
7-27
Reference Sets -
Select all the nodes in the Assembly Navigator and with MB3 choose Replace Reference Set"BODY. Create a Reference Set named body, selecting all the component nodes in the Assembly Navigator and choose OK.
Notice that the body reference set appears as Model ("BODY") in the list. This is because the name body matches the default assigned name by the system. The system recognizes this and appropriately assigns the model" reference set attribute. Step 6 Create reference sets in the dau_guide_assm.
-
Make dau_guide_assm the Displayed Part and Work Part. In the Assembly Navigator, select both dau_shaft_nuts and with MB3 choose Replace Reference Set"FASTENER. Create a Reference Set named fastener, select both dau_shaft_nuts from the Assembly Navigator and choose OK. Select all the nodes in the Assembly Navigator and with MB3 choose Replace Reference Set"BODY. Create a Reference Set named body, selecting all the component nodes in the Assembly Navigator.
Step 7 Create a reference set in dau_handle_assm.

-
Make dau_handle_assm the Displayed Part and Work Part. Select all the nodes in the Assembly Navigator and with MB3 choose Replace Reference Set"BODY. Create a Reference Set named body, selecting all the component nodes in the Assembly Navigator.
7-28
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Step 8 Create a reference set in dau_moving_jaw_assm.

-
Make dau_moving_jaw_assm the Displayed Part and Work Part. In the Assembly Navigator, select both dau_plate_screws and the dau_screw_nut, with MB3 choose Replace Reference Set"FASTENER. Create a Reference Set named fastener, selecting the screw_nut and both plate_screws from the Assembly Navigator.
7 Select all the nodes in the Assembly Navigator and with MB3 choose Replace Reference Set"BODY.
Create a Reference Set named body, selecting all the nodes in the Assembly Navigator.
Step 9 Make dau_vise_assm the Displayed Part and Work Part. Step 10 Display the main assembly using the Entire Part reference sets.
-
In the Assembly Navigator, place the cursor on dau_vise_assm and with MB3 choose Select Assembly. On any node with MB3 choose Replace Reference Set"Entire Part.
7-29
Reference Sets -
Accept the Information window by choosing OK.
Step 11 Display the main assembly using the BODY reference sets.
-
With all of the nodes selected, click MB3 on different nodes, choose Replace Reference Set.
Notice the Reference Sets available between different assemblies and components. (Not all nodes have FASTENER Reference Sets.)
-
With MB3 on any node, choose Replace Reference Set"BODY.
Accept the Information window by choosing OK.
7-30
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Step 12 Display the main assembly using the FASTENER reference sets.
-
In the Assembly Navigator, select all of the nodes. On any fastener node with MB3, choose Replace Reference Set"FASTENER.
An information window pops up informing you that some of the component parts do not have a FASTENER reference set.
-
Choose OK.
Step 13 Close all parts; do not save.
7-31
Reference Sets
Editing Reference Sets

There are options to delete, rename and change the contents of existing reference sets available in the Reference Sets dialog box. (FormatReference Sets)
7
Delete
Add Objects Remove Objects
Rename
Function Delete Rename Add Objects Remove Objects
Description Allows you to delete the highlighted reference set. Allows you to rename the highlighted reference set. Allows you to add objects to the highlighted reference set. Allows you to remove objects from the highlighted reference set.
TIP
Use Information"Assemblies"Reference Set to visually verify the contents of a reference set as well as receive an information window displaying contents.
7-32
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Deleting Reference Sets

The process of deleting a reference set does not delete any geometry. It merely eliminates the list" of information associated with the geometry. If the reference set you are deleting is being used in a loaded assembly, the confirmation message will tell you that it is in use.
7
NOTE: If you delete a reference set that is used in an assembly, when you open or return to the assembly, it will show the entire part (default condition).
Renaming Reference Sets

Renaming a reference set allows you to change its name without having to delete and recreate the set. NOTE: If you rename a reference set that is used in a loaded assembly, the system will automatically change the name stored with the component object in the assembly. If the assembly is not loaded when the reference set is renamed, when you open the assembly, it will show the entire part (default condition).
7-33
Reference Sets
Load Options and Reference Sets

It is possible to replace reference sets as you open an assembly. This is useful if you are working with a large assembly and do not know what reference sets were displayed when it was was last saved. You can define the reference sets to be loaded in the Load Options dialog box. Choosing Default Reference Sets expands the Load Options dialog box to include additional options.
Reference Set List Enter reference set name
Replace reference sets in all components in assembly tree Adds entered name to list Moves selected reference set up in the list
Removes selected name from list
Moves selected reference set down in the list
When an assembly is opened, the system will try to load the first reference set in the list from each component. If a component does not contain this reference set, the system will try to load the next reference set in the list. The system will continue to look down the list until it finds a reference set that can be loaded. The Move Up and Move Down buttons are used to reorder the list and change the hierarchy of the reference sets. NOTE: As Saved, Entire Part, and Empty are default entries in the list. They can be moved up or down but cannot be removed from the list.
7-34
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
Activity 4 - Load Options and Reference Sets

In this activity you will specify which reference sets to load by using the Load Options dialog box, before opening an assembly. Step 1 Change the Default Reference Sets in the Load Options.
-
Choose FileOptionsLoad Options. Choose the Default Reference Sets button. Enter plastic in the New Reference Set entry field and choose Add. Select Empty from the reference list and choose the Move Up button so that it is positioned below Plastic. When the system cannot find the Plastic reference set it will look for the next reference set in the list.
Choose OK to accept the settings.
Step 2 Open the dau_hole_punch_assm assembly part located in your parts directory.
All of the components that have a PLASTIC reference set were loaded. Step 3 Change the hole punch assembly back to the BODY" condition.
-
In the Assembly Navigator window, select the dau_hole_punch_assm node with Mouse Button 3 and choose Select Assembly from the popup menu.
7-35
Reference Sets -
In the Assembly Navigator window, select any of the nodes under dau_hole_punch_assm with Mouse Button 3 and choose Replace Reference SetBODY from the popup menu. Choose OK to dismiss the message window that appears.
The message simply states that a reference set cannot be set for the displayed assembly. Step 4 Remove PLASTIC from the Default Reference Sets in the Load Options.
-
Choose FileOptionsLoad Options. Choose Default Reference Sets in the Load Options dialog box. Select the PLASTIC Reference Set from the list. Choose the Remove button. Select Empty from the reference list and choose the Move Down button so that it is positioned at the bottom of the list. Choose OK.
7-36
Unigraphics NX
Reference Sets
SUMMARY Reference sets are used to limit the amount of information brought into an assembly or sub-assembly. They allow you to create different displays of the same assembly or component to simplify the assembly or provide alternate configurations. In this lesson you:
D D D D D
Created reference sets. Replaced reference sets. Created reference sets in subassemblies. Replaced reference sets throughout the entire assembly structure. Defined what reference sets were to be loaded using Load Options.
7-37
Reference Sets
7
7-38
Unigraphics NX
TopDown Assembly Modeling

Lesson 8
PURPOSE One method of assembly modeling is to build the component part files in context of the assembly, in other words, build parts around other parts. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D D
Create a new component using the TopDown method. Design a component in context. Build associativity across parts in the assembly using the Geometry Linker. Edit Linked Geometry. Edit the Timestamp for a link.
D D
8-1
General Concepts
TopDown assembly modeling is the process in which you create a new component part while working in context of the assembly. Since the definition of a component part is dictated by its function within the assembly, you first create the geometry in the assembly. Then, when you want to work with this geometry as a component, you push the geometry into its own part file leaving only a pointer (the component object) in the assembly. Design in Context is the process in which you define geometry in one part to reference geometry in some other part. It is accomplished while the uncompleted component is the work part and is displayed in the context of the assembly. This process can be applied when a hole in one component part needs to be positioned to some feature in another component part.
8-2
Unigraphics NX
Top Down Design

In top down design, components are created and edited in context of the assembly. The new components are created while the assembly is both the displayed part and the work part. There are two basic methods to create a component topdown.
Method One
D
Create geometry in the assembly (sketch, curves, solid, etc.)

assembly
comp. obj. 1
D
comp. obj. 2
Create a new component and add the geometry to it.

assembly
comp. obj. 1
comp. obj. 2
8-3
Method Two
D
Create an empty" component object first.

assembly
comp. obj. 1
D
comp. obj. 2
comp. obj. 3
Make the empty" component the Work Part.

assembly
Work Part
D
comp. obj. 2
comp. obj. 3
Create the geometry in the component part.

assembly
comp. obj. 2
comp. obj. 3
8-4
Unigraphics NX
Creating a New Component

A new component is created by choosing the Create New option from the AssembliesComponents pulldown in the main menu bar while the assembly is the work part. This function may also be started by choosing the Create New Component icon from the Assemblies toolbar.
The Class Selection dialog box will be available to allow you to select geometry to add to the new component part (Method One). If no geometry has been created you can immediately choose OK (Method Two).
8-5
After a part file name is designated for the new component, you can specify information in the Create New Component dialog box.
Component name: The name of the component object. The default name for the component is the name of the part file. Ref. Set name: The name of a reference set to be created with the new component. If none is specified, no reference set is created. NOTE: All geometry selected will be added to the reference set.
Layer options: This defines what layer any added geometry will be placed. The choices are Work, Original or As Specified. Component Origin - Determines the origin and orientation of the component part. If Copy Defining Objects is toggled OFF, selected geometry that depends on defining objects that were not selected will be left out of the new component. If this option is toggled ON, all selected geometry and defining objects are copied to the new component. Delete Originals - Determines the fate of the original data in the assembly file if geometry is selected.
8-6
Unigraphics NX
Verifying the Creation of a New Component

Since the graphics display does not necessarily change, it may not be obvious that a new component was created. There are a few ways to verify the creation of a new component.
D
Activate the Assembly Navigator and look for the new component node. Select the node with Mouse Button 1 to highlight the geometry that belongs to it. List components using AssembliesReportsList Components and look for the new component in the list. Change the work part to the new component using AssembliesContext ControlSet Work Part. Read the Status line.
8-7
Activity 1 - TopDown Assembly Modeling

In this activity, you will create a new component for a locator in the context of the assembly. Step 1 Open dau_fixture_assm and start the Modeling and Assemblies applications. Step 2 Create the geometry in the assembly. Choose Block. Use the Origin, Edge Lengths option to create a block of the following size and define the origin of the block at the top left corner of the baseplate as shown. (Hint: select one of the line endpoints at the corner.) X Length Y Length Z Length = = = 2 2 1
8
Origin
ZC YC XC
Step 3 Create a new component for the block. Choose Create New. Select the block you just created and then choose OK.
8-8
Unigraphics NX
TopDown Assembly Modeling -
In your directory enter ***_locator for the file name of the new component and choose OK. In the Create New Component dialog box, make sure Delete Originals is toggled ON and choose OK.
NOTE: Because Delete Originals was turned on, the geometry was copied to the new component and then deleted from the assembly. Step 4 Verify that the new component was created.
Choose Assembly Navigator. With MB1 select the ***_locator node; notice the locator block highlights.
8-9
Considerations of Selecting Data During Component Creation

Adding data to a new component can be thought of in terms of moving or copying the data into the new part. If Delete Original is turned ON, it is moved; otherwise it is copied.
D
All geometry, whether moved or copied, will have the same color, layer and blankstatus as the original. The occurrences of that geometry created in the assembly will look" identical to the originals. If you attempt to move" an object, and some other object which you are not moving depends on that object, then the selected object will in fact be copied".
Example: If you select a sketch (which has been extruded) to be moved to a component, but you do not select the associated extruded body, the sketch will be copied.
If you select a line (which is part of a sketch) to be moved to the component, but you do not select the sketch, the line will be copied.
D
If you copy only a sketch and the sketch has a swept solid associated with it, the copied sketch will not be associated to the solid. If the sketch is attached to a face, the body it is attached to will be copied. If you move a solid that was created from a sketch, the sketch is copied. Any expressions that the sketch uses are copied into the new part. Any expressions that are not required by the sketch are not copied. Any sketch dimensions associated with the sketch are copied.
D D
8-10
Unigraphics NX
Designing in Context of an Assembly

Designing in Context is the process by which you define geometry in one part by referencing geometry in another part. When designing in the context of an assembly, the component part in which you are adding the geometry must be the work part and the assembly must be the displayed part. Creation or editing of geometry will take place in the work part, yet geometry in other components will be selectable. It is important to remember that when a component is added to an assembly, the geometry is not being copied into the assembly but rather it is being referenced by the assembly. Changes made to the component part will immediately be reflected in the assembly. If multiple occurrences of the same component exist in an assembly, they will all update because they are referencing the same component part.
Selecting Geometry Outside the Work Part

When working in the context of an assembly many functions allow you to select geometry from components other than the work part. This is useful when specifying a location with the Point Subfunction dialog box or checking a clearance using InformationObject or AnalysisDistance. In the example below, a block is created in the current work part by defining diagonal points relative to geometry in nonwork parts, eliminating the need to calculate and enter numerical values for the edge lengths.
Diagonal Point 1 End point Block is created in Work Part
Diagonal Point 2 Mid point
NOTE: The size and position of the block in the example above are not associative. Associativity between components can be attained through the use of the Wave Geometry Linker, Interpart Expressions, and Mating Conditions, which are covered later in the course.
8-11
Sketching in Context
Sketching in context is the ability to create and edit sketches in a component part while the assembly is displayed. While sketching in context, you can reference geometry within other component parts of the current assembly.
Work Part
When working with sketches in context of an assembly:

D
Existing objects belonging to the sketch can be selected in any occurrence of the work part. If the Work Part is changed while working on a sketch, the active sketch will be updated and you will be presented with the Sketch Tools dialog box for the new Work Part.
Introduction to Interpart Modeling

The Wave Geometry Linker provides a means to associatively link geometry from another component part in an assembly into the Work Part. The linked geometry is associative to the parent geometry so modifying the parent geometry will cause the linked geometry in other parts to update. Different types of objects can be selected including points, curves, sketches, datums, faces, and bodies. The linked geometry can be used for creating and positioning new features in the Work Part.
8-12
Unigraphics NX
This function is accessed by choosing AssembliesWave Geometry Linker, or by choosing the icon on the assemblies toolbar.
Type of Geometry to Link
Options particular to geometry type
The At Timestamp toggle lets you specify where the linked feature is placed in the feature list. When turned off, any new features later added to the original geometry will be reflected in the linked geometry. When turned on, any new features will not affect the linked geometry. Blank Original lets you blank the original geometry so that the linked geometry in the Work Part will be easier to select while the assembly is displayed. Create NonAssociative allows you to create a link of the original geometry so that the linked geometry in the Work Part is nonassociative. The linked geometry is automatically created as a Broken Link.
8-13
NOTE: The Wave Geometry Linker is not turned ON by default. To enable it, you must change the statement Assemblies_AllowInterPart: no to yes in the ug_english.def or ug_metric.def files.
Geometry Types
Several different types of geometry can be selected.
D
Points Curves Sketches/Strings Datums Faces Regions (of Faces) Bodies Mirrored Bodies Routing Objects
When selecting the geometry to copy, you also need to consider how permanent the geometry will be. If you copy as little geometry as possible to do the job, performance will be improved but updates will be less robust when the parent geometry is altered. For example, if you copy individual curves to another part, the link may not update correctly if one of the curves is deleted. On the other hand, if you copy an entire sketch, curves may be removed or added to it and the link will still update.
8-14
Unigraphics NX
Considerations when Interpart Modeling

Before using the WAVE Geometry Linker, the user should evaluate the downstream impacts. Do not use the WAVE Geometry Linker just because you can. This is a very powerful tool that adds another level of complication to the assembly.
8-15
Activity 2 - Designing in Context of an Assembly

In this activity, you will add a workpiece to the fixture assembly and then edit the locator in context to complete the design. Design Intent: The purpose of the locators is to hold a workpiece in place during a drilling operation. Material must be removed from the locators so that they conform to the size of the work piece and do not extend out over the opening in the baseplate. Holes must be added to the locators so that they can be attached to the baseplate.
work piece
locator
baseplate
First you will modify the locator so that it does not extend out over the opening in the baseplate. You will reference a sketch in the baseplate to subtract the necessary material from the locator. Step 1 Open dau_fixture_assm2. Start the Modeling application and verify the Assemblies application is ON. Step 2 Create a linked sketch.
-
Change the Work Part to dau_locator. Change the Work Layer to 15 and make layer 21 selectable. Layer 15 will be the layer where the linked geometry resides.
Choose Wave Geometry Linker.
Choose Sketch/String.
8-16
Unigraphics NX
Select the sketch used to create the opening on the top of the baseplate (the sketch will be hidden by the solid edges).
Sketch -
Choose OK.
Step 3 Extrude the linked sketch and subtract it from the locator. Choose Extrude Body. Select the sketch as the Section String and OK to accept. Choose Trim to Face/Plane. Make sure the direction reference vector is pointing upward. If so, choose OK; if not, choose Cycle Vector Direction. Then choose OK. Select the top face of the locator as the trimming face and choose OK.
Trimming Face
8-17
Set the default offsets and taper to 0 (zero) and choose OK. Choose Subtract to remove material from the block.
Choose Cancel.
Next, you will add a workpiece component and use its solid to subtract material from the locator. Step 4 Add the work piece component.
Change the Work Part to dau_fixture_assm2.
Choose Add Existing. Choose the Choose Part File button from the Select Part dialog box. Choose the part dau_work_piece from the parts directory. In the Add Existing Part dialog box, change: Reference Set to BODY Positioning to Absolute Layer options to Original and choose OK. Define the origin at XC=0, YC=0, ZC=0.5 and choose OK. Choose Cancel.
Step 5 Create a linked body of the work piece.

-
Change the Work Part to dau_locator.
8-18
Unigraphics NX
Change the Work Layer to 16. Layer 16 will be the layer where the linked geometry resides.
Choose Body. Toggle Blank Original to ON so that the linked geometry will be easier to see. Select the dau_work_piece solid body and choose OK.
Step 6 Subtract the linked solid from the locator.

-
Choose InsertFeature OperationSubtract.
8 Select the dau_work piece as the tool solid and OK to accept.

Select the dau_locator block as the target solid.
Step 7 Add a relief hole.
Choose Hole. Enter a Diameter of 0.2 .
8-19
Select the top face as the planar placement face at the approximate position shown and select the floor of the pocket as the Thru Face.
Hole Position Thru Face
Choose OK.
Choose the Point onto Point icon Select the endpoint shown as the target
to position the hole.
Edge End point
Next, you will create holes in the locator that are associated with the holes in the baseplate. Step 8 Create linked geometry for the holes to be aligned with the baseplate.
Choose Wave Geometry Linker. Choose Point.
8-20
Unigraphics NX
Change the Point Type to Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center and select the upper edge of the hole in the baseplate shown.
Arc Center
Choose the Curve icon and select the upper edge of the other hole in the baseplate shown.
Curve
Choose OK.
Step 9 Extrude the linked curve.
Choose Extrude Body. Select the curve you just created as the section string and OK to accept. Choose Trim to Face/Plane. Make sure the direction vector is pointing upward and accept it. Select the top face of the locator as the trimming face and choose OK.
8-21
Choose OK to accept default offsets and taper of 0 (zero). Choose Subtract.
Step 10 Create a counterbore hole.
Choose Hole.
Choose Counterbore for the hole type. Enter a CBore Diameter of 0.3, a CBore Depth of .25, and a Hole Diameter of 0.2. Select the top face of the locator for the planar placement face. Select the bottom face of the locator for the Thru Face. Choose OK.
Choose Point onto Point
to position the hole.
Select the linked point you created as the target.
Make layer 1 the Work Layer and all others invisible. Choose EditBlankUnblank All of Part to display the original work piece solid.
8-22
Unigraphics NX
Step 11 Add another dau_locator.

-
Make dau_fixture_assm2 the work part. Replace the Entire Part reference set of the Locator with the BODY reference set.
Choose Add Existing. Select the dau_locator and choose OK. Ensure the following settings: Multiple Add = No Reference Set = BODY Positioning = Reposition Layer options = Original Choose OK. Select the origin point as shown below.
Select origin here
8-23
Click MB1 on the WCS handle shown below. You will use this handle to rotate the component.
Note: Components removed for clarity.
Click MB1 on this handle
Enter 180 for the Angle. Choose Apply.
Choose the Point onto Point icon. Select the first and second points as shown below.
Select first point here Select second point here
Choose OK. Choose Cancel.
In the next few steps you will make changes to the baseplate and workpiece to demonstrate the associativity of the linked geometry in the locator. Step 12 Edit the sketch for the pocket in the baseplate.
-
Change the Work Part to dau_baseplate.
8-24
Unigraphics NX
Choose Sketch. Select the S21_POCKET sketch in the Sketch Toolbar List Box to activate it. Choose Dimensions. From the Dimensions dialog, select the expression offset=1 and change its value to 1.5. Press the Enter key to update the sketch.
8
The offset expression controls the distance the sketch curves are from the edges of the block.
-
Choose OK. Choose Update Model. Choose Finish.
Step 13
Edit the positioning dimension of a hole in the baseplate.

-
Choose EditFeaturePositioning.
8-25
Choose the feature BLIND_HOLE_PATTERN from the list and OK. Choose Edit Dimension Value. Select the positioning dimension p29=1.625 and change the expression value to 1.25. Choose OK until the model updates.
When the position of the hole was changed, the linked point and the counterbore hole in the locator moved with it. Step 14 Edit the width of the workpiece.
-
Change the Work Part to dau_work_piece. Choose ToolsExpression. Choose the expression width=5. Change the value to 4.75. Choose OK to update the model.
Step 15 Change the Work Part to dau_fixture_assm2. Step 16 Close all parts; do not save.
8-26
Unigraphics NX
Localized Interpart Modeling

Localized interpart modeling is the ability to relate the geometry of interacting parts in an assembly. This has two distinct advantages in assembly modeling:
D D
Reduces the cost of design changes. Maintains design integrity.
This reduces cost since changes made to a single part can be automatically propagated to other related component parts in the assembly. Design integrity is maintained because the parts will always have correct geometric and positional relationships. A simple example would be creating a gasket which is derived from a parent face in a housing. If the size or shape of the parent face changes in the housing, the gasket will change accordingly.
Example:
To create this object in Part B... Part B
then, whenever Part A is changed...
link the face 2 ...from Part A into
8
Assembly
Part B and extrude it to form the feature in Part B
... Part B will change correspondingly
Part A
8-27
Interpart Modeling Applications

Interpart modeling can be applied to different areas including tooling and manufacturing engineering.
D D D
Part in process modeling Mold/Die Core/Cavity design Weldments
Part in Process Modeling

Part in process modeling allows you to validate and illustrate a manufacturing process plan. An example would be a cast part which is used to derive a machined part. A linked solid is created in the machining part from the casting. Then, features unique to the machining are added to it.
casting part machining part
Linked body created from the casting into the machining file.
Linked body is edited and refined
Your processes may require you to design the finished machined part first and subsequently define the cast part. This can be accomplished with a similar procedure. Instead of removing material with holes, grooves, and chamfers, etc., you would add material using offset and simplify features.
8-28
Unigraphics NX
Mold/Die Applications
Interpart modeling can be applied to create an associative mold or die from a finished piece part. As in the case of inprocess parts, a solid body can be linked from one part into another where features can be applied to define the cavity in the mold or die.
Linked geometry from the design model and blank are used to create a cavity. design model mold/die
mold/die blank
8-29
Weldments
Weldments may be created by modeling the individual members in separate part files, adding the members as components to an assembly, creating linked bodies in the assembly, and uniting them. The linked bodies that make up the weldment are associative to the parent geometry in the component parts.
Linked solid bodies are created in the assembly and united. assembly
bracket
latch
You can use Load Options to load the weldment solid (which resides in the assembly) without loading the parent geometry in the component parts.
8-30
Unigraphics NX
Activity 3 - In Process Parts

In this activity, you will apply interpart modeling to derive a machined part from an existing cast part. Step 1 Using the seedpart, dau_seedpart_in, create a new part called ***_process_housing and start the Modeling application. Verify the Assemblies application is ON. Step 2 Add the casting part as a component. Choose Add Existing. Choose Choose Part File. Select the part dau_cast_housing from your parts directory. Set Reference Set to Body, Positioning to Absolute, Layer options to Original, and position at WCS 0,0,0. Choose Cancel.
Step 3 Create a component part for the machining. Choose Create New. Choose OK in the Class Selection dialog box (because you are not adding any objects).
8-31
Enter ***_machined_housing in your directory and choose OK. Accept the default component settings.
Step 4 Create a linked body in the machined part.

-
Change the Work Layer to 16. Change the Work Part to ***_machined_housing.
Choose Body. Toggle Blank Original to ON, if necessary. Select the casting solid body and choose OK.
NOTE: The following step assumes you are proficient in featurebased modeling. You may add only one or two of the features, if desired, and continue to the next step. The purpose of the activity is to illustrate the basic procedure for defining inprocess parts. Step 5 Add features to define the machining solid.
1.126" Thru Hole 4 x .312" Thru Holes Groove
8-32
Unigraphics NX
Create a Rectangular Groove with a diameter of 1.625 inches and a width of 2.5. Align the top of the groove with the uppermost circular edge of the part.
Tool edge
Select the smaller of the two diameters located here as the target edge.
Create a Simple Thru Hole with a diameter of 1.126 inches in center of part. Create a Simple Thru Hole with a diameter of .312 inches dia and position it .5 inches in both directions in one corner of the part (choose the bottom edges). Create an Instance Array of the .312 inch hole with 2 holes and a 3 inch offset in both the XC and YC directions.
The features were added to the linked body in the machining part which is still associated with the solid body in the casting. Step 6 Edit the cast part.
-
Choose EditBlankUnblank All of Part to see the original cast solid body. Change the work part to dau_cast_housing. Edit the boss feature, changing the diameter to 1.75 and the height to 2.75.
Note the change to the machined" solid. Step 7 Close all parts; do not save.
8-33
Activity 4 - Wave Geometry Linker - Mirror Body

In this activity you will create the last component for this assembly using the Wave Geometry Linker - Mirror Body function.
Step 1 Establish the assembly part file.

-
Open the part file dau_wave_assm, start the Modeling application, and verify the Assemblies application is ON.
8-34
Unigraphics NX
Step 2 Create a new part file for the next component in your assembly.
Choose Create New. Choose OK in the Class Selection dialog box. Enter ***_left_side for the part name. Inside the Create New Component dialog box, set the following: Component Name: Ref. Set name: Layer options: Component Origin: left_side (leave blank) Original Absolute
Choose OK.
Step 3 Create the left side part by using the Wave Geometry Linker mirror function.
-
Make ***_left_side the work part. Change the work layer to 20.
Choose Mirror Body. From the graphics screen, select the dau_inter_right_side as the part to mirror.
8-35
Confirm your selection if necessary, then choose OK.
Select the center datum plane as the mirror plane
Select this part to mirror
Mirrored Body
Select the Center Datum Plane of dau_inter_body as the plane through which you will mirror the part, then choose OK.
8-36
Unigraphics NX
Step 4 Make dau_inter_body the work part. Step 5 Modify the part per the illustration below.
Step 6 Make dau_wave_assm the work part.
8-37
Editing Links
Links may be edited by choosing EditFeatureParameters and selecting a linked feature. Linked features have an edit dialog box similar to the one below.
8
While this dialog box is displayed, the cursor is active in the graphics area so that new parent geometry can be selected for the link being edited. The new parent geometry must be the same type as the old geometry (curve, datum, solid body, etc.). Parent indicates the parent geometry type. If the feature was linked, but the link has been broken, the parent is shown as Broken Link. Part shows the name of the part where the parent geometry is located. At Timestamp lets you specify the timestamp at which the linked feature is placed. If this option is toggled ON one of the parent part features may be selected from the list to specify a new timestamp location for the linked feature being edited. If this option is toggled OFF, all features in the parent part will be reflected in the linked feature.
8-38
Unigraphics NX
Break Link lets you break the association between the linked feature and its parent. This means that the linked feature will no longer update if its parent changes. You can later define a new parent by selecting geometry with the cursor.
Broken Links
A link may become broken for several reasons:
D D
The parent geometry is deleted. The path from the linked geometry to its parent part is broken. This can occur if the component containing the parent geometry is removed or substituted. If you deliberately break the link using Edit Feature dialog box.
Broken links can be repaired with the Edit Link dialog box.
Deleting Parent Geometry

To prevent unintentional deletion of the parents of linked geometry, a message will warn you if a delete operation would cause interpart links to break. This applies to operations using EditFeatureDelete, EditDelete, and Model Navigation ToolDelete while the parts containing the linked geometry are loaded.
8-39
The Information option provides details about the links that will be broken in an Information window.
8-40
Unigraphics NX
Activity 5 - Editing a Link

In this activity, you will create and edit a linked curve used to create a pin by associating it with a different edge. Step 1 Open the part dau_wave_block_assm, start the Modeling application, and verify the Assemblies application is ON.
Step 2 Create a new empty component for a pin. Choose Create New. Choose OK in the Class Selection dialog box. Enter a part name ***_pin where *** are your initials. Use the following settings in the Create New Component dialog box. Layer options: Component Origin:
-
Original Absolute
Choose OK to create the component. If necessary, cancel the Class Selection dialog box.
Step 3 Link a curve from the block into the pin component.
-
Change the work part to ***_pin and the work layer to 15.
8-41
Choose Curve. Select the top edge of the hole in the block shown below.
Select the top edge of the hole
Choose OK to create the linked geometry.
Step 4 Create a solid for the pin.

-
Change the work layer to 1. Extrude the linked curve downward (-ZC) using the Direction & Distance method and an End Distance of 1.5.
Choose Cancel, if necessary.
8-42
Unigraphics NX
Step 5 Edit the parent geometry.

-
Change the work part to dau_wave_block. Make sure Delay Interpart Updates is toggled OFF (Assemblies Delay Interpart Updates no check mark). Change the Diameter of the hole SIMPLE_HOLE(2) to .375.
NOTE: The hole will move slightly after editing because the hole is positioned from the edge by twice the diameter. Step 6 Edit the linked curve in the pin.
-
Change the work part to ***_pin. Choose EditFeatureParameters.
8-43
Select the feature LINKED_CURVE(0) from the feature list and choose OK.
Select the top edge of the larger hole with the cursor in the graphics area. This edge will be the new parent of the linked feature.
Select the top edge of this hole as the new parent
Choose OK twice to update the part.
8-44
Unigraphics NX
The pin updates to the size and location determined by the new parent edge.
8-45
Activity 6 - Editing the Time stamp of a Link

In this activity, you will create a linked mirrored body and then edit its timestamp to exclude some features that are in the parent body. Step 1 Open the part dau_wave_bracket_assm and start the Modeling and Assemblies applications. This assembly contains only one component for the left hand part. The component consists of a solid body and a datum plane to be used for mirroring.
Step 2 Create a new empty component to contain the mirrored body. Choose Create New. Choose OK in the Class Selection dialog box. Enter a part name ***_bracket_rh where *** are your initials. Use the following settings in the Create New Component dialog box. Layer options: Component Origin:
-
Original Absolute
Choose OK to create the component.
8-46
Unigraphics NX
Step 3 Create a linked mirrored body.

-
Change the work part to ***_bracket_rh.
Choose Wave Geometry Linker. Make sure At Timestamp is toggled OFF.
Choose Mirror Body. Select the left hand bracket solid as the body to mirror and choose OK. Select the datum plane as the plane to mirror through and choose OK. Fit the view to see the mirrored body.
All features from the parent body are reflected in the mirrored body.
Step 4
Edit the timestamp of the linked mirrored body to exclude the three holes in the vertical flange.
-
Choose EditFeatureParameters.
8-47
Select the LINKED_MIRROR(0) feature to edit and choose OK.
8
-
Toggle At Timestamp to ON. Select SIMPLE_HOLE(5) from the list of features and choose OK twice.
This will change the mirrored body as if the link had occurred immediately after SIMPLE_HOLE(5) was created.
8-48
Unigraphics NX
The three holes in the vertical flange do not appear in the mirrored body because they were created after SIMPLE_HOLE(5),
(6) (7)
(8) (5)
(4)
8-49
SUMMARY TopDown Assembly Modeling allows you to build components in relation to other components within the same assembly. Interpart modeling methods allow you to relate geometry of interacting parts in an assembly. In this lesson you:
D
Created new components using the TopDown method. Designed in Context of the assembly. Created components using interpart modeling. Built associativity across component parts in an assembly using Geometry Linker. Edited the timestamp for a link. Edited linked geometry.
D D D
D D
8-50
Unigraphics NX
Interpart Expressions
Lesson 9
PURPOSE Interpart expressions allow you to link expressions between components in an assembly. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D
Create and apply referencing interpart expressions.
9-1
General Concepts
Interpart Expressions (IPEs) allow the user to establish relationships between expressions of separate part files. A change to an expression in one part file may affect a change to an expression in a different part file, thus altering the geometry of that part. Interpart expressions are disabled by default in Unigraphics to give the customers time to establish rules or conventions on how they are to be used within their organization. Your system administrator can enable IPEs for your use. A simple example is if you wanted to constrain a hole in a part called abc.prt so that its diameter is always linked to the pin diameter in a part called xyz.prt. You could create the following expression in the assembly file. abc::dia=xyz::dia + clr Thereby creating a link between the two expressions. The result being when either the expression dia in part xyz.prt or clr" (for clearance) in the assembly file are changed, the hole diameter in part abc.prt automatically changes in the assembly.
9-2
Unigraphics NX
Types of Interpart Expressions

Interpart expressions can be created in two basic forms, referencing or overriding.
Referencing Expressions
Referencing expressions are used to reference an expression from one part to an expression in another part. This means that the value of one expression will depend on the value of an expression in another part. There are two ways that referencing expressions can be used. The driving expression can be created in the assembly and be referenced by the component parts below it.
ASSEMBLY
dia=0.5
PIN
pin_dia=assembly::dia
hole_dia=assembly::dia
BLOCK
The alternative is to have one component reference an expression in another component directly.
ASSEMBLY
PIN
BLOCK
pin_dia=0.5
hole_dia=pin::pin_dia
9-3
Overriding Expressions
Overriding expressions are those that are created in an assembly and have an interpart link on the left side of the expression equation (part_a::length=1). Although they reside in the assembly, they assign a value to an expression in a component part. The expression in the component part will take on this value when the component is opened with the assembly. In the example below, the hole_dia expression in the block part is being overridden by the expression in the assembly which sets it equal to the pin diameter.
ASSEMBLY
pin::pin_dia=0.5 block::hole_dia=pin::pin_dia+.03
PIN
BLOCK
!pin_dia=0.5
!hole_dia=.53
The expression being overridden will appear as locked (a ``!" is placed in front of it). This means that it can only be edited from the expression in the assembly which is overriding it. NOTE: Overriding expressions can only be created in an assembly and used to override the value of an expression in one of its components.
9-4
Unigraphics NX
Creating Interpart Expressions

Interpart expressions are created and edited in the Edit Expression dialog box found under ToolsExpression.
Functions related to interpart expressions
9-5
The following functions are related to Interpart Expressions: Function Used by Description Allows you to list a description of where the selected expression is used. When used in conjunction with interpart expressions this option will only list usage by parts that are currently loaded in your session. Initiates the link process and prompts you to choose a part file and expression to be linked. Parts can be chosen from the cur rently loaded parts or from disk. Activates the Edit Interpart Link dialog box. Activates the Load Parts dialog box and allows you to fully load selected partially loaded parts, so that the interpart expressions will update. Allows you to lock an expression to prevent it from being overridden by another part using interpart expressions. A locked expression will appear with a !" in front of it (i.e. !hole_dia=5)
Create link Edit link Open Lock
TIP
When creating links, it is also possible to create a link by simply entering the expression in the entry field using the correct syntax, i.e. x=part_name::expression_name. If your filename includes hyphens (-) then the part name alone should have quotes placed around it, i.e. x=123-4567-890"::length
9-6
Unigraphics NX
Edit Interpart Links

The Edit Interpart Links dialog box is activated upon selection of the Edit Link option and provides three options:
Function Change link Delete link Delete all links
Description Allows you to change all expressions that refer to the part selected so that they refer to a new part. Allows you to break the relationship with a selected part and replaces it with the current numeric value. Similar to Delete Links except it will delete ALL interpart links in the current work part.
NOTE: When changing links, the expressions must exist in both parts. If this is not the case, the system will display a message that it will substitute the missing expressions with the current numeric values.
9-7
Load Parts
The Load Parts dialog box is activated upon selection of the Open option and provides the following options:
Function PartsAll modified PartsAll referenced Load all parts in list
Description Lists only those partially loaded parts whose expressions have been modified. Lists all partially loaded parts with expressions referenced by the work part. Allows you to fully load all parts listed.
TIP
The Open"Component Fully option in the Assembly Navigator can also be used to fully load and update a components interpart expressions.
9-8
Unigraphics NX
Activity 1 - Creating Interpart Expressions

In this activity, you will create interpart expressions so that the diameter of a pin in one part is related to the diameter of a hole in another part. This is a simple example to introduce the concept of interpart expressions. The Wave Geometry Linker could also be used to associate the sizes of the parts. Step 1 Open the inch seedpart and start the Assemblies Application if necessary. Step 2 Rename the seedpart to ipe_block_assm (ipe = interpart expression). Step 3 Add the part dau_block as a component on the work layer and position it at absolute coordinates 0,0,0. Step 4 Add the part dau_pin as a component on the work layer and reposition as illustrated below.
Step 5 Create expressions in the assembly that will be referenced by the pin and the block.
-
Choose ApplicationModeling. Choose ToolsExpression. Enter the following expression for the diameter. ipe_dia=.75
9-9
Interpart Expressions -
Press Enter. Enter the following expression for the clearance. ipe_clr=.05
Press Enter. Choose Apply.

ipe_block_assm ipe_clr=.05 ipe_dia=.75
Work Part
pin
block
Step 6 Edit the expression for the diameter of the pin to link it to the expression in the assembly.
-
Make dau_pin the Work Part.
The Expressions dialog box will update to list the expressions in the pin.
Select the expression dia=1 from the list of expressions in the Expressions dialog box.
9-10
Unigraphics NX
Remove the 1 (after the dia=") from the expression string.
Choose the Create link icon. Choose ipe_block_assm from the Select Part dialog box as the part to link and choose OK.
9-11
Choose the expression ipe_dia=.75 as the expression to link to and choose OK.
Press Enter.
The expression should look like the following: dia=ipe_block_assm::ipe_dia

-
Choose Apply in the Expressions dialog box to update the pin.
TIP
To see the entire expression, you may have to stretch" the Expressions dialog box to make it wider.
ipe_block_assm
9
TIP
ipe_clr=.05 ipe_dia=.75
dau_pin dia=ipe_block_assm::ipe_dia
dau_block
You can also create the link by typing the expression directly in the text field using the correct syntax x=part_name::expression_name The Create Link icon simply lets you avoid typing.
9-12
Unigraphics NX
Step 7 Edit the expression for the diameter of the hole to link the diameter and clearance set in the assembly part file.
-
Change the Work Part to the dau_block. Select the expression dia=1 , remove the 1, and choose the Create link icon.
Choose ipe_block_assm from the Select Part dialog box as the part to link to and choose OK. Choose the expression ipe_dia=.75 as the expression to link to and choose OK. At the end of the expression, type a +.
TIP
You can use the End key on the keyboard to avoid using the arrow keys to get to the end of the expression.
Choose the Create link icon. Choose ipe_block_assm from the Select Part dialog box as the part to link and choose OK. Choose the expression ipe_clr=.05 as the expression to link to and choose OK. Press Enter.
ipe_block_assm ipe_clr=.05 ipe_dia=.75
dau_pin
dau_block dia=ipe_block_assm::ipe_dia+ipe_block_assm::ipe_clr
9-13
Choose Apply to update the block.
Step 8 Edit the expression in the assembly to test the associativity.

-
Change the Work Part to ipe_block_assm. Change the expression ipe_dia from .75 to 1. Choose OK to update the parts.
The diameter of the pin and the hole are both driven by the expression in the assembly. The block and pin will always fit when used together in this assembly. Step 9 Close all parts; do not save.
9-14
Unigraphics NX
Partial Loading Issues

Partially loading components in an assembly conserves system memory by not loading all data associated with the file. Only expressions and data required to display the part are loaded. The rest of the feature data is not loaded. When using interpart expressions, it is possible to edit the expressions defining a feature in a partially loaded component. However, the affected geometry will not update to reflect the changes until the part has been fully loaded. Once the part is fully loaded, the changes made to the expressions are immediately applied to update the features.
Resolving Interpart Expression References

When a part containing an IPE is loaded, the system looks for the name of the expression in the referenced part. If the correct name is found, the system has resolved the link. If it is impossible for the link to be resolved, the system will notify the user, delete the link, and assign the last known constant value. For example, suppose you had the following expression in a component part file referencing an expression in an assembly file. dia=ipe_block_assm::ipe_dia If you were to delete the expression ipe_dia" within the assembly part file, the expression in the component would revert to: dia=.75 If you perform a Save As" on a part, any loaded part which references it will rename the expression so the link is preserved. If the other parts are not loaded at the time the Save As was performed, their expressions can be changed later by using the Edit links function in the Edit Expressions dialog box.
9-15
Tips and Recommended Practices

Before using interpart expressions, you should evaluate their downstream impacts. Do not start assigning IPEs just because you can. IPEs are powerful tools but do complicate your assemblies and make them hard to understand. Keep things simple and organized. In general, IPEs should be used when the parts have a physical constraint and are to be used in the same assembly. Although you can use IPEs with parts not assembled together, it is not recommended.
TIP
Consider setting up companywide standards on how and when IPE's are to be used. It is a good idea to have a naming convention such as always using a prefix on the expression name such as ipe_dia". This will make such an expression readily identifiable and the user will know that it is being referenced. Use of IPE locks is recommended for critical dimensions that the designer wants to protect from being overridden by another part or assembly. You should not use overriding expressions on the same component from different assemblies. This would cause the component to be updated each time it was loaded by the different assemblies. For this reason, IPEs should not be used for standard parts such as a bolt or screw.
In general, it is a good practice to only edit IPE expressions when all of the referenced parts are loaded so that the impact of the change can be immediately understood. This way you will not be creating any traps for future users. If a part fails to load because of an IPE change, the following will help you troubleshoot the problem.
D D
Suppress the feature that failed to update, then unsuppress it after you have corrected the problem. Close all other parts then open only the part causing the problem. The part should load and allow you to investigate which expressions are responsible. You can then lock the expressions and delete the offending links.
9-16
Unigraphics NX
SUMMARY Interpart expressions allow you to link the expressions between components in an assembly. Whenever a change occurs to an expression in one part file, the related expression in the other part file(s) will change accordingly. In this lesson you:
D
Created and applied interpart expressions.
9-17
9-18
Unigraphics NX
Offset Curves
Offset Curves
Lesson 10
PURPOSE This lesson will address the associative offset curve functionality and illustrate its parametric qualities. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D
Create associative offset curves. Edit associative offset curves.
10
10-1
Offset Curves
Offset Curves
The Offset function allows you to create curves offset from existing lines, arcs, conics, splines, and edges. The system computes points normal to the selected parent curves and constructs the offset curves through these points. The offset curves can either be associative or nonassociative. If associative curves are created, a parameter for the offset distance is created relative to the parent objects. You can access the Offset Curves function by choosing Insert"Curve Operation"Offset
TIP
The advantage of the Associate option provides automatic update of wall thickness or other constant distance geometry used in swept bodies, eliminating the need to constrain the curves in a sketch, and greatly reducing the steps required to edit the distance between geometry.
Curves can be offset within the plane defined by the selected geometry or to a parallel plane by using the draft angle and height options. Multiple curves can only be offset if they are coplanar and in a contiguous string (i.e., they must be endtoend). The object types of the resulting curves are the same as their input curves except for conics, which are offset as splines. If you only select a line, you will need an additional point away from the line to define the offset plane. InformationFeature provides additional information on associative offset curves, such as lists of parents and parameters used in the creation.
10
10-2
Unigraphics NX
Offset Curves
Procedure
D
Select the curve(s) or edge(s) to offset. A conehead vector in the plane of the selected curves points toward the positive offset direction. Define the offset parameters in the Offset Curves dialog box. Choose OK (or Apply if you wish the dialog box to remain open).
D D
Toggle to determine Offset method of associative or copy.
10
10-3
Offset Curves D
Offset by:
D D
Distance offsets curves in the plane of the input curves. Draft offsets curves in a plane parallel to the plane of the input curves at a specified distance. A plane symbol marks the plane in which the offset curves lie. Law Curve offset curves at a distance defined by a law, which you specify with the law subfunction.
Distance: The offset distance from the selected curves in the direction indicated by the conehead vector. Negative distance values offset in the opposite direction. Draft Height The distance from the plane of the input curves to the plane of the resulting offset curves. Draft Angle The angle from the offset vector to a line normal to the reference plane, where the input curves lie.
Below, is an example of offset curves created with the Draft offset method. The Draft Height is 0.25, and the Draft Angle is 30.
Top View C1 C2 Original curve Offset C3 C4
Front View .25 30
10
10-4
Unigraphics NX
Offset Curves D
Trim: Methods for trimming or extending the offset curves to their intersection points.
D D
None: The offset curves will be neither trimmed nor filleted. Extended Tangents: Extends the offset curves to their intersection points. Fillet: Constructs an arc tangent to the endpoint of each offset curve. The radius of the arc is equal to the offset distance. Trimming options are only available when applying the offset methods of Distance or Draft.
Extended Tangents Fillet None
Curve tangents extend to intersection
A fillet is formed
Lines are offset but not joined
Extend Factor: A multiple of the offset distance. It controls the length of the offset tangent extension lines. This option is used only for Extended Tangents trim when Associative Output is toggled OFF.
10
10-5
Offset Curves D
Extended Tangents extends the offset curves to their intersection points. The length of the offset tangent extension lines is controlled by the Extend Factor, which is a multiple of the offset distance. It is used for all curves except lines, which are simply extended to the intersection points. The figure below is an example that uses an Extend Factor.
Added line between endpoints. Curves have extended to 0.2 max.
0.2 Extension max 0.4
Original curves
Extension factor = 0.5 Added intersecting curve tangent lines D
Fillet constructs an arc tangent to the endpoint of each offset curve. The radius of the arc is equal to the offset distance. The figure below shows an offset created with this Trim Method. If you create repeated offsets (i.e., by choosing Apply without changing any inputs), the radius of the arc increases each time by the offset distance.
Original curve Offset
D D
Group Objects: Lets you choose whether to group the offset curves together. Approx Tolerance: Determines the accuracy of the offset curve if the input curve is a spline or conic. Number of Copies allows you to construct multiple sets of offset curves. Each set is offset by the specified distance (according to the Offset Method used) from the previous set.
10
10-6
Unigraphics NX
Offset Curves D
Reverse Direction: Reverses the positive offset direction of the conehead vector. Redisplay Reference: Objects: Lets you redisplay the direction vector and, if you are using Offset by Draft, the plane symbol marking the offset plane. Associative Output: If this option is toggled ON, the offset curves are associated to the input curves and defining data. Input Curves: Lets you specify the disposition of the original curves.
D D D
Retain: Keeps the input curves when the offset curves are created. Blank: Blanks the input curves when the offset curves are created. Delete: Deletes the input curves when the offset curves are created. This option is grayed out when Associative Output is toggled ON. Replace: Acts like a move operation, where the input curve is moved to the offset curve position. This option is grayed out when Associative Output is toggled ON.
NOTE: The disposition instructions that you specify in the Input Curves options only apply to curves, not edges or sketch curves, which are always kept. You can use the Blank option with sketch curves when Associative Output is toggled OFF.
10
10-7
Offset Curves
Activity 1 - Capturing Design Intent with Offset Curves

In this activity you will define the interior portion of a gasket using associative offset curves. After opening the part file you will see that the outside profile of the gasket has been created and extruded. Follow the instructions below to create an inside profile that will update when the outside profile changes. Step 1 Open dau_gasket and start the Modeling application. Step 2 Create the associative offset curves.
Choose Offset Curves. (Insert Curve OperationOffset) Choose Solid Face, select the top face, and choose OK. Choose OK.
10
10-8
Unigraphics NX
Offset Curves -
Define the Offset Curve parameters as shown below.
The offset vector should be pointing into the solid body. If needed, select Reverse Direction.
10
10-9
Offset Curves -
Choose OK. The offset curves are created.
Step 3 Extrude the offset curves. Choose Extruded Body. Select the offset curves. Choose OK. Choose Trim To Face/Plane. Choose Cycle Vector Direction and choose OK. Select the bottom face for the trimming face and choose OK twice. Choose Subtract.
The gasket is complete.
10
10-10
Step 4 Edit the profile of the gasket.

-
Choose Sketch.
Unigraphics NX
Offset Curves -
Activate the SKETCH_000 sketch. Edit the dimensional constraints as illustrated below and then choose OK.
Choose Finish.
Step 5 Edit the width of the gasket.
Choose the Model Navigator icon. Double Click on the OFFSET_CURVE feature. Change the Distance to .5 and choose OK.
The gasket cross section updates. Step 6 Close the Part; do not save.
10
10-11
Offset Curves
SUMMARY Associative Offset Curves is a parametric tool you can use to make new features from and parallel to existing edges. In this lesson you:
D D
Created associative curves using the Offset function. Edited associative curves.
10
10-12
Unigraphics NX
Trim Body / Split Body

Lesson 11
11
PURPOSE The purpose of this lesson is to explain the difference between the Trim Body and Split Body functionalities. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D
Identify the differences between the Trim Body and Split Body functions. Define a solid body's contour by using the Trim Body functionality.
11-1
Trim Body 11 This option lets you trim one or more target bodies using a face, datum plane,
or other geometry. You select which portion of the bodies you want to keep, and the trimmed bodies take the shape of the trimming geometry. You can access the Trim Body feature by choosing, Insert"Feature Operation"Trim. To use the Trim Body option, follow these steps:
D D D
Choose Trim Body. Select one or more target bodies, then choose OK. Select a face or datum plane, or define other geometry, to trim the target bodies. A vector is displayed. The portion of the target bodies in the direction of Choose to accept the direction of the vector or reverse it.
the vector will be removed.

D
You must select at least one target body, even when there is only one possible target displayed. You can select a face or multiple faces if they belong to the same solid body or a datum plane to trim the target bodies. NOTE: When you trim a body using a face, the face must be large enough to cut through the body completely. If it does not, the following error message is displayed:
11-2
Unigraphics NX
You can also use the menu to define the following alternative objects to trim the target bodies:
D D D D D
Plane Cylinder Sphere Cone Torus
11
Determining which portion of the target bodies to keep is done by the direction of the normal vector. The vector points away from the body portion that will be kept. When the normal vector is displayed, a dialog box offers you two options:
11-3
11
In the figure below the displayed direction is accepted. Notice that the resulting body is the portion of the target body that the vector pointed away from.
Defined plane Accepted direction
If you are trimming a solid body, the trim operation will probably fail if:
D D
A face of the trimming sheet is tangent to the face of the solid body. The face of the solid body is coincident with any joint of adjacent faces of the trimming sheet. The selected trimming geometries are faces from different solid bodies.
11-4
Unigraphics NX
Trim Body / Split Body D
The selected trimming geometries are disjointed (i.e., unconnected) faces from a solid body.
The body to be trimmed (cylinder) Tangent: shaded face of trimming sheet and face of the body to be trimmed Trimming sheet (multifaceted)
11

Coincident: joint of trimming sheet and face of the body to be trimmed
To resolve this problem, try the following.

D
Trim the sheets with curves and/or planes.
The Trim Body function does not affect or delete parametric information.
TIP
To maintain associativity of the trim to the solid body; define the trimming feature by one of the following methods: Relative Datum Planes Feature created through the use of the Geometry Linker
11-5
11
Split Body
This function is similar to the Trim Body function. It differs, however, in that instead of trimming, it divides the target bodies and strips all parametric data. To use the Split Body option, follow these steps: Choose the Split Body icon or Insert"Feature Operation"Split.
A warning dialog box is displayed (see Removal of Parameters section below).

D D D
Choose OK. Select one or more target bodies, then choose OK. Select a face or datum plane, or define other geometry, to split the target bodies.
This operation removes all parameters from the bodies that are created by the split. The following warning is displayed when you first choose the icon:
If you do not want to remove the parameters from the body, you can choose Cancel at that time. To continue with the split, choose OK. Notice that, once you have selected OK, the warning message is not repeated if you choose the Split Body icon again. If, at the end of the split operation you change your mind, choose EditUndo and the body's parameters will be restored. You must select at least one target body, even when there is only one possible target displayed.
11-6
Unigraphics NX
You can select a face or datum plane to split the target bodies. NOTE: When you split a body using a face, the face must be large enough to cut through the body completely. If it is not, the following error message is displayed:
11
You can also use the menu to define the following alternative objects to split the target bodies:
D D D D D
Plane Cylinder Sphere Cone Torus
Only one pick is allowed for the selection of the Split Body. You will not be given the opportunity to confirm your choice, nor can you "combine" faces to define a multifaceted sheet. If this is required, you must extract and sew them before performing the Split operation. When the Split is performed you will see the following notification:
11-7
11
If you are splitting a solid body, the split operation will probably fail if:
D D
The face being used to split the body is tangent to the face of the body. The face of the body is coincident with any joint of adjacent faces of the splitting sheet body.
The body to be split (cylinder) Tangent: shaded face of splitting sheet and face of the body to be split Splitting sheet (multifaceted)

Coincident: joint of splitting sheet and face of the body to be split
To resolve this problem, try the following.

D D D
Extract sheets from the solid body. Trim the sheets with curves and/or planes. Create any necessary caps and sew the sheet bodies into a solid body.
11-8
Unigraphics NX
Activity 1 - Windshield Fluid Reservoir

In this activity, you will define the external shape of a windshield fluid reservoir using functionality that was introduced in this lesson. Step 1 Open the inch seed part file and rename it ***_fluid_reservoir. Step 2 Create a block feature. Choose Block. Enter: X Length = 14.25 Y Length = 13.25 Z Length = 14 and locate at WCS 0,0,0. Step 3 Import the moldline sheet solids. The sheet solid that you are about to import, defines the inner fender well and inside grill area.
-
11
Change the work layer to 81. Choose FileImportPart.
11-9
11
In the Import Part dialog box window set the options as shown below and choose OK.
Select the dau_trim_sht1 part file and choose OK. Indicate a destination point of WCS 0,0,0.
Step 4 Trim the block.

-
Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Trim. Select the block as the target body and choose OK. Select the imported sheet solid as the Trim Body. Choose Reverse Default Direction.
The normals should point toward the WCS just before the block is trimmed. Keep in mind that the normals will point to the portion of the solid that is to be trimmed away.
11-10
Unigraphics NX
Trim Body / Split Body -
Make layer 1 the work layer and 81 invisible.
11
Step 5 Save and Close the part.
11-11
11
SUMMARY The Trim Body function removes a portion of the solid body, but does not remove parametric data. The Split Body function splits the target body and removes all parametric data. In this lesson you:
D D
Identified the difference between Trim Body and Split Body functions. Defined a solid body's contour using the Trim Body function.
11-12
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Face Operations
Lesson 12
PURPOSE This lesson describes various face options you may use to modify existing solid bodies and features. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D
12
Create an Offset Face Feature. Create different Taper Features.
12-1
Face Operations
Offset Face
You can use this option to offset one or more faces of a body along the face normals. The Offset Face feature can be reached through Insert"Feature Operation"Offset Face. To offset faces, you must:
12
D D D
Enter the Offset Value. Choose the Offset Selection Type. Select the objects.
The offset distance can be positive or negative, providing the topology of the body does not change. A positive offset distance is measured along a face normal pointing away from the solid. The Offset Faces function allows you to offset selected faces by using Offset Faces or all the faces of a feature by using Offset Features. Offset Body will offset all of the faces of the entire solid body provided existing features will remain intact.
12-2
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
When you choose Offset Faces, the following options are displayed:
After you select the desired faces or body and choose OK, the faces are moved and the body is updated.
Before After
12
Limitations
You cannot instance an offset feature. Offset Faces fails when the offset would result in a selfintersecting face.
If you attempt to offset this inner face and the offset would cause the face to be selfintersecting, the offset will fail.
12-3
Face Operations
Activity 1 - Offset a Face

This activity demonstrates one possible situation where the Offset Face function may be applied. You will create a bolt hole circle via the circular array functionality. The part also needs to be clocked to a specific orientation. To facilitate the orientation requirement, one of the holes in the circular array will be edited to be slightly larger. Step 1 Open the part file dau_offset1 and start the Modeling application.
12
Step 2 Create the circular array. Choose Instance. Choose Circular Array. Select SIMPLE_HOLE(9) and choose OK. Enter: Choose OK. Choose Datum Axis. Select the datum axis and choose OK. Choose Cancel. Number = 6 Angle = 360/6
12-4
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Step 3 Edit the size of one of the holes. If the parametric value for one of the holes is changed, all of the holes in the circular array would change. So, to accomplish our orientation intent, we will add a parametric feature to the hole that is to control the clocking of the part.
Choose the Insert"Feature Operation"Offset Face. Enter .0625 for the Offset Value and choose OK. Choose Offset Faces. Select the cylindrical face of the hole shown below, choose OK, and then Cancel the Offset Face dialog box.
12
Select this cylindrical face.
The face is offset a value of .0625, but we actually wanted the hole to become larger. The following step will remedy this. Step 4 Edit the offset value. Choose Model Navigator. Double Click the OFFSET feature (bottom of the list).
12-5
Face Operations -
Choose Feature Dialog. Edit the value to -.0625 and choose OK two times.
The face is offset to the new value. Step 5 Change the hole size of the bolt hole circle.
12
In the Model Navigator, doubleclick on any INSTANCE feature. Choose Feature Dialog. Change the .375 to .50 and choose OK two times.
Notice that all of the holes updated to the new size and that the hole with the offset feature maintained its .0625 offset. Step 6 Close the part; do not save.
12-6
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Taper
The Taper option lets you apply a taper to faces relative to a specified vector. The Taper dialog box is shown in the figure below. The Taper dialog box is a Selection Steps dialog box.
From Edges Tangent to Faces
Faces
Splitline Taper (Not covered in this course)
12
12-7
Face Operations
You can select one or more faces, edges, or individual features to be modified. However, they must all be part of the same solid body.
Taper Direction and Angle

The taper vector (i.e., the draw direction) must be defined such that it is oriented appropriately based on what you wish to taper. The taper angle is applied relative to the vector direction. To help you visualize this concept, imagine the vector in the center of the body pointing in the appropriate direction. A positive angle causes the system to taper the selected faces inward (toward the vector or center of the body); a negative angle causes the system to taper the selected faces outward (away from the vector).
12
Taper Reference Point

The taper reference point defines a point on the taper plane (which is normal to the taper direction vector). The cross section of the body at the plane that contains the reference point is unchanged by the taper operation. The taper feature is associated to its reference point. For example, if you define an edge endpoint as the reference point of a taper, the taper will update as necessary if the edge is modified. If you delete the object used to define the reference point (you receive a Notification message before this happens), the taper uses the coordinates of the reference point's position when it was deleted. If you wish, you can edit the taper feature to give it a new associative reference point. A reference point is not required for the From Edges or Tangent to Faces Taper Types.
12-8
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
In the illustration below, the same values were used in both cases. The direction vector is along the positive Z axis and the taper angle is 10 degrees. The only difference is the location of the reference point.
(The dashed lines represent the original solid body) Reference Point
Z Y X
12
Taper Plane
The figure below shows that if you taper the external and internal faces using the same reference point and direction vector, the internal faces taper opposite to the external faces. (In other words, in this example, the taper adds material to the bottoms of both the internal and external faces.) If you want the internal and external faces to taper in the same direction, you need to taper the internal faces separate from the external faces.
Z Y X (The dashed lines represent the original solid body)
12-9
Face Operations
Tapering From Edges

You can use the From Edges option to taper along a selected set of edges by a specified angle. This option is particularly useful when the desired edges are not contained in a plane normal to the direction vector. The figure below illustrates how the taper emanates at the given angle from all the selected edges.
12
The upper edges are selected
The angle is applied uniformly through all the selected edges
If you selected edges that are smooth, the faces that will be tapered are the adjacent faces on the side in which the taper direction vector points, as shown below. This figure also shows that if you select multiple edges, the taper may be created with multiple faces.
These edges are selected. This face will be altered
Direction vector
Before
After
12-10
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Variable Angle Tapers

Variable tapers may be created by using the Taper Type From Edges. After the edges have been selected the taper is applied by specifying various taper angle values at different points along the selected edges. Interpolated values will be used between the points. See the example below.
Draw direction vector
Point 1 Angle = 0
Selected edges
Point 4 Angle = 20
12
Point 2 Angle = 10
Point 3 Angle = 20
Before
After
Isocline and Draft

Isocline - This is the default mode for the creation of all tapers. Taper surfaces created in Isocline mode generally must satisfy whatever condition is specified by the value of the taper Angle. True Draft - Tapers created in the True Draft mode use a different geometry definition for draft surfaces than that used by the Isocline mode. Taper surfaces created in this mode are in some cases more accurate than those created using Isocline. In addition, tapers created in True Draft mode are not required to meet the conditions specified by the taper Angle. You can sometimes create a taper using True Draft mode that you could not create using the Isocline mode. The True Draft taper mode is available only with the From Edges Taper Type.
12-11
Face Operations
Tapering Tangent to Faces

You can use the Tangent to Faces option to taper by a given draft angle, with the draft being tangent to the faces you select. The angle is used to determine isocline curves which will be used as reference objects. The taper faces are then created on the side away from the direction vector as shown below.
Taper created tangent to selected face
Draw direction vector
12
Before
Face selected for taper
Taper angle
After
This taper type is particularly useful for moldings and castings, to compensate for any possible underdraft.
Selection Steps
The Taper dialog box has four selection steps:
When the Faces to Taper step is active, you can select the faces involved in the taper operation. If the Taper Method is Faces, select the face(s) that you wish to taper. If the Taper Method is Tangent to Faces, select the face(s) whose tangent faces you wish to taper. You can select all the faces in a feature or body by setting the Collector to Feature Faces or Body Faces, respectively. The other Collector options available for this selection step are Faces, Region Faces, Tangent Faces, and More... . More... will allow you to select other Collection Methods. If the Taper Method is From Edges, Faces to Taper is grayed out.
12-12
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
This step lets you select and deselect Reference Edges when the Taper Type is From Edges. (It is grayed out for the other Taper Types.) If the Collector option is Face Edges, all the edges of the selected face will be selected. If you wish, you can reset the Collector to Chain Edges, Tangent Edges, or More... ., and deselect edges or select additional edges.
When the Draw Direction step is active, you can define the taper direction vector. The Axis Method options, which appear in the changeable window when the Draw Direction step is active, can help you define the vector.
12
Inferred Vector Two Points At Angle Edge/Curve Vector Face Normal Plane Normal Datum Axis XC Axis YC Axis ZC Axis Vector Constructor
Inferred Vector: the axis method works similarly to the Inferred Point method. Two Points: Allows you to create a vector using two points. At Angle: Will create a vector at an angle from the positive XC axis in the XC-YC plane.
12-13
Face Operations
Edge/Curve Vector: the direction vector is determined by the endpoints of a curve or edge that you select. Face Normal: you can select a planar face, whose face normal will be the direction vector or you can select a cylindrical face, whose axis will be the direction vector. If you want to reverse the direction vector, select Reverse Draw Direction. Plane Normal: Will use the Normal of any plane you select.
12
Datum Axis: Will use an existing Datum Axis to determine the vector direction and location. XC Axis, YC Axis, ZC Axis: the direction vector is determined by the current orientation of the respected WCS axis. Vector Constructor: Works similar to the Point Constructor dialog box. Reverse Draw Direction: Choose this option if you want to reverse the displayed direction vector, .
When the Reference Point step is active, choose a point on the taper plane to act as a reference point. The Reference Point step is required when the Taper Method is Faces or Splitline Taper. It is grayed out for the other taper methods.
12-14
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
You can use the Point Method options to help you select the Reference Point. The Point Method options appear in the changeable window, located under the Selection Steps icons, in the Taper dialog box when the Reference Point step is active.
Inferred Point Cursor Location Existing Point End Point Control Point Intersection Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Quadrant Point Point on Curve/Edge Point On Surface Point Constructor
12
Other Options
Angle is the angle of the taper. If Taper All Instances is toggled ON, a taper that you apply to one instance is applied to all instances in the array. If Taper All Instances is toggled OFF, the taper is applied only to the instance that you selected. If the Taper Method is From Edges, you can choose Preview Faces to Taper after selecting edges. This option highlights the faces that would be tapered if you do not change the selected edges or the direction vector.
12-15
Face Operations
If Confirm Upon Apply is toggled ON, after selecting Apply, you will be presented with a confirmation dialog box as well as a preview of the applied taper. This option also allows you to perform various analysis functions as well as reverse the draw direction if the taper was applied in the wrong direction. If the results are correct simply accept the results.
12
12-16
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Editing Tapers
You can edit all the creation parameters that you used to create a taper, except you cannot change the Taper Type.
Procedure
To create a taper, choose the Taper icon and follow these steps:
D D D
Enter the taper Angle. Define the Taper Type. Select faces if the Taper Type is Faces or Tangent to Faces. Select edges if the Taper Type is From Edges. You can see which faces will be tapered by choosing Preview Faces to Taper. The Collector options can aid you in the selection.
12
If necessary, define the taper direction vector with Reverse Draw Direction. The Axis Method options can help you define the vector.
Define a Reference Point if the Taper Type is Faces. The Point Method options can help you define the point.
If you are applying the taper to an instance, decide whether you want to Taper All Instances. Confirm Upon Apply can be toggled ON to preview the result. Choose OK or Apply to create the taper.
D D
12-17
Face Operations
Activity 2 - Taper Solid

This activity will help you understand how to define the taper plane direction and reference point.
Design Intent
The part below is to be cast in zinc. Apply a 10 degree taper to all of the vertical faces of the solid body, relative to the Parting Line. The current sizes of the bottom of the part and the top of the pad should be maintained. Step 1 Open the part dau_taper and start the Modeling application.
12
Pad
Boss
Side Pull Parting Line/Plane
Step 2 Examine the model by using Information"Feature.

-
Choose InformationFeature to review the features in this model. After reviewing the list of model features choose Cancel.
12-18
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Step 3 Taper the planar faces of the block feature.

-
Choose the Insert"Feature Operation"Taper. Enter 10 in the Angle field. If necessary, set the taper type to Faces. Change the Collector to Feature Faces. Select the large block feature in the graphic window. Click MB2 to advance to the Draw Direction Selection Step.
12
Specify the taper direction by selecting a planar face that is parallel to the XC-YC plane. The Taper Direction Indicator needs to point up. If required, choose Reverse Draw Direction. Click MB2 to advance to the Reference Point Selection Step.
Select an endpoint on the bottom face of the block to define the taper plane. Accept if required and choose Apply.
The taper is then applied to the block.
12-19
Face Operations
Step 4 Taper the planar faces of the pad.

-
Verify that the Taper Angle field is still set to 10.
Set the taper type to From Edges. Change the Collector to Face Edges. Select the top face of the rectangular pad (the edges of the face are selected). Click MB2 to advance to the Draw Direction Selection Step.
12
Select the top face of the pad again; accept, if necessary, and choose Apply.
The taper is then applied to the faces of the pad starting at the selected edges. Notice that you did not need to define a taper point using this option.
Step 5 Taper the cylindrical face of the boss.

-
Choose Replace ViewTFRTRI (MB3). Verify that the Taper Angle field is still set to 10.
Set the taper type to Tangent to Faces.
12-20
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations -
Select the cylindrical face of the boss. Click MB2 to advance to the Draw Direction Selection Step.
Select the top face of the rectangular pad, accept if necessary, and choose Apply.
12
Before After
Step 6 Taper the planar face of the boss.

-
Verify that the Taper Angle field is still set to 10.
Set the taper type to Faces. Select the planar face of the boss. Click MB2 to advance to the Draw Direction Selection Step.
Select the top face of the pad to define the taper direction. Click MB2 to advance to the Reference Point Selection Step.
12-21
Face Operations -
Select a point from one of the edges of the top face of the block to define the taper plane, accept if necessary, and choose Apply.
Select a point from this face to define the taper plane.
12
Step 7 Taper the cylindrical face of the hole feature along its axis, with an angle of 75 so that the diameter at the outside face is unchanged.
-
Enter an angle of 7.
Set the Type to From Edges. Select the edge of the hole that lies on the face of the block. Click MB2 to advance to the Draw Direction Selection Step.
To define the draw direction, select any edge that is parallel to the XC axis. Accept it, if necessary. The draw direction vector needs to point in the +XC direction. Choose Reverse Draw Direction as required. Choose OK.
Notice the taper direction. This is because the taper is applied to the interior of the part.
12-22
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
The finished part should appear as shown below:
12
Step 8 Close the part; do not save.
12-23
Face Operations
Activity 3 - Internal & External Taper Directions

This activity will demonstrate the different taper directions relative to internal and external features. Step 1 Open the part dau_taper2 and start the Modeling application.
12
Step 2 Create Two Tapers, Different Directions. Choose the Insert"Feature Operation"Taper. Enter 15 for the Angle.
If necessary, set the Taper Type to From Edges. Change the Collector to Face Edges. Select and Accept the face as shown.
This face
Click MB2 to advance to the Draw Direction Selection Step.
12-24
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations -
Select the same face again to specify a draw direction. A vector appears indicating a taper direction pointing away from the solid body.
Turn ON Confirm Upon Apply. Choose Apply.
Notice the difference in direction between the external and internal tapers.
-
Choose Reject Result.
Step 3 Create Two Tapers, Same Direction.
12
Set the Taper Type to Faces. Change the Collector to Feature Faces. Select the Block feature in the graphic window. Click MB2 to advance to the Draw Direction selection step.
Notice that the face selected from Step 2 is still valid.

-
Click MB2 to advance to the Reference Point selection step.
12-25
Face Operations -
Select and accept, if necessary, the endpoint shown and choose Apply.
Block
12
This endpoint -
If the outside taper appears as shown below, Accept the results.
Change the Collector to Feature Faces. The Taper Type is still set to Faces.
12-26
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations -
Select the Rectangular Pocket feature in the graphic window; accept, if necessary. Click MB2 to advance to the Draw Direction Selection Step.
Specify the Draw Direction by selecting the face shown below.
This face
12
Choose Reverse Draw Direction to point the vector into the solid. Click MB2 to advance to the Reference Point Selection Step.
12-27
Face Operations -
Select and accept, if necessary, the endpoint shown.
12
-
This endpoint
Choose OK.
Now the internal and external tapers are going in the same direction.
Step 4 Close the part, do not save.
12-28
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
Activity 4 - Creating a Windshield Fluid Reservoir

In this activity, you will continue to develop the windshield fluid reservoir using functionality that was introduced in this lesson. Step 1 Open the ***_fluid_reservoir part file or open the dau_fluid_reservoir part file and then saveas ***_fluid_reservoir. Start the Modeling application. Step 2 Apply a variable taper along two edges. Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Taper.
12
Set the Taper Type to From Edges. Select the two edges shown below.
Select these two edges. -
Click MB2 to advance to the Draw Direction Selection Step.
Select the top face to define the draw direction.
12-29
Face Operations
The face normal is displayed (pointing up). Since the design intent is for the faces to taper out, we need to change the draw direction.
-
Choose Reverse Draw Direction. Choose the Variable Angle Point Selection Step.
12
The Reference Point Selection Step changes to the Variable Angle Point Selection Step when the Taper Type is set to From Edges. The icons do not change.
-
Specify the first point by selecting the end point as shown below and accept if necessary.
Select this end point. -
Enter a Variable Angle of 4. (Do Not Press Enter.) Specify the second point by selecting the end point as shown below and accept if necessary.
Select this end point.
12-30
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations -
Enter a Variable Angle of 6. (Do Not Press Enter.) Specify the third point by selecting the end point as shown below and accept as required.
12
Choose Modify Point. With % Arclength toggled ON, enter 65 and choose OK. Enter a Variable Angle of 8. (Do Not Press Enter.) Specify the fourth point by selecting the end point as shown below and accept if necessary.
Enter a Variable Angle of 15 and choose OK.
Step 3 Create the filler hole.

-
Choose the Insert"Form Feature"Boss.
12-31
Face Operations -
Select the top face as the placement face. Enter: Diameter = 2 Height = 1.5 Taper Angle =0 and choose OK.
12
Position the boss as shown below.
Step 4 Create the blends.
Choose the Insert"Feature Operation"Edge Blend. Enter a Default Radius of 1.5. Toggle Add Tangent Edges to ON.
12-32
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations -
Select and accept the edges shown below and choose Apply.
Select these edges.
12
Apply the blends shown below.

Apply a .375 blend to these tangent edges.
Apply a 1.5 blend to these tangent edges.
Change the Default Radius to .5.
12-33
Face Operations -
Select the edge at the base of the boss feature and choose OK.
Step 5 Hollow the solid body. Choose Hollow. Enter a Default Thickness of .08. Select the planar face of the boss feature, (top of the boss) to be pierced and choose OK twice.
12
Step 6 Create a lip on the filler hole. Choose Extrude. Select the edge shown below and choose OK.
Select the outside edge.
Choose Direction & Distance. Choose Cycle Vector Direction to point the vector down and choose OK. Enter: Start Distance End Distance First Offset Second Offset 0 .125 0 .06
12-34
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations -
Choose OK. Choose Unite. Select the solid body as the target solid.
12
Step 7 Review the solid body.

-
Shade the solid body using the right mouse button. Choose ViewOperationSection. Choose the More Options>> button. Choose the Specify Arbitrary Planes button. Choose Principal Plane. Choose XC Constant.
12-35
Face Operations -
Choose OK to accept the 0 (zero) value. Toggle Show Cap to ON. Move the Primary Plane and Secondary Plane sliders to inspect the interior of the reservoir.
The part may also be rotated in the viewing mode.
12
Step 8 Save the part and close it.
12-36
Unigraphics NX
Face Operations
12 The taper functionality allows the user to change the orientation of one or more faces of a solid body. Creating draft for cast parts would be one application for
SUMMARY The Offset Feature allows the user to move a face, multiple faces, or an entire body in a direction based on the face's normal. this parametric feature. In this lesson you:
D D
Created an Offset Feature. Created Taper features.
12-37
Face Operations
12
12-38
Unigraphics NX
Variable Radius and Cliff Edge Blends

Lesson 13
PURPOSE The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the Variable Radius and Cliff Edge blend functionality. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D
Create and edit a Variable Radius Blend. Identify Automatic and Constrained Cliff Edge blends.
13
13-1
Variable Radius Blends

You can create a variable radius blend by specifying multiple points along selected edges and entering a radius at each point. This creates a blend whose radius varies as specified. A tolerance is used to approximate the variable radius blend. The system uses the smallest of these three tolerances:
D D D
Tolerance in the Edge Blend dialog box Distance Tolerance in the Modeling Preferences dialog box The smallest entered radius of the variable radius blend divided by ten, unless the radius is zero
If the blend fails, tighten the tolerance. If the blend takes a long time to generate, loosen the tolerance.
13
To create a variable radius blend, you should:

D D D D D D D
Choose Edge Blend. Ensure that Allow Variable and Setback is toggled on. Select the desired edges to blend. Select a point location on an edge where you want the radius to vary. Modify the point location as necessary. Enter the variable radius for the selected point. Continue by selecting point locations and editing location and radius as required.
If you select on an edge that is not highlighted, that edge is selected. If you select on an edge that is highlighted, a point is created on that edge. You can then change the position of the point, if you wish. You can create points at any time while selecting the desired edges to blend. The Point Method options (Infer, Cursor Location, Existing Point, End Point, Control Point, Arc/Ellipse Center, Quadrant Point, and Point Subfunction) can help you create points.
13-2
Unigraphics NX
You can change the position of a point to any other position along the edge it is on by choosing Modify Point. This brings up the Modify Point dialog box, where you can enter a new value for Arclength, %Arclength, or use a slider to move the point. The dialog box also has a Reset button to return the point to its original position.
13 If you want to change the location of a point from one selected edge to another, select the point in the dialog box listing, choose Respecify Edge, and select the new edge.
NOTE: The new edge must be one that was selected for blending. If you wish to change a selected edge to another edge, you can deselect the edge by holding down the <Shift> key while selecting it. Then select the desired edge. You can delete a point by selecting it in the graphics window or in the scroll window in the Edge Blend dialog box, then choosing Remove Point. After you select a point, the Variable Radius option is highlighted. Enter the desired radius. The value you enter for the point radius must be positive at the endpoints.
13-3
Once you have selected all desired edges and selected all desired point locations for varying radii, choose OK and the blend is created.
Specified points (At each point, a radius is applied)
13
Selected edge
Tips and Techniques

Every selected edge needs at least two radii (one for each endpoint). If you do not declare enough information to create the blend, the system infers information for you depending on other selected geometry. The following can help you understand what the system does if you do not declare enough information:
D
If you indicate only one point and corresponding radius for a selected edge, the system creates a constant radius blend for that edge. If you do not give a point and radius to a selected edge, the system uses the default radius to create the blend for that edge.
The following are some rules you should follow to produce the desired blends:
13-4
Unigraphics NX
Variable Radius and Cliff Edge Blends D
To produce a linearly varying blend, you must define a different radius at each end of an edge.
Radius 1
Linearly varying blend
Radius 2
If you must perform blends that will blend away entire faces, blend only one edge at a time.
These faces will be blended away
13
Result
13-5
Variable Radius and Cliff Edge Blends D
If you select an open loop set of edges and supply radii only to the two open endpoints, the blend will vary continuously from endpoint to endpoint, as shown below.
Radius (R=.4) assigned at this endpoint 2 Radius (R=.1) assigned at this endpoint 1
No radius assigned at shared points
Result 2 1
2 1
13
Top view
Iso view
You can create a variable radius blend with the radii value of zero at one of the selected vertices.
Zero radius blends
13-6
Unigraphics NX
Activity 1 - Creating a Variable Radius Blend

In this activity, you will apply a variable blend along series of tangent edges. Step 1 Open the part file dau_blend_frame and start the Modeling application.
13
Step 2 Create a variable radius blend.
-
Choose Edge Blend. Ensure that Allow Variable and Setback is toggle on. Set Filter to Edge. If necessary, toggle Add Tangent Edges to on.
13-7
Variable Radius and Cliff Edge Blends -
Select the edge shown below and, if necessary, accept it.
Select this edge.
All of the tangent edges are selected.

-
Zoom in on the model and select the same edge as before. Choose the Modify Point button. Move the slider back and forth and observe how the asterisk moves along the selected edge. Move the slider so that the asterisk is located on the endpoint shown below, and then choose OK.
13
This endpoint
Enter 1.12 in the Variable Radius text box, (do not press Enter or choose OK).
13-8
Unigraphics NX
Select the edge shown below and, if necessary, accept it.
Select this edge.
Choose the Modify Point button. Ensure that % Arclength is toggled ON and, if necessary, enter 50. Choose OK.
In the Variable Radius text box, the previously entered value, 1.12, is still there. This is the value needed for this point, so no change is required. You will proceed by selecting the next point to apply a variable radius to.
-
13
Select the edge shown below, accept it if necessary.
Select this edge.
Choose the Modify Point button.
13-9
Move the slider so that the asterisk is located on the endpoint shown below, and then choose OK.
This endpoint.
Enter .5 in the Variable Radius text box. Select the same edge again. Choose the Modify Point button. Move the slider so that the asterisk is located on the endpoint shown below, and then choose OK.
13
This endpoint.
In the Variable Radius text box, the previously entered value, .5, is still there. This is the value needed for this point, so no change is required. You will proceed by selecting the next point to apply a variable radius to.
13-10
Unigraphics NX
Select the edge shown below and accept it.

Select this edge.
Choose the Modify Point button. Ensure that Arclength is toggled ON and enter 1.5; choose OK. Enter 1.12 in the Variable Radius text box. Select the endpoint as shown below.
13
Select this endpoint.
13-11
Choose OK to create the blend; the last point will have the same variable radius assigned to it as the previous point.
Step 3 Edit one of the variable radii.

-
Select the new blend feature on the solid body. With the cursor on the blend feature, click MB3 and choose Edit Parameters. Select pt3 R= .5 in the Edge Blend dialog box. Choose the Modify Point button. Enter a % Arclength value of 20 and choose OK. Edit the variable radius of pt3 from .5 to 1.75 and choose OK two times to apply the change.
13
Step 4 Close the part, do not save.
13-12
Unigraphics NX
Cliff Edge Blends

You can create two types of cliff edge blends: automatic (Edge Blend) and constrained (Cliff Edge). For example, the blend below on the left has been created with the automatic cliffedge option (by default), The block feature's width parameters is then edited so that the block becomes wider, the system simply reapplies a rolling ball radius of the same value, as illustrated on the right. Since the cliff edge was created automatically a full blend is created. However, if the blend had been created using Cliff Edge the system would respond with the Edit During Update dialog box.
13
To create a constrained Cliff Edge blend:
D D D D
Select the desired blend edge. Select the desired cliff edge. Enter a value into the Default Radius field. Continue selecting or choose OK or Apply to create the blend.
13-13
SUMMARY Unigraphics Variable Radius and Cliff Edge Blend options allow specific design solutions when you need to create unique edge shapes. You can create a variable radius blend by specifying multiple points along selected edges and entering a radius at each point. Cliff Edge blends can be created through the Edge Blend feature. In this lesson you:
13
Created and edited a Variable Radius blend.
13-14
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
Mating Conditions
Lesson 14
PURPOSE At the heart of assembly modeling is the ability to establish parametric relationships between components. You can relate the locations and orientations of components to each other by defining mating conditions in an assembly. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D
Define mating conditions. Reposition components.
14
14-1
Mating Conditions
Mating Conditions
General Concepts
By applying mating conditions to components in an assembly, you establish parametric, positional relationships between objects in them. These relationships are termed mating constraints.
Example:
If you aligned the cylindrical face of a bolt to the cylindrical face of a hole in a block and then moved the hole, the bolt would automatically move with it.
A mating condition is made up of one or more mating constraints. There are eight types of constraints: Mate, Align, Angle, Parallel, Perpendicular, Center, Distance and Tangent.
Mating Condition Mating Constraints(8)
14
D D
Mate Align
D D
Angle Parallel
D D
Perpendicular Center
D D
Distance Tangent
A mated component does not need to be fully constrained to be functional.
FROM / TO
When selecting objects to mate, the cue line will be directing you to select FROM and TO objects. The FROM object is part of the component that is going to move to a new position. The TO object is part of the component that is remaining in its present location.
14-2
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
The Mate Constraint

When applying the Mate constraint to components using planar faces and datum planes, the objects will be oriented so that their normals are parallel and point in opposite directions. The components will not necessarily have physical contact but will be coplanar. By definition, a face normal in a solid body points away from the solid.
Selected FROM" face on the component to be mated The shaded surfaces are now constrained to be coplanar.
Selected TO" face on the component to mate to
When mating asymmetrical faces, i.e. cylindrical to cylindrical, spherical to spherical, the radii must be the same; conical to conical, the taper must be the same.
14
14-3
Mating Conditions
The Mate constraint can also be used to position an edge or curve object of a component with a planar object, (planar faces and datum planes), of another component. A vector will be determined from the edge or curve object, the objects will be oriented so that the vector and the planar object lie on the same plane.
This curve selected for the FROM. This face selected for the TO.
This curve is now located on a plane that passes through the shaded face.
FROM Component object is made up of a block, line, and arc.
This curve selected for the FROM.
This face selected for the TO.
This vector, which is normal and centered to the arc is now located on a plane that passes through the shaded face.
14
14-4
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
The Align Constraint

When applying the Align constraint to components using planar objects of (planar faces and datum planes), the objects will be oriented so that their normals are parallel and point in the same direction. The components will not necessarily have physical contact but will be coplanar.
FROM" face
TO" face
When aligning asymmetrical faces, i.e. cylindrical to cylindrical, spherical to spherical, or conical to conical, the radii and/or taper do not have to be the same.
FROM" face
TO" face
The Align constraint can also be used to position an edge or curve object of a component with a planar object, (planar faces and datum planes), of another component. A vector will be determined from the edge or curve object, the objects will be oriented so that the vector and the planar object lie on the same plane, (same behavior as with mate constraint).
14
Using the CSYS Filter

The Align constraint allows the use of existing coordinate systems for FROM/TO selection objects. When using the CSYS, the user selects the FROM CSYS and then immediately selects the TO CSYS. This constraint will remove all DOFs between the two respective components.
14-5
Mating Conditions
The Angle Constraint

Use the Angle constraint when you need to control specific angles between objects of components. The example below illustrates an angle constraint that is being applied in conjunction with two other constraints. The two planar faces of the blocks must always be coplanar by virtue of the Mate constraint. The pivot for the Angle constraint is a function of the Align constraint that is applied to the two edges.
First: The top face of the large block and the bottom face of the small block have Mate a constraint.
14
Third: The two shaded faces have an Angle constraint of 30 degrees.
Second: These two edges have an Align constraint.
14-6
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
The Parallel Constraint

Use the Parallel constraint when you need to establish parallelism between objects of components. Objects that have surface normals associated to them will be oriented parallel based on those normals. When applying the Parallel constraint to position a planar object of a component, (planar faces and datum planes), with an edge or curve object of another component; a vector will be determined from the edge or curve object, that vector and the planar object's normal will then become parallel.
This curve is now parallel to the normal of the shaded face.
This face selected for the TO.
FROM Component object is made up of a block, line, and arc.
14
This face selected for the TO. This vector is now parallel to the normal of the shaded face.
14-7
Mating Conditions
The Perpendicular Constraint

Use the Perpendicular constraint when you need to establish perpendicularity between objects of components. Objects that have surface normals associated to them will be oriented perpendicular based on those normals. When applying the Perpendicular constraint to position a planar object of a component, (planar faces and datum planes), with an edge or curve object of another component; a vector will be determined from the edge or curve object, that vector and the planar object's normal will then become perpendicular.
This curve selected for the FROM. This face selected for the TO. This curve is now perpendicular to the normal of the shaded face.
FROM Component object is made up of a block, line, and arc. This face selected for the TO.
14
This vector is now perpendicular to the normal of the shaded face.
14-8
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
The Center Constraint

The center constraint may be used to center 1 or 2 objects of a component to 1 or 2 objects of another component. See the examples below.
Center Objects 1 to 1 Selections

This face selected for the FROM. This face selected for the TO.
Top View
Top View
This face selected for the FROM.
These two shaded faces are selected for the TO and Second TO.
14
14-9
Mating Conditions
Top View
Top View
These two shaded faces are selected for the FROM and Second FROM.
These two shaded faces are selected for the TO and Second TO.
Procedure:
D D D
Choose the Center constraint. Set the Object filter. Set the number of objects to use (Center Objects). Select the objects as instructed on the cue line.
14
14-10
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
The Distance Constraint

This constraint allows the user to define distance between two geometric entities. The sign (+/-) of the dimension controls which side of the surface the solution is on.
The Tangent Constraint

The tangent constraint defines a physical contact between two geometric entities. There can be multiple solutions to a tangent constraint. To allow the user to specify which solution is desired, a help point will be computed from the pick position on the surface and used to find a unique solution to the tangent constraint. The following are some examples of tangent constraints:
D D D D
Point on Surface. Line tangent to Surface. Plane tangent to Sphere. Plane tangent to Cylinder.
14
14-11
Mating Conditions
Constraint / Object Matrix

The below table is available as a tear out in the back of the book.
Point Point Mate Align Distance Mate Align Distance Mate Align Angle Parallel Perpend. Center Distance Mate Mate Align Align Angle Angle Parallel Parallel Perpend. Perpend. Center Center Distance Distance Tangent Tangent Mate Mate Mate Align Align Align Angle Angle Angle Parallel Parallel Parallel Perpend. Perpend. Perpend. Center Center Center Distance Distance Distance Tangent Mate Mate Mate Mate Align Align Align Align Angle Angle Angle Angle Parallel Parallel Parallel Parallel Perpend. Perpend. Perpend. Perpend. Center Center Center Center Distance Distance Distance Distance Tangent Tangent Tangent Tangent Mate Align Center Distance Tangent Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Tangent Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Tangent Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Tangent Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Tangent Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance Line Circle Plane Cylindri cal Face Spherical Face Conical Face Toroidial Face
Line (Datum Axis)
Circle
Mate Align Center Distance Tangent
Plane (Planar Face) (Datum Plane)
Mate Align Center Distance
14
Cylindrical Face
Mate Align Center Distance Tangent Mate Align Center Distance Tangent Mate Align Center Distance Mate Align Center Distance
Spherical Face
Conical Face
Toroidial Face
14-12
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
The Mating Conditions Dialog Box

Mating conditions are applied from the Mating Conditions dialog box and can be accessed by choosing Assemblies"Components"Mate Component.
Mating Conditions Tree Listing
Constraint Types
Selection Types
Expression Name Expression Value
14
14-13
Mating Conditions
Defining Mating Constraints

D D D D D
Choose the type of constraint you want to apply. Select the filter type. The system prompts you to select an object FROM component to be mated (component you are moving"). The system prompts you to select an object on component to mate TO (component that will remain stationary). Select the desired object. Choose:
D
Preview then Apply or
OK to accept the constraint and dismiss the dialog box window.
Vary Constraints
The Vary Constraints option can be used to reposition the active component in the mating dialog. When repositioning a component, the applied mating constraints may limit the freedom of movement. This dialog box has similar functions to the Reposition Component dialog box. A different component can be selected and repositioned by choosing the Selects Component icon.
Select Components
Finished Selection
14
14-14
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
Degree of Freedom Indicators

The system may display temporary arrows indicating remaining Degrees of Freedom. The Show Degrees of Freedom option may be toggled to turn on and off the display of these arrows.
A Mate constraint applied to the faces shown, constrains the small block in the direction normal to the faces. The small block is still free to translate and rotate in a plane parallel to the faces.
Preview
The Preview option becomes active after all the objects have been correctly selected for a constraint. This option lets you preview the solution by actually moving the component based on the existing constraints. Additional constraints may then be applied. After previewing the constraint, choose Apply or OK to accept the constraint or continue creating another constraint. If the constraint is not as desired, choose Unpreview and use the marching icons to define different FROM and TO faces.
14
14-15
Mating Conditions
List Errors
If there are no degree of freedom indicators visible and the Show Current Solution option is unavailable, you may have tried to define an invalid mating constraint. This will activate the List Errors button. Choosing it will present information concerning the error status. The constraint must be deleted and recreated.
14
The OK, Apply, and Cancel Buttons

The OK button should be selected only after all constraints have been applied. This will save" the mating condition (and its constraints) and dismiss the dialog box. The Apply button will apply the constraint and the Mating Conditions dialog box will remain open. The Cancel button will dismiss the dialog box and not save any of the constraints you added.
14-16
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
Tree Listing
The Mating Conditions Tree Listing list all of the assemblies mating conditions and constraints. Several options and viewing preferences may be controlled from the Listing Tree. See the illustration below.
Mating Condition expanded to display constraints Mating Constraint Mating Constraint suppression toggle Mating Condition Mating Constraint Popup Menu
Constraint Suppress/Unsuppress Toggle Controls the suppression status of the selected constraint.
D D
A suppressed mating constraint is ignored during geometric edits. If a mating constraint is being unsuppressed, the mating condition must be solved again.
Mating Constraint Popup Menu

The mating constraints popup menu is activated by placing the cursor on a mating constraint and pressing MB3.
D
14
Alternate Solution Produces any other solution that is applicable to the selected constraint. Convert To Allows the constraint to be changed to another applicable constraint, i.e. Mate to Distance. Delete Removes the selected mating constraint. Rename Allows the renaming of a mating constraint.
D D
14-17
Mating Conditions
Mating Condition Popup Menu

The mating condition popup menu is activated by placing the cursor on a mating condition and pressing MB3.
Mating Condition Popup Menu Highlighting Conditions
Mating Condition suppression toggle
Highlight/Unhighlight will highlight or unhighlight the current condition.

D
From Highlights the FROM object for all constraints of the selected condition. To Highlights the TO object for all constraints of selected condition. With/Without Direction Controls the display of the objects normal or vector.
D D
14
Show/Remove Degrees of Freedom Controls the display of the remaining Degrees of Freedom (DOF). Suppress/Unsuppress Controls the suppression status of the selected condition. Can also be performed by using the suppression toggle in front of the condition name.
D D D
A suppressed mating condition is ignored during geometric edits. No error messages will be displayed for suppressed mating conditions. If you modify a component creating a failed constraint, that constraint must be deleted before the mating condition can be unsuppressed.
14-18
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
Delete Removes the selected mating condition. Rename Allows the renaming of a mating condition. Remember Constraints Mating constraints may be saved for a selected mating condition within the assembly part file. This allows learned" or automatic mating when the same component is added to the assembly again.
14
14-19
Mating Conditions
Repositioning Components
The Repositioning functionality may be used on a component object that: does not have any mating conditions, the mating conditions have been suppressed, or the component object is partially constrained. If the component is partially constrained then its mating constraints will be enforced within the reposition function. To Reposition a component choose the Reposition Component icon or choose Assemblies"Components"Reposition Components from the assemblies toolbar.
Reposition Component Dialog

Repositioning can be accomplished in the Reposition Component dialog box by:
D D D D D D D
Point to Point Translation Translate Rotating about a point Rotating about a line Reposition Rotating between axes Rotating between points
Rotate About a Point Translate Point to Point Rotate About a Line Reposition Rotate Between Axes
14
Rotate Between Points
14-20
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
Move Objects or Move Handles Only

These are radio buttons that let you specify whether you want the objects to move along with the handles (e.g., so you can rotate the component about a specific point or axis, or translate along a specific vector). If desired, you could move the handle only.
Distance or Angle
The Distance or Angle input field lets you define a distance (or angle) for movement.
Snap Increment
Snap Increment allows snapping to "wholemultiple" distances when dragging handles.
Point Method
Provides options to let you define points as needed when moving the component object(s) using the handle method. This option is active if the handle origin is active.
Vector Method
Provides options to let you define vectors as needed when moving the component object(s) using the handle method. This option is active if one of the handle's three vectors is selected.
Snap Handles to WCS

Provides a means for moving the handles to the origin and orientation of the current WCS.
14
Motion Animation
This slider lets you specify how finely the motion is animated (from Fine to Coarse) during the motion that you have defined.
14-21
Mating Conditions
Collision Mode
Collision Mode allows you choose whether to check the clearance using no objects (i.e., OFF), faceted representations of objects, or first the facets and then the solids (if loaded).
Stop on Collision
Stop on Collision is only active when Collision Mode is set to Quick Facet or Facet/Solid. When toggled ON, this option will stop the animation when a collision occurs. When toggled OFF, the colliding objects will highlight but the motion will not stop.
14
14-22
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
Repositioning Components by Dragging

Components can be repositioned by the use of drag handles for quickness and ease. When the Reposition Component dialog box is displayed, the graphics screen displays a set of handles that can be used to drag the component.
The handles can be:

D
Dragged after selecting one handle (i.e., hold MB1 down while moving the handle). Translated by selecting the origin handle and then selecting a point. Transformed so the handles are aligned to a coordinate system.
D D
For example:
D
Selecting the filled square origin will allow you translate to a point by picking a point. Selecting the filled square origin and dragging will translate the component. Selecting an open circle (on each axis) will allow you to translate the component along the axis. Selecting an filled circle will allow you to rotate the component around an axis.
14
14-23
Mating Conditions
Activity 1 - Mating the Nut Cracker Components

In this activity, you will assign mating constraints to components of a nut cracker assembly. The component part files have already been added to an assembly. In consideration of the class time constraint, the smasher plate, base, mount, ramrod, and hinges have already had mate conditions applied to them. Design Intent: There will be associative relationships between component part files, so that any changes in size and shape of individual component part files will cause the assembly to update. Step 1 Open the part, dau_nut_cracker_assm and start/verify the Modeling and Assembly applications..
Shaft Crank
Arm
Ramrod
Smasher Plate
Link
14
Hinges Base Mount
Step 2 Change the display of the Hidden Edges to visible for easier recognition of faces.
14-24
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
Step 3 Assign mating conditions between the Base and the Shaft.
-
Choose Assemblies"Components"Reposition Component or by choose the Reposition Component icon from the Assemblies toolbar.
Select the Shaft component and click the middle mouse button (MB2). Select the square drag handle (origin) and holding down MB1, drag the crank to the location shown below, release MB1, and choose OK. Cancel the Reposition dialog box (MB2) and Fit the view.
14
Shaft
Choose Mate Component.
14-25
Mating Conditions
Choose Center.
Notice that the From Selection icon

-
is active.
The cue line reads: Select object FROM component to be mated. Select the face of the shaft component as shown below.
Select this face.
The selection step advances to To and the cue line reads: Select object on component to mate TO.
-
Select the cylindrical face of the Mount component as shown below and choose Preview.
Select this face.
14
Choose Apply. The constraint is applied and the selection step returns to From.
Choose Distance.
14-26
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions -
Select the face of the Shaft component as shown below.
Select this face. -
Select the face of the Mount component as shown below and key in an offset value of 1.5, and then choose Preview.
Select this face. -
Choose Apply and then Cancel.
Step 4 Assign mating conditions between the Shaft and the Crank components.
Choose Reposition Component. Select the crank component and click the middle mouse button (MB2). Rotate and translate the crank component to the approximate location and orientation shown using the reposition handles.
14
14-27
Mating Conditions
NOTE: If you do not have the exact location, it doesn't matter. The mating conditions will define its position in the next step.
Choose Align. Select the face of the Crank component as shown below.
1st Select this face

to define the FROM.
14
2nd Select the end

face of the shaft to define the TO. -
Select the face of the Shaft component as shown above and choose Preview. The shaft is oriented to meet the constraint although it has not been applied yet.
Choose Apply. The previous constraint has now been applied.
14-28
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
Choose Center. Select the cylindrical face of the Crank component as shown below.

to define the FROM.
2nd Select this face

to define the TO.
Select the cylindrical face of the Shaft component as shown above and choose Preview and then choose Apply.
Choose Parallel. Select the internal planar face of the crank as shown below.
14
Select this face to define the FROM.
14-29
Mating Conditions -
Select the planar face on the Shaft component as shown below and then choose Preview.
Select this face to define the TO.
The shaft and crank are oriented to reflect the constraint.

-
If the planar faces are 180 out of sync choose Alternate Solution and then choose OK. If the planar faces are oriented properly, choose OK until the Mating Conditions dialog box is dismissed.
Step 5 Reposition the crank component to see the effect of the mating conditions applied so far.
-
14
Choose Reposition Component. Select the crank component and choose OK. Select the square drag handle (origin) and, holding down MB1, drag the crank around in a circular motion and verify that the shaft rotates. Choose MB2 to cancel the dialog box.
Step 6 Assign mating conditions between the Shaft and Arm components.
-
Choose Reposition Component.
14-30
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions -
Select the arm and choose OK. Select the square drag handle and holding down MB1, drag the Arm closer to the assembly and choose MB2.
Choose Center. Select the cylindrical face of the Arm component as shown below. You may have a different orientation of the arm.
1st Select this cylindrical

face to define the FROM.
2nd Select this cylindrical

face to define the TO. -
Select the cylindrical face of the Shaft component as shown above and choose Preview and then choose Apply.
14
Choose Distance.
14-31
Mating Conditions -
Select the face of the Arm component for the FROM selection as shown below.

to define the FROM.
2nd Select this

-
face to define the TO.
Select the face of the Shaft component for the TO selection as shown above, enter an offset value of -.25, and then press Enter. Choose Apply.
Choose Parallel. Select the internal planar face of the Arm component as shown below.
Select this planar face.
14
14-32
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions -
Select the planar face of the Shaft component as shown below and then choose Preview.
Select this planar face. -
If the planar faces are 180 out of sync choose Alternate Solution and then choose Apply. If the planar faces are oriented properly, choose Apply. Cancel the Mating Conditions dialog box.
Step 7 Reposition the crank component to see the effect of the mating conditions applied so far. Choose Reposition Component. Select the crank component and choose OK. Select the square drag handle (origin) and holding down MB1, drag the crank around in a circular motion and verify that the shaft and the arm rotate. Choose MB2 to cancel the repositioning.
Step 8 Assign mating conditions between the Arm and Link components. Choose Mate Component.
14
Choose Center.
14-33
Mating Conditions -
Select the faces as directed in the illustration below.
1st
Select this cylindrical face to define the FROM.
2nd
Select this cylindrical face to define the TO. -
Choose Apply to apply the constraints. Set the Center Objects filter to 2 to 2.
14
Note that in the following constraint you will be selecting 4 faces.
FROM TO Second FROM
Second TO
14-34
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions -
Select the faces as directed below.
The orientation of your components may differ than the illustrations below.
1st
Select this face to define the FROM.
2nd
Select this face to define the TO.
3rd
Select this face to define the Second FROM.
4th
Choose Apply.
Select this face to define the Second TO. -
14
Set the Center Objects filter to 1 to 1.
14-35
Mating Conditions -
Select the faces as directed in the illustration below.
2nd 1st
Select this cylindrical face to define the TO. Select this cylindrical face to define the FROM. -
Choose Apply.
14
Cancel the Mating Constraints dialog box.
Step 9 Visually verify the mating constraints.

-
Orient the view to the Trimetric view (MB3). Shade the model (MB3).
Choose Reposition.
14-36
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions -
Select the crank component and accept with MB2. Drag the crank around using the handles.
Notice how the different component move within the constraints that have been assigned to them. The assembly can be rotated while using the reposition drag function. Step 10 Close all parts.
14
14-37
Mating Conditions
Activity 2 - Remember Constraints

In this activity, you will assign mating constraints to components of a sub-assembly and top-level assembly. The mating constraints will then be saved using the Remember Constraints function and then additional components of the same name will be added by taking advantage of the learned" constraints. Step 1 Open the part, dau_rem_const_assm and start/verify the Modeling and Assembly applications.. Step 2 Examine the assembly.
bracket
Choose the Assembly Navigator icon.
chassis
14
Step 3 Add hardware to the bracket and save the mating constraints.
-
Make dau_rem_const_brkt the Displayed Part.
14-38
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
Choose the Add Existing Component icon. Choose the Choose Part File button. Select dau_rem_const_nut and choose MB2. Change the Reference Set to BODY. Change the Positioning option to Mate and choose MB2. Mate the mounting flange of the clinch nut to one of the bracket inside surfaces. Center the collar of the clinch nut into one of the holes on the mate" surface.
mounting flange collar bracket inside surfaces
14
-
Apply the constraints. Place the cursor over the Mating Condition name, choose MB3 and then Remember Constraints. Choose OK in the Mating condition remembered message window.
14-39
Mating Conditions -
Choose OK to dismiss the Mating Conditions dialog box.
Step 4 Add the remaining hardware using the learned" mating constraints.
Choose the Add Existing Component icon again. Choose dau_rem_const_nut from the Select Part dialog box and choose MB2. Ensure the Reference Set is set to BODY and the Positioning option is set to Mate, then choose MB2.
The Place Component dialog box appears and the CUE line now prompts you to Select the object on the component to mate TO. All of the FROM" faces, as well as the types of mating constraints, have been saved with the Remember Constraints function. The arrow in the Place Component dialog box defines which Mating Constraint you are identifying the TO face for.
Defines which is the active constraint
14
14-40
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions -
The existing FROM face for the Mate constraint is already highlighted in the Component Preview window. Select one of the bracket inside surfaces to mate TO.
bracket inside surface
The Mate constraint is now solved, which is noted by the checkmark. Notice the clinch nut has rotated automatically in the Component Preview window to show a better orientation of the FROM face.
Select the appropriate hole to Center the clinch nut into and choose MB2.
14
14-41
Mating Conditions -
Add two more clinch nuts to fill the two remaining holes. The part should look like the following image when finished.
CHALLENGE: Return to dau_rem_const_assm and add the part dau_rem_const_screw using the appropriate mating conditions to secure the bracket to the chassis. Use the Remember Constraints function to add the remaining screws to the assembly. Step 5 Close all parts, do not save.
14
14-42
Unigraphics NX
Mating Conditions
SUMMARY Drag handles are a new and extremely efficient way to reposition components. This lesson teaches the use of drag handles to reposition components. It also covers mating constraints. By applying mating conditions to components, you were able to relate their locations and orientations in an assembly. In this lesson you:
D D D
Defined mating conditions. Repositioned components. Added components using Remember Constraints.
14
14-43
Mating Conditions
14
14-44
Unigraphics NX
Component Arrays
Component Arrays
Lesson 15
PURPOSE Time and effort can be saved by applying component arrays and feature base component arrays. These features capitalize on the parametric and associative characteristics already present in assembly models. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D D D
Create a Circular Component array. Apply the From Feature ISET function. Edit a circular array.
15
15-1
Component Arrays
Component Arrays
You can use the Component Arrays options to create and edit linear and circular arrays of components in an assembly based on a template component.
Creating a Component Array

A component array can be defined in one of two ways
D
As the component is added to the assembly by changing the Multiple Add option to Array, or After the component has been added to the assembly by choosing Assemblies" Components " Create Array.
The Create Component Array dialog box allows you to define the type and name of the array to create.
Linear is a linear array of components where you specify the number of components, the spacing between them, and a direction reference. Circular is a circular array of components where you specify the number of components, the angle between them, and an axis.
15
15-2
The From Feature ISET provides a means to quickly generate a pattern of components with corresponding mating conditions based on an instance array in a component part.
Unigraphics NX
Component Arrays
Editing a Component Array

Component Arrays can be edited by choosing Assemblies" Edit Component Arrays.
The Edit Array Parameters option can be used to change the number of components, spacing, or direction reference for a linear or circular array. Other options are available to rename and delete arrays.
TIP
The number of components and spacing values are stored as expressions. They can also be edited from the expression editor by choosing Tools"Expression.
15
15-3
Component Arrays
Activity 1 - Creating a Circular Component Array

In this activity, you will create a component array to define three additional locator blocks.
Step 1 Open dau_fixture_assm2 and start the Modeling application. Verify the Assemblies application is ON. Step 2 Display the datum axis which will define the axis of the array.
-
Choose FormatLayer Settings. Make layer 62 selectable.
Step 3 Create a component array of locator blocks.
Choose Create Component Array. Select dau_locator from the Assembly Navigator and then OK. Choose Circular from the Create Component Array dialog box and choose OK. Toggle the Datum Axis option ON in the dialog box.
15
15-4
Unigraphics NX
Component Arrays -
Select the datum axis from the graphics area. Enter a Total Number of 4, an Angle of 90 and choose OK.
The three additional locators are added to the assembly. Step 4 Close all parts; do not save.
15
15-5
Component Arrays
FeatureBased Component Arrays

In many cases it is necessary to associate an array of components to a corresponding array of features in another component of the assembly (i.e. bolts associated to a hole pattern). This can be accomplished by using the From Feature ISET option in the Create Component Array dialog box.
The Template Component

Component arrays produce occurrences of a template"component object. These occurrences are all associated to the template component. Any changes made to the original component are reflected in the occurrences of the component. The template component defines certain properties for any newly generated occurrences within the array which include:
D D D
component part color layer name
15
15-6
Unigraphics NX
Component Arrays
Component Arrays and Mating Conditions

When using the From Feature ISET option, mating constraints will be generated for the new occurrences based on those of the template component. If the constraint has been applied to an object belonging to a feature used to create the instance array, the constraint will be duplicated for each occurrence of the component. Because the component array uses the mating constraints of the template component, you must assign mating constraints to the template before creating the ISET component array.
15
15-7
Component Arrays
FeatureBased Array Associativity

If the number of features in an instance set is changed, the components in the array associated to those features will also change (added or deleted). Furthermore, if a feature in an instance set is removed entirely as a result of a modeling change, the corresponding component in the array will also be removed.
Template" component New template" component
Hole is removed from array.
If the deleted component was the template", the system assigns a new template from the remaining components in the array.
15
15-8
Unigraphics NX
Component Arrays
Activity 2 - Creating Feature ISET Component Arrays

In this activity, you will create a component array for a washer and a hex bolt based on the circular feature instance array of holes in the yoke. This is possible because the template washer and hex bolt will be mated to one of the instance array holes. Step 1 Open the dau_valve_assm_2 part file and start the Modeling application. Verify the Assemblies application is ON.
Yoke
Step 2 Add a washer.

-
Add the dau_washer part using the BODY reference set and the Mate Positioning option.
15
15-9
Component Arrays -
Mate the bottom face of the washer to the top face of the yoke.
First select the bottom (FROM") face of the washer to mate
Second select the top (TO") face of the yoke
Center the cylindrical face of the washer to the hole in the yoke. (This is necessary so that you can later create a component array of bolts and washers associated to the instance array of hole features in the yoke).
First select the interior cylindrical (FROM") face of washer
Second select the cylindrical (TO") face of the hole.
Choose Preview and OK twice.
15
15-10
Unigraphics NX
Component Arrays
Step 3 Add a hex bolt.

-
Add the dau_hex_bolt part using the BODY reference set and the Mate Positioning option. Mate the bottom face of the bolt head to the top face of the washer.
First select the bottom (FROM") face of the bolt head to mate Second select the top (TO") face of the washer -
Center the cylindrical face of the bolt to the hole in the yoke (Again, this is necessary so that you can later create a component array of bolts and washers associated to the instance array of hole features in the yoke).
First select the cylindrical (FROM") face of the bolt
Second select the cylindrical (TO") face of the hole -
Choose Preview and OK twice.
15
15-11
Component Arrays -
Choose Cancel.
Step 4 Create the component array.

-
Choose Create Component Array. Choose the dau_hex_bolt and the dau_washer from the Assembly Navigator and OK.
TIP
Use the Ctrl key while selecting the second component from the Assembly Navigator.
-
If necessary, choose the From Feature ISET option. Choose OK.
A component array of washers and hex_bolts is generated based on the placement of the hole instance set of the yoke.
15
15-12
Unigraphics NX
Component Arrays
Step 5 Verify that new mating conditions were generated.
Choose Mating Conditions.
Note that you now have mating conditions for all of the occurrences of the hex_bolts and washers.
-
Choose Cancel to dismiss the dialog box.
Step 6 Edit the bolt hole pattern in the Yoke.

-
Make dau_valve_yoke the work part. Choose EditFeatureParameters. Select one of the hole features of the bolt hole pattern and accept it. Choose Instance Array Dialog. Change the values as follows: Number = 8 Angle = 360/8
Choose OK three times. Make dau_valve_assm_2 the Work Part.
Notice how the quantity of fasteners has updated to meet the design change. To complete this edit, the bolt hole pattern in the valve_housing would also be changed. Step 7 Close the assembly; do not save.
15
15-13
Component Arrays
SUMMARY Component arrays take advantage of existing parametric data and can save time in adding component part files to an assembly. In this lesson you:
D D D
Created a circular component array. Applied the From Feature ISET function. Edited a circular array.
15
15-14
Unigraphics NX
Part Families
Part Families
Lesson 16
16
PURPOSE Part Families provide a method to quickly define a family of similar parts based on a single template part. In this lesson you will create a part family to generate a family of standard parts. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D
Demonstrate an understanding of the capabilities and concepts of Part Families. Define a Part Family for a standard part. Create Family Member parts from a template part. Add a Part Family member to an assembly.
D D D
16-1
Part Families
Capabilities and General Concepts 16 Families provide you with a fast way to generate a family of similar parts. Part Each family member is based on a single template part, which can be a piece part or an assembly.
You are able to specify properties which may vary between family members. These properties may be expression values, attribute values, or optional features, for example. The Unigraphics spreadsheet is used to define the members of the family and their values for each of these properties. Changes to the template part can be propagated to all parts which are members of that family.
Common Uses
The most common use for Part Families is to aid in the creation of a library of standard parts, such as bolts or washers.
16-2
Unigraphics NX
Part Families
Terminology
There are some terms that are specific to the Family of Parts functions, as explained below. Template part - A Unigraphics part file constructed in such a way as to allow a family of parts to be built based on it. Family table - A table created from the template part, in the Unigraphics spreadsheet function, that describes the various attributes of the template part that you can change when you create a family member. Family member - A readonly part file created from, and associated with, a template part and family table. Part Family - The template part, family table, and family member parts.
16
General Procedure
D D D
Create a template part. In the template part, define the attributes that will be used in the family. Create and save a family table in the spreadsheet, defining the various configurations of the family members. Choose Part FamilyCreate Parts in the family table (spreadsheet).
16-3
Part Families
16
Part Families Dialog Box

The Part Families dialog box is accessed in the Modeling application by choosing ToolsPart Families from the main menu bar. You can use the areas in the upper portion of the Part Families dialog box to specify the columns in the Part Families spreadsheet.
Option menu for Attribute Classes
Available columns
Chosen columns Chosen columns
Available Columns
The Available Columns list box shows you the items available in the current part to be defined as columns in the family table spreadsheet. Only the items of the class shown on the option button are displayed.
16-4
Unigraphics NX
Part Families
Attribute Classes
You can select from six different attribute classes when defining the columns in the part family spreadsheet. You can later change the values of these attributes in the spreadsheet to define parts with different configurations. The available classes are:
D D
16
Attributes - You can use part attributes and their values for a family. Components - (For assembly template parts) You can replace a specified component with a different component, or you can remove it altogether by leaving the spreadsheet entry blank. Expressions - You can supply values for expressions when the family member is created. Only constant expressions can be used. Mirror - If you have a mirror body in your part, a part family member can use the base body, by entering a value of No in the spreadsheet, or the mirrored body, by entering a value of Yes. Density - This option presents a list of all the named solid bodies in the part, allowing you to assign a density to each one. When the family member is created, you can specify a density and it will be applied to all bodies with that name. Use Edit"Properties to assign a name to the body. Features - Features may be suppressed, by entering a value of No in the spreadsheet, or not suppressed, by entering a value of Yes.
D D
Add Column
To add a column to the Chosen Columns list, select its name in the Available Columns list, then choose Add Column.
Chosen Columns
The Chosen Columns list box shows you the items that have been selected for the part family. Each item in this list represents one column in the spreadsheet.
Remove Column
To remove a column from the Chosen Columns list, select its name from the list and choose Remove Column.
16-5
Part Families
16
Create
This option invokes the spreadsheet for a new family of parts after you specify the columns.
Edit
This option invokes an existing spreadsheet for editing.
Delete
This option deletes the spreadsheet, which deletes the entire family of parts. NOTE: If the deleted part family has any member parts that have been created, they will revert to being ordinary Unigraphics part files.
Resume
After control has been transferred to Unigraphics to verify or create a part, you must choose Resume to return control to the spreadsheet.
Cancel
This option cancels any edits made to the spreadsheet after the last save, and returns control to Unigraphics. Therefore, if you edit the spreadsheet, then do a verify to check the edits, you can choose Cancel to leave the family table as it was before the edits.
TIP
When migrating to a new version of Unigraphics, you must first update and save all part families and members before adding the members to an assembly.
16-6
Unigraphics NX
Part Families
The Part Family Spreadsheet

Choosing the Create button invokes the spreadsheet. While the spreadsheet is active, Unigraphics is inactive. Unix platforms will need to use the Xess spreadsheet, which is the default setting. Windows platforms will need to change to the Excel spreadsheet under Preferences"Spreadsheet. The first column in the spreadsheet will have a header for Part_Name. The rows below it are for entering the part name of all the family members. The other columns have headers corresponding to the properties you chose. The second row is filled in with the values that exist in the template part for the properties chosen. The rest of the family can be defined by simply typing in the appropriate values in the spreadsheet.
16
When you are in the spreadsheet, there are several options available in the Part Family pulldown menu.
16-7
Part Families
16
Verify Part
The family member whose row is selected is theoretically" created and you are given a message to let you know whether it is possible to create a part with the current configuration of attribute values. During this process, control is transferred back to Unigraphics. To continue, choose Resume on the Part Families dialog box to return to the spreadsheet.
Update Parts
This option works in two ways: If no rows are selected in the spreadsheet The system searches for each member of the family, using the current search rules. For each member it finds, it checks to see if that member is out of date with respect to the current definition, which includes both geometry changes to the template part and changes to the definition in the family table. If the member is out of date, the system will update(recreate and save) the member part. The updated member part will be saved over the existing part if possible. If the member part was write protected, the new member part is saved to the directory specified under FileOptionsSave Options. An update report is also generated. If any rows are selected in the spreadsheet The system searches for the selected members of the family, as above. However, it will not check to see if the member is out of date. It will simply create and save the new version and, following the same rules as above, either save it to the current location or to the directory specified on the Save Options dialog box. This option is offered primarily to cope with changes that may not be detected. An example would be attaching a name to a face. In this case, the model is not modified and the system does not detect that the member part is out of date. NOTE: When you choose Update Parts, the family (i.e., the spreadsheet) is saved. The template part itself, however, is not saved. It is recommended that when you edit a template part or the spreadsheet, you update the associated family members as well, since you are not notified that an update is needed when a family member part file is subsequently loaded.
16-8
Unigraphics NX
Part Families
16 The family member whose row is selected is actually created and saved as a part file. During the creation of the part, control is transferred back to Unigraphics and the Information window lets you know whether the part was successfully
Create Parts
created and saved. To continue, choose Resume on the Part Families dialog box to return to the spreadsheet. NOTE: The created parts are saved in the directory specified under File"Options"Save Options.
Save Family
This option saves the spreadsheet data and returns you to Unigraphics. NOTE: Save Family and Create Parts will save the family (spreadsheet) but the template part file is not saved.
Cancel
Returns you to Unigraphics without saving any changes made to the spreadsheet.
Creating Family Members

Once you have defined the family members, you can create the actual part files in one of two ways.
D D
Use the Create Parts in the family table (spreadsheet), or Choose a template part when adding a component to an assembly (Edit Structure Add). The family member part file is created, saved, and added to the assembly.
16-9
Part Families
Activity 1 - Creating a Family of Standard Parts-Excel Unix users go to Activity 2. 16 Probably the most common use of Part Families is to define a standard library
part that has many variations. In this activity, you will create a part family for a hex bolt which has variations in head size and length. You will also use the feature attribute to suppress and unsuppress holes for safety wire. The template part has already been created for you. Step 1 Open the part dau_hexbolt_fam and rename ***_hexbolt_fam. Step 2 Choose Application"Modeling and verify that the Assemblies application is enabled. Step 3 Define the columns for the Family Table.
-
Choose ToolsPart Families from the main menu bar. Select the bolt_dia expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog box. Choose the Add Column button.
Option menu
16-10
Unigraphics NX
Part Families -
Select the head_dia expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog box. Choose the Add Column button.
16
NOTE: Instead of choosing, Add Column, you could just doubleclick on the expression, i.e. head_dia.
-
Doubleclick on the head_height expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog box. Doubleclick on the length expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog box. Change the option menu at the top of the dialog box from Expressions to Features. Doubleclick on WIRE_HOLES[0](23)/SIMPLE_HOLE(23) from the top list of the Part Families dialog box.
NOTE: The order in which you select the attributes determines the order of columns in the spreadsheet. Step 4 Create the family table.
-
Choose the Create button from the bottom portion of the Part Families dialog box.
To expedite filling in the spreadsheet, you will import a text file that has been created for you.
-
In the spreadsheet application choose File"Open. Set the Files of type: to Text Files (*.prn *.txt; *.csv).
16-11
Part Families
16
Change the Look in: to point to the parts directory.
Doubleclick on the dau_hexbolt_fam text file. In the Text Import wizard, choose Finish. In the dau_hexbolt_fam.txt spread sheet, select cell A:1 and drag the cursor to cell F:12.
16-12
Unigraphics NX
Part Families
All of the cells that have text are now highlighted.
16
Cell A:1
Cell F:12
Choose Edit"Copy. Choose Window"Worksheet in Part Family ***_HEX . . . In the ***_HEXBOLT_FAM spread sheet, select cell A:2. Choose Edit"Paste.
Step 5 Verify a family member

-
Select a cell in row 13. From the spreadsheet menu bar choose PartFamilyVerify Part.
The Unigraphics session becomes active and the family member is displayed in the graphics window. Notice that the safety wire holes are not present; in this family member the hole feature is suppressed.
-
Choose Resume in the Part Families dialog box.
16-13
Part Families
16
Step 6 Save the Part Family and the template part.

-
From the spreadsheet menu bar choose PartFamilySave Family.
NOTE: The Save Family option internally stores the spreadsheet data within the template part file. It does not save the template part file itself.
-
From the Unigraphics menu bar choose FileSave to save the template part file containing the spreadsheet data.
16-14
Unigraphics NX
Part Families
Activity 2 - Creating a Family of Standard Parts-Xess

Windows users skip this activity. Probably the most common use of Part Families is to define a standard library part that has many variations. In this activity, you will create a part family for a hex bolt which has variations in head size and length. You will also use the feature attribute to suppress and unsuppress holes for safety wire. The template part has already been created for you. Step 1 Open the part dau_hexbolt_fam and rename ***_hexbolt_fam. Step 2 Choose Application"Modeling and verify that the Assemblies application is enabled. Step 3 Define the columns for the Family Table.
-
16
Choose ToolsPart Families from the main menu bar. Select the bolt_dia expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog box. Choose the Add Column button.
Option menu
16-15
Part Families
16
Select the head_dia expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog box. Choose the Add Column button.
NOTE: Instead of choosing, Add Column, you could just doubleclick on the expression, i.e. head_dia.
-
Doubleclick on the head_height expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog box. Doubleclick on the length expression from the top window of the Part Families dialog box. Change the option menu at the top of the dialog box from Expressions to Features. Select the WIRE_HOLES(0)(23)/SIMPLE_HOLE(23) from the top list of the Part Families dialog box. Choose the Add Column button.
NOTE: The order in which you select the attributes determines the order of columns in the spreadsheet. Step 4 Create the family table.
-
Choose the Create button from the bottom portion of the Part Families dialog box.
To expedite filling in the spreadsheet, you will import a text file that has been created for you.
16-16
Unigraphics NX
Part Families -
With MB1 select cell A2 as shown below.
16
Select this cell. -
From the Spreadsheet menu, choose FileImport. From your parts directory, select the dau_hexbolt_fam.txt file and choose OK.
Step 5 Verify a family member

-
Select a cell in row 13. From the spreadsheet menu bar choose PartFamilyVerify Part.
16-17
Part Families
16
The Unigraphics session becomes active and the family member is displayed in the graphics window. Notice that the safety wire holes are not present; in this family member the hole feature is suppressed.
-
Choose Resume in the Part Families dialog box.
Step 6 Save the Part Family and the template part.

-
From the spreadsheet menu bar choose PartFamilySave Family.
NOTE: The Save Family option internally stores the spreadsheet data within the template part file. It does not save the template part file itself. Step 7 From the Unigraphics menu bar choose File"Save to save the template part file containing the spreadsheet data.
16-18
Unigraphics NX
Part Families
Adding Part Family Members to an Assembly

When selecting a part family template part to add as a component to an assembly, the Select Family Member dialog box is displayed. The Matching Members list box shows you any family members that have already been created, whether they are components of the current assembly or not.
16
Family Attributes (spreadsheet columns)
Selection Criteria
Family members that meet the criteria
You use this dialog box to choose which member of the part family to add to the assembly, in one of several ways:
D
If you know the name of the family member you wish to use, choose the name from the Matching Members list. Enter the name in the Part Name text field. Use the other options on to define selection criteria based on the values of Family Attributes.
D D
16-19
Part Families
16
Selection Criteria
This section lets you narrow down the list of available family members by specifying acceptable values of family attributes. The shoulderbolt_fam part family has a total of ten members which are all initially listed in the Matching Members list box. This list can be reduced by selecting a family attribute and a value that meets your requirements. When you select a family attribute, its name is inserted in the Selection Criteria text field and all its possible values are listed in the Valid Values list box.
When length" is selected ...
...its name is inserted in the text field, ...
... and its possible values are listed in the Valid Values list box.
TIP
You can also enter an expression in the Selection Criteria text field to specify a range of values, or relate it to another expression (including interpart expressions)(e.g. length>.75 && length<1.5).
16-20
Unigraphics NX
Part Families
You can select a value from the Valid Values list or enter the value in the Selection Criteria text field. The other values will move to the Invalid Values list box and the Matching Members list box changes to show only those family members that meet the criteria.
16
Whatever method of selection you use, your design intent is saved with the component. This can be useful for design iterations that may require the use of a different family member. If you know the name of the part to add, you can enter it in the Part Name text field. If you wish to add the template part itself, choose the Select Template button.
16-21
Part Families
Obtaining Information on Family Members 16 Once a family member has been added to an assembly there are different ways to obtain information about it.
Family Of Parts Report
Choosing AssembliesReportsFamily Report will display a listing of components with applicable part family information. It indicates whether the Displayed Part is a part family member or a template.
16-22
Unigraphics NX
Part Families
Activity 3 - Adding a Standard Part to an Assembly

Step 1 Choose File"Options"Load Options and make sure the Load Method is set to From Directory. Step 2 Open dau_fixture_bolt_up. Step 3 Add a hex bolt family member to the assembly.
16
Choose Add Existing. Select the ***_hexbolt_fam as the part to add and choose OK. Select bolt_dia from the Family Attributes section of the Select Family Member dialog box. Choose .5 from the Valid Values section.
16-23
Part Families
16
TIP
Choose WIRE_HOLES[0] . . . from the Family Attributes section. Choose YES from the Valid Values section. Select hex_hd_8_Y in the Matching Members list and choose OK.
When the selection is narrowed down to only one part, you can choose OK. If more than one part meets the criteria you can simply select it from the Matching Members section.
The family member part is now created based on the selection criteria and the template part.
-
Use the BODY reference set and change the Positioning option to Mate. Apply mating conditions and locate the bolt as shown below.
Choose OK.
Step 4 Add another hex bolt family member to the assembly. Choose Add Existing.
16-24
Unigraphics NX
Part Families -
Select the ***_hexbolt_fam as the part to add and choose OK.
If you know the family member name, it can be selected from the Matching Members list.
-
16
Select hex_hd_5_N and choose OK. Use the BODY reference set and the Mate Positioning option. Using the mating conditions, locate the bolt in one of the remaining holes.
Step 5 Add another hex_hd_5_N to the remaining hole. CHALLENGE: Use the Remember Constraints function, in the Mating Conditions dialog box, before adding the second hex bolt.
Step 6 Close the ***_hexbolt_fam and dau_fixture_bolt_up part files without saving.
16-25
Part Families
16
SUMMARY Part families allow you to quickly generate a family of similar parts based on a single template part. You utilized Part Families to define standard parts. In this lesson you:
D
Demonstrated an understanding of the capabilities and concepts of Part Families. Defined a Part Family for a standard part. Created Family Member parts from a template part. Added a Part Family member to an assembly.
D D D
16-26
Unigraphics NX
Revisions and Substitutions

Lesson 17
PURPOSE an existing component and change the name of the component part. In this lesson you will investigate the different methods to revise components and the assemblies that use them. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
D
17 After creating an assembly, you may have to revise or substitute
Revise a component and an assembly using Save Part As. Interrogate the modifications made to features of a part. Identify the Load Options that search for revised components. Substitute components in an existing assembly. Apply Alternate mating conditions when substituting components.
D D D D
17-1
File Versioning/Revisions
There are many different ways to track revisions to a component after it has been released. One of the most common methods is to reflect the revision in the part name. In this lesson, we will assume that if a component of an assembly is revised, then the assembly will also be revised. For many applications, however, this is not mandatory.
17
Tracking Revisions By Part Number

The most common way of keeping track of the legacy data for a part is to save the part with a new name and then make changes to that new file. This method is very efficient because you can easily identify the version of a loaded part from the name. It usually includes the revision letter or number. For example, a part named 123a indicates an A" revision on part 123. Once the new version of the part is released, the old version could be archived. There are several advantages to this method.
Advantages
D D D D D D
Easy to create the change. Use Save As" on the affected components. No file protection problem because owner performs the Save As". The old and new parts can reside in the same directory. The legacy information is accessed (if on line) by retrieving the older revision assembly or component part. Easy to track revisions on the shop floor when looking at numbered parts. File versioning rules can be implemented to enable the system to always get the latest version of the file.
Disadvantages
D D
If file versioning rules are enabled, two versions of the component part cannot be open at the same time. Associated information could be lost if components are substituted and file versioning is not used.
17-2
Unigraphics NX
Revising a Component and Assembly Using Save Part As.

When revisions are incorporated into part names, an easy way to revise a component is to save the component with the new name while it is the work part. This can be accomplished by choosing FileSave As. Many companies, however, require that an assembly also be revised whenever a change is made to the form, fit, or function of one of its components. In this case, you would also be required to save each of the assemblies in the tree that reference the component. To accommodate this requirement, when you perform a FileSave As on a component part in a native operating system, a Session Where Used Report is immediately displayed, listing any loaded assemblies that reference the component. After specifying a new name for the component, the system will also prompt you to enter a new name for each of the listed assemblies. The system displays the new part names in the Information window and allows you to cancel the operation before actually saving the parts.
17
17-3
The Part Modification Dialog Box

The Part Modifications dialog box allows you to access information pertaining to modifications to components of an assembly. You can access it by choosing InformationPartModifications. The top portion of the dialog box lists the displayed assembly and its loaded components. The lower list displays the version and time/date information for the part highlighted in the upper list.
17
Lists the displayed assembly and loaded components
Version numbers and date/time stamps for the highlighted part above.
Lists information for ver sions that meet criteria relative to the version highlighted above.
Specify types of objects to obtain information on. Specify object to highlight in graphics display
Once the part, version selection criteria, and object types are specified, you can choose OK or Apply to display the information.
17-4
Unigraphics NX
In the example below, feature object information is displayed for all versions of a part.
17
The listing includes an object number for each feature, the version in which the feature was last modified, the version in which the feature was created, and the feature name. An object number can be entered or the Previous and Next buttons can be chosen from the dialog box to highlight the features in the graphics display.
17-5
Additional Assembly Reports

Earlier in this lesson you saw how the InformationPartModifications option was useful to track modifications to parts in an assembly. There are other reporting tools available to help you understand how a particular assembly has changed over time.
D
17
List Components (discussed earlier) Update Report Where Used Session Where Used
D D D
Update Report
This report indicates which components were updated (changed) as the assembly is opened.
TIP
An update report can automatically be generated every time an assembly is opened by choosing Preferences"Assemblies and toggling the Display Update Report option to ON.
17-6
Unigraphics NX
Where Used
This option will search directories and list the assemblies that reference a specified part. This is useful to determine what impact a pending design change may have on other assemblies.
What directories to search for the parts.
17
List only next level assemblies or all assemblies.
TIP
A Where Used report may take considerable time to execute. It is recommended that you search through as few directories and parts as possible.
Session Where Used

This option will list only the loaded assemblies that reference a specified part. This report is automatically generated when you perform a FileSave As on a component part while the assembly is loaded.
17-7
Activity 1 - Revising Components Using Save As"

In this activity, you will revise components and an assembly using FileSave As.
ROLLER_ASSM
MOUNTING_BRACKET
ROLLER
ROLLER_PIN
17
ROLLER_ASSMA
MOUNTING_BRACKETA
ROLLERA
ROLLER_PIN
Step 1 Open the part dau_roller_assm from the parts directory and save as ***_roller_assm.
Step 2 Open the Assembly Navigator and pin open to help you verify the changes to the assembly structure. Step 3 Edit the mounting bracket geometry.
-
Make dau_mounting_bracket the Work Part.
17-8
Unigraphics NX
Choose Modeling. Choose EditFeatureParameters. Change the diameter of the holes in the instance array (e.g. INSTANCE[0]) to .20. Choose OK until the holes update in the graphics display.
.20 dia
17
Step 4 Revise the mounting bracket and assembly.

-
Choose FileSave As.
The system automatically displays a Session Where Used Report to tell you which loaded assemblies are referencing the mounting_bracket.
-
Enter ***_mounting_bracketa as the new part file name and press Enter.
NOTE: Read the Cue Line! At this point the system will also prompt you to perform a File"Save As for each of the loaded assemblies that reference the mounting bracket, if desired.
-
Since you changed the form, fit or function of the part, enter ***_roller_assma as the name for the revised assembly and press Enter.
The system displays an Do you want the Save As to continue?" message allowing you to cancel if you had made a mistake. The listing window will also reflect the specified action and show the directory paths and filenames you entered.
17-9
Revisions and Substitutions -
Select OK to continue with the Save As.

***_ROLLER_ASSMA
***_MOUNTING_BRACKETA
DAU_ROLLER
DAU_ROLLER_PIN
17
Next, you will revise the roller due to a change to the anodizing specification. This change will not alter the form, fit, or function of the component so you will not revise the assembly. Step 5 Revise the roller.
-
Close the Information window. Change the Work Part to dau_roller. Perform a Save As on the component and give it a new name of ***_rollera and press Enter. Choose Cancel to prevent the system from revising the assembly. Choose OK to proceed with the Save As.
The SaveAs Report" informs you that the assembly that references the revised component (roller_assma) was not renamed and will reference the new component (rollera) if it is saved.
-
Choose OK. Close the Information window.

***_ROLLER_ASSMA
***_MOUNTING_BRACKETA
***_ROLLERA
DAU_ROLLER_PIN
17-10
Unigraphics NX
Step 6 Make ***_roller_assma the Work Part and Save it. Step 7 Look at all prior modifications to the features in the mounting bracket.
-
Choose InformationPartModifications. Choose ***_mounting_bracketa from the list of parts in the upper portion of the dialog box. Select it even if it is already highlighted. Make sure Loaded Version is highlighted in the list of versions in the lower portion of the dialog box. Change the Criteria option to At or Before. (You will be listing all modifications at or before the loaded version). Choose the Specify Object Types button. Select Feature from the list of object types and OK. Choose Apply.
17
An Information window appears and lists all features in the mounting bracket and the versions in which they were created and last modified.
-
Choose Next, in the Part Modifications window, to cycle through the features in the mounting bracket.
The next feature will highlight in the graphics window and its Object Number will appear in the dialog box and in the Status area. You can refer to the Information window to determine when the feature was created and last modified.
-
Choose Next in the Part Modifications dialog box a few more times and choose Cancel when you are finished.
Step 8 Close all parts. Do not Save any parts.
17-11
Load Options and Revisioning

If your revision process entails moving parts to a different directories, you need to have a means of telling the system where to find them. Using load options, you can specify the directories to search for components as an assembly is loading and the order in which to search them. If the system is unable to locate a component, you may specify whether to continue or abort the loading.
17
Use search directories to find components when opening an assembly. Will present a error message and not open the assembly if a component is not found.
Expands dialog box to define search directories. Saves the settings TO a defaults file.
When ON, latest version of component is loaded based on versioning rules.
Specify the name of the defaults file when saving and restoring
Restores settings FROM a defaults file
17-12
Unigraphics NX
To avoid having to enter the same search directories for every session, you can use the Save button to store the load options in a text file. The text file can later be retrieved using the Restore button. The default name for the text file is load_options.def. You can specify a different name for the text file when you save and restore by first toggling Specify Load Options File to ON. When you start a Unigraphics session, the system automatically restores the load_options.def file from the current directory. A different defaults file can be specified in your .ugii_env file. If no load_options.def file exists in the directory from which Unigraphics is started, the system will use the default options listed below:
SearchPath: LoadOption: FailOption: LoadLatest: /current_dir... Load_From_DirLoad Abort No
17
The system uses the load options settings when you are performing the following assemblies functions:
D D D
Opening an assembly. Substituting a subassembly. Replacing a reference set in a subassembly with one that includes different components. Generating a Where Used" report.
Load Options do not affect the actual part you are opening (the assembly). They only apply to component parts that need to be loaded when opening an assembly that references them. NOTE: The Load Latest toggle will only be available if versioning rules are established in the ug_english.def or ug_metric.def files. This is discussed in the appendices.
17-13
Defining Search Directories

The Define Search Directories button expands the Load Options dialog box so that you can add or remove search directories. Options are also available to change the order of the directory list.
17
List of current search directories Three dots includes subdirectories in search
/home/users/smith... /projectx/common... /projectx/release
Enter new directory to add to list Removes selected directory from list Moves highlighted directory down in list
Add the entered directory to list
Moves highlighted directory up in list
A low level of configuration control can be imposed by separating file versions into specific directories. Because the directories are searched in the order shown, paths can be defined to ensure that you are accessing the appropriate version of a part. In the example listing above, the system first looks for each component in the user's home directory and subdirectories (/home/users/smith...), then a common project directory (/projectx/common...), and finally, the release directory (/projectx/release).
TIP
The order of the directories can dramatically affect the time it takes to open an assembly. If possible, you should include smaller directories with the most components first and larger directories with fewer components last.
17-14
Unigraphics NX
Partial Loading Issues

There are some issues relating to revisions which should be considered when using partial loading.
Sharing Components
Assume you are working in a concurrent engineering environment and have a loaded assembly that contains a partially loaded component owned by another user. If that user modifies and saves that component part to disk, your loaded assembly will become out of date.
17 Now, if you perform an operation in your assembly that requires that the shared part be fully loaded (i.e. making it the work part to interrogate a feature), you
will receive a message informing you that the part is not in sync with the one on disk and the part will automatically be reopened with the new version.
/class/assembly/t01/activities/mounting_bracket
If the component had been fully loaded, an error message would not be received until an attempt is made to save the part.
Legacy Parts
When loading an assembly that was last saved in a prior release, the system will automatically convert fully loaded components to the current version and recognize them as being modified. Normally, when you save an assembly, the system will also save the fully loaded components that have been modified. Because the partially loaded components were not updated to the new version, they will not be saved.
17-15
Closing Assembly Component Parts

The FileCloseSelected Parts option lets you selectively close (unload) components in an assembly. The upper section of the dialog box lets you specify what component parts to close and the lower section lets you specify how they will be closed.
17
List all loaded component parts or top level only
Close only parts selected or whole assembly tree
If on, you will not be warned if a selected part has been modified
Close all parts in the session
If the component part you are closing (unloading) has been modified while it was the work part, you will be asked if you really want to close the part. If you agree to close (unload) the component part, you will lose the modifications you made to the part and the changes won't be reflected in the piece part file stored on disk.
17-16
Unigraphics NX
Reopening Component Parts

In a concurrent engineering environment, one designer may be working on a loaded assembly which references a component part that another designer is simultaneously modifying. The FileCloseReopen Selected Parts option lets you selectively update loaded components with their counterparts on disk. It can be utilized in the following situation.
1 Early in the morning, Designer A starts working on an assembly that references comp3. assembly
17
comp.1 2
comp.2
comp.3
Later in the morning, while Designer A is still working on the assembly, Designer B revises comp3 and saves it.
comp.3
FileSave Updated part is saved to disk
At lunchtime, Designer A reopens comp3 while the assembly is still open. FileCloseReopen Selected Parts : comp3 assembly
comp.1
comp.2
comp.3
The reopen command updates comp3 from disk, and it will contain the edits made earlier by Designer B.
17-17
The top portion of the Reopen Part dialog box lets you specify what component will be reopened. The bottom portion of the dialog box lets you specify how the component will be reopened.
17
List of loaded components that can be reopened.
Specifies whether reopen should affect part or whole assembly
If on, you will not be warned if selected part has been modified before it is loaded from disk.
Reopens all parts in session that have been changed on disk.
After you reopen the parts, an Information window will list the names of the parts, their status before they were reopened, and their status after they were reopened.
17-18
Unigraphics NX
Substituting Components
As you are going through design iterations and revising your assembly, it may be necessary to replace an existing component with a different part. In other words, you will want to change the pointer in the assembly so that it references another a component part which is located at the same origin and orientation. NOTE: A component substitution can destroy the relationship between the component and any associated data such as dimensions, mating conditions, and WAVE interpart references. There are some situations in which this can be avoided that will be discussed later. There are three different ways to substitute a component which will be discussed in this lesson.
D D D
17
Assemblies"Components"Substitute Component Use the Open As toggle in the Reopen Part dialog box. Use OpenComponent As option in the Assembly Navigator popup menu.
The Unique Identifier (UID)

When the system finds a component with the correct name, it performs a second check before loading it. There is an internal file identifier, referred to as a UID (Unique IDentifier), that ensures that the component that has been found is the genuine article, or at least a copy of it. A new UID is not assigned (and thus, associativity is maintained) in the following cases:
D D D
When you copy or move the file in the operating system. When you save the file into another directory using the same name. When you perform a FileSave As, as with a Seedpart.
17-19
Allow Substitution
When you open an assembly and the system finds a component that happens to have the same name but a different UID, the opening will fail unless Allow Substitution has been toggled on in the Load Options dialog box.
17
The Allow Substitution option enables a component to be loaded into an assembly even though it has a different UID, or history. It could be a completely different part created by another user.
17-20
Unigraphics NX
NOTE: If the new component has no common history (different UID) with the substituted component, data in the assembly will lose its associativity to the original component (mating constraints, WAVE interpart references, etc.).
Substituting Components Using Substitute

Components may be substituted using the Substitute Component option under AssembliesComponents.
17
If the replacement part has a common history with the original part (same UID), associativity is maintained. The Remove and Add operation is a nonassociative operation, regardless of the of the history (UID) of the parts involved. Mating conditions and WAVE interpart references will be lost. If the current part and the replacement part have the same UID, associativity can be preserved if the Maintain Mating option is used. All mating conditions and WAVE interpart references will be maintained assuming the relevant geometry exists in both parts. All drafting objects will revert to their retain annotation state and all Manufacturing data associativity will be lost. If the parts involved have different UIDs, Mating Condition associativity can still be maintained if Alternates are defined for them (Alternates are addressed later in this lesson).
17-21
The Substitute option allows you to assign a name, reference set, and layer option for the new component as it is substituted.
17
NOTE: To substitute a component with a part that has a different UID, Allow Substitution must be toggled ON in the Load Options.
17-22
Unigraphics NX
Substituting Components Using Reopen

A loaded component can also be replaced with another part by choosing FileCloseReopen Selected Parts and using the Open As option.
List of loaded components
17
The component part to be replaced must be selected from the list. After choosing OK, the system will ask you to select the unloaded replacement part. If the replacement part has a common history with the original part (same UID), associativity is maintained. If the replacement part does not have a common history (different UID), associativity is lost. NOTE: To Reopen a component with a part that has a different UID, Allow Substitution must be toggled ON in the Load Options.
17-23
Substituting Components Using the Assembly Navigator

An unloaded component can be replaced using OpenComponent As in the popup menu of the Assembly Navigator.
17
As in the case of the reopening a part, if the replacement part has a common history with the part you are replacing (the same UID), associativity is maintained. Otherwise, associativity is lost. NOTE: Once again, to replace a component with a part that has a different UID, Allow Substitution must be toggled ON in the Load Options.
17-24
Unigraphics NX
Activity 2 - Substituting Components

Design Intent: Suppose another designer has copied a caster fork component part (using FileSave As), renamed it to casterforkmod, and modified it. Now you are required to incorporate this modified fork into your assembly. In this activity you will substitute this new fork into your caster assembly using the three different methods described earlier and note the effect on component associativity.
17
Step 1 Open the part dau_caster_2_assm. Step 2 Replace the caster fork using the Substitute and Maintain Mating options.
-
Choose AssembliesComponentsSubstitute Component. Select the green dau_caster_2_fork from the screen or the Assembly Navigator. Choose OK. Choose Maintain Mating. Select Choose Part File, select dau_casterforkmod from the parts directory and choose OK.
The Substitute Component dialog box will allow you to specify information about the new component similar to the Add Existing Part dialog box.
17-25
Choose OK to accept the defaults.
The fork is replaced and mating conditions are maintained because casterforkmod is a version of casterfork (same UID). Step 3 Close All Parts without saving any of them. Step 4 Open dau_caster_2_assm again. Step 5 Replace the caster fork using Reopen.
-
17
Choose FileCloseReopen Selected Parts. Toggle Open As to ON. Choose dau_caster_2_fork from the list of loaded parts and OK.
Select dau_casterforkmod from the parts directory, then OK.
The fork is replaced and mating conditions are maintained because casterforkmod is a version of casterfork (same UID). Step 6 Close All Parts without saving any of them. Step 7 Open the caster assembly again without loading any components.
-
Choose FileOptionsLoad Options.
17-26
Unigraphics NX
Set the Load Components option to No Components and choose OK. Open dau_caster_2_assm.
NOTE: You will not see anything in the graphics area because No Components was specified in the Load Options. Step 8 Replace the fork using the Assembly Navigator.
-
In the assembly navigator, select the dau_caster_2_fork node with Mouse Button 3 and choose OpenComponent As.
17
Select Choose Part File and select the part dau_caster-fork-mod from the parts directory and choose OK. Select the dau_caster_2_assm node in the Assembly Navigator and choose OpenAssembly with Mouse Button 3.
17-27
Note again that all associativity is maintained! You can choose InformationAssemblies Mating Conditions to verify this. Step 9 Close All Parts without saving any of them. Step 10 Open the caster assembly again and load all components.
-
Choose FileOptionsLoad Options. Set the Load Components option to All Components and choose OK. Open dau_caster_2_assm.
17
Step 11 Replace the caster fork again using the Substitute and Remove and Add options.
-
Choose AssembliesComponentsSubstitute Component. Select dau_caster_2_fork from the screen or from the Assembly Navigator as the component to be replaced and choose OK.
A warning message will appear to remind you that you will lose associative links when you remove and add a component.
17-28
Unigraphics NX
Choose Remove and Add. Select Choose Part File, select dau_casterforkmod from the parts directory, and choose OK.
The Substitute Component dialog box will allow you to specify information about the new component similar to the Add Existing Part dialog box.
-
Choose OK to accept the defaults.
An Update Failure List appears indicating that all mating constraints involving the fork have been deleted..
17
Choose OK.
NOTE: The substitute component will use the origin and orientation of the original component. Step 12 Close All Parts without saving them.
17-29
Alternate Mating Conditions

You may have a situation in which you are required to substitute a part in an assembly that is mated with many other components. If the replacement part is not a version of the part you are replacing (different UID), you will lose all of the mating constraints involving this part and would be forced to recreate them. By defining mating Alternates, you can substitute a part in an assembly while maintaining the mating conditions, regardless of the part history. To accomplish this, you must Define alternates in the assembly for the component you will be replacing by choosing AssembliesComponents"Define Mating Alternates. This is done by interactively assigning a name to the objects (faces, datums, edges) used in the mating constraints for that component. You can then assign the same names to the corresponding objects in the new replacement part using FormatAttributeName. When you substitute, the new part will inherit the existing mating conditions and maintain the associativity regardless of the part history or the substitution method used (Reopen, Open Component As, or Substitute with the Maintain Mating option). If the objects in the replacement part are not named ahead of time, you can use the Verify option to perform the substitution by interactively selecting objects in the new component that correspond to those used in the mating constraints of the existing component.
17
17-30
Unigraphics NX
Defining Alternates
The Define Names dialog box allows you to identify the objects that are used in the mating constraints of the component you will be replacing. The dialog box lists the mating conditions of the part you are replacing and the constraints of the selected condition. The system highlights the object used for the selected constraint and prompts you to enter a name for it.
List all constraints or only those that have not yet been identified
17
Mating Conditions
Constraints of highlighted condition
Enter Name
After a name is entered, you will continue to be prompted to enter names for objects in the other constraints until all objects have been identified.
17-31
Activity 3 - Defining and Verifying Alternates

In this activity, you are required to substitute a shaft used in the freewheel assembly of a bicycle with a redesigned shaft from a different supplier. The new shaft was created from scratch and has a different part history so substituting it directly will result in a loss of nine associative mating constraints (five sprockets and four spacers are mated to the existing shaft). In order to preserve the mating constraints you will Define and Verify Alternates. Step 1 Open the part dau_freewheel_assm from the parts directory. Start the Modeling application and verify the Assemblies application is ON.
17
Part you will replace
Shaft
Step 2 Define Alternates for the existing shaft.

-
Choose Assemblies"ComponentsDefine Mating Alternates. In the assembly navigator, select dau_fwshaft as the component to be replaced and OK.
The Define Names dialog box will display the mating conditions and constraints involving the shaft and prompt you to enter a name for the cylindrical face used for aligning the other components.
17-32
Unigraphics NX
Enter cyl in the Name in Component text field and press Enter.
17
If the shaft was partially loaded, the system will now fully load it. The next object used in a constraint is the datum plane.
17-33
Enter plane and press Enter.
17
The last object used in a mating constraint involving the shaft is the planar face to which the largest sprocket is mated.
-
Enter face and press Enter.
17-34
Unigraphics NX
Next, you will get a message box reminding you that all of the mating conditions have been labelled.
Choose OK to dismiss the message.
Since the new component does not have the corresponding objects named, you will use the Verify option to substitute the component. Step 3 Substitute the new component using Verify Alternates.
-
17
Choose AssembliesComponentsVerify Mating Alternates. In the assembly navigator, select dau_fwshaft as the component to be replaced and OK. Select Choose Part File and select dau_fwnewshaft from the parts directory as the replacement part and choose OK. Indicate a position for the new shaft away from the assembly.
Indicate Position for new part
17-35
If necessary, choose OK in the Mating Conditions dialog box. It will not be used to verify alternates.
Now you will be prompted to select the objects in the replacement part that correspond to the named objects in the existing part.
-
Select the cylindrical face shown below on the replacement part to correspond with the object named CYL.
CYL
17
-
Select the datum plane shown to correspond with the object named PLANE.
PLANE
Select the planar face shown to correspond with the object named FACE.
FACE
17-36
Unigraphics NX
When all objects have been verified, you will see the statement Solution Mating Condition Solved at the bottom of the Verify Names dialog box.
Choose OK.
17
Choose OK to proceed with the substitution. Choose OK to accept the Substitute defaults.
The component is substituted and all mating constraints are maintained. Step 4 Close All Parts without saving them.
17-37
17
SUMMARY After creating an assembly, you may have to revise or substitute a component and change the name to the component part. In this lesson, you used different methods to revise components and the assemblies that use them. In this lesson you:
D D D D D
Revised a component and an assembly using Save Part As. Interrogated the modifications made to features of a part. Identified the Load Options that search for revised components. Substituted components in an existing assembly. Applied Alternate mating conditions when substituting components.
17-38
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Appendix A
A-1
Additional Projects
Project 1 A
A-2
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
Project 2
A-3
Additional Projects
Project 3 A
A-4
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-5
Additional Projects
Project 4 A
A-6
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-7
Additional Projects
A-8
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
Project 5
A-9
Additional Projects
Project 6 A
A-10
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-11
Additional Projects
Project 7 A
A-12
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-13
Additional Projects
Project 8 A
A-14
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-15
Additional Projects
Project 9 A
A-16
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-17
Additional Projects
Project 10 A
A-18
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-19
Additional Projects
Project 11 A
A-20
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-21
Additional Projects
Project 12 A
A-22
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-23
Additional Projects
Project 13 A
A-24
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-25
Additional Projects
Project 14 A
A-26
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-27
Additional Projects
Project 15 A
A-28
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-29
Additional Projects
Project 16 A
A-30
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-31
Additional Projects
Project 17 A
A-32
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-33
Additional Projects
Project 18 A
A-34
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
A-35
Additional Projects
Project 19 A this project, you can practice BottomUp Assembly Modeling to create an In assembly for a plastic phone.
D D D
All existing piece parts are in the plastic subdirectory. Create any new parts in your d## directory. Add mating conditions.
A-36
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
Step 1 Create a subassembly for the bottom portion of the phone using the piece parts shown below.
dau_flipfone_subassm_bottom
dau_flipfone_back_bottom dau_flipfone_front_bottom
dau_flipfone_pad_bottom
A-37
Additional Projects
Step 2 Create a subassembly for the top portion of the phone using the piece parts shown below.
dau_flipfone_subassm_top
dau_flipfone_back_top dau_flipfone_front_top
dau_flipfone_pad_top
A-38
Unigraphics NX
Additional Projects
Step 3 Create the top level assembly using the two subassemblies and the piece parts shown.
dau_flipfone_antenna
dau_flipfone_subassm_top
dau_flipfone_cap
dau_flipfone_hinge
dau_flipfone_cap dau_flipfone_subassm_bottom
A-39
Additional Projects
A-40
Unigraphics NX
System Topics
System Topics
Appendix B
There are utilities and customization files which affect the interface and behavior of the assembly functionality. This appendix covers these topics which would normally be the responsibility of a system administrator.
B-1
System Topics
Enabling Interpart Modeling

By default, Interpart Expressions, the Wave Geometry Linker, and the Promotion of Bodies feature are disabled. These options can be enabled in either of the two customer defaults files (ug_english.def and ug_metric.def). The following line in the ug_english.def and ug_metric.def files controls the availability of Interpart Expressions and the Wave Geometry Linker. Valid options for this setting are yes and no. Assemblies_AllowInterPart: yes The following line controls the availability of the Promotion of Bodies feature. Valid options are yes and no. Assemblies_AllowPromotions: yes The default setting for the Delay Interpart Updates toggle can also be defined in these files. Valid options are on and off. Assemblies_InitialUpdateDelay: off
B-2
Unigraphics NX
System Topics
File Versioning
Versioning rules will enable the system to load the latest version of components in any assembly based on a file naming scheme established at your company. When the rules are defined in the customer defaults file, the Load Latest" option must also be turned on in the load options. To define the versioning rules, you must define the portion of the filename that is the core (never changes) and which portion is the revision.
Regular Expressions
Version rules are defined using a modified form of Regular Expressions". It is beyond the scope of this class to teach regular expression formatting. There are several Special Characters" that may be used in the format of your version rules. They are listed below. ? * + . | () [] = = = = = = = = 0 or 1 0 or more 1 or more Any Character Or (As in this or that) Define a section Define a set Range
The use of Sets is crucial to your ability to establish correct version rules. A few examples are shown below. [a-z0-9] = One lower case letter or number [a-z0-9]+ = One or more lower case letters or numbers in any order [a-z]+[0-9]+ = One or more lower case letters followed by one or more numbers [a-hj-np-z] = Any lower case letter except i and o [mejx] = Any one of these letters
B-3
System Topics
File Versioning Example

In the following example, the part names consist of a core section of lower case letters followed by an underscore and a revision section defined by a revision number. Below are three versions of the same part. abc_1.prt abc_2.prt abc_3.prt
To define the rules that describe the above naming convention, the customer defaults files (ug_english.def and ug_metric.def) must be modified. These files contain a section reserved for Part Name Versions where five lines must be changed. Here is an example of how it would need to be set up for a specific versioning scheme. Assemblies_PartNameFormat: You must specify the format of the part name in terms of regular expression pattern matching. Each set of Parentheses represents a section. Assemblies_PartNameFormat: ([a-z]+_)([0-9]) The first section is ([a-z]+_). The [a-z] is any lower case letter and the +" means that one or more letters are allowed. The _" means that the letters will always be followed by an underscore character. The next section ([0-9]) is any number and that there can be only one digit. (If you wanted to allow more digits, you would follow it with a +".) Assemblies_PartNameSubstitution: This determines what portion of the file is the core portion of the file name (does not change). Based on the pairs of parentheses, you enter two backslashes and the section number. Assemblies_PartNameSubstitution: \\1 The first section is the core portion of the filename, it will never change. Assemblies_PartNameMatch: Specify which section of the file name must match and which section may vary. This is a bit repetitive, but necessary.
B-4
Unigraphics NX
System Topics
Assemblies_PartNameMatch: \\1([0-9]) The portion of the filename that must match is in the first section. The portion that is allowed to vary may be any number. Assemblies_VersionSubstitution: Which portion of the version section is actually the version. This is also determined by sets of parenthesis in the revision section. Assemblies_VersionSubstitution: \\1 In the version section, the first set of parenthesis indicates version. Assemblies_VersionType: The versioning scheme being used. Available choices are; MILITARY, NUMERIC, REVERSE_NUMERIC, ALPHABETIC, REVERSE_ALPHABETIC, ALPHANUMERIC. Assemblies_VersionType: NUMERIC A number sequence starting with 1 and progressing to larger numbers. NOTE: In an ALPHANUMERIC sort, versioning will sort letters before numbers. This is a different than most normal sort algorithms. Quantifiers can be specified to allow only a certain number of characters. Instead of using [0-9][0-9][0-9] to represent three digits, it can be written with a quantifier as [0-9]{3} The list of quantifiers is shown below.
D D D D
{n,m} At least n and no more than m {n,} At least n {,m} May have 0, but no more than m {m} Exactly m
B-5
System Topics
B
B-6
Unigraphics NX
Appendix C
The following pages list the various operators that may be used in expressions.
C-1
Operators
There are several types of operators that you may use in the expression language.
Arithmetic Operators + * / % ^ = Addition Subtraction and Negative Sign Multiplication Division Modulus Exponential Assignment Other Operators Example p2 = p5 + p3 p2 = p5 p3 p2 = p5 * p3 p2 = p5 / p3 p2 =p5 % p3 p2 = p5^2 p2 = p5
> < >= <= == != ! && ||
Greater Than Less Than Greater Than or Equal Less Than or Equal Equal Not Equal Negate Logical AND Logical OR
C-2
Unigraphics NX
Precedence and Associativity

In the table below, operators in the same row have equal precedence while operators in the following rows have less precedence.
Precedence and Associativity Operators ^ - (change sign) * + > == && || = Right to Left / < != >= <= % Left to Right Associativity Right to Left
When using operators with the same precedence in an equation without parameters, use lefttoright or the righttoleft rule from the table. For example: X = 90 - 10 + 30 X = 110 (not 50) X = 90 - (10 + 30) X = 50
C-3
Builtin Functions
You may also use the builtin functions in expressions. Builtin functions include trigonometric, exponential, and factorial functions. Functions are also provided for unit conversion.
Builtin Functions for Unit Conversion Name cm ft grd in km Description cm(x) converts x from centimeters into the default units of the part file. ft(x) converts x from feet into the default units of the part file. grd(x) converts x from gradients to degrees. in(x) converts x from inches into the default units of the part file. km(x) converts x from kilometers into the default units of the part file. mc(x) converts x from microns into the default units of the part file. min(x) converts x from minutes into degrees. ml(x) converts x from mils into the default units of the part file. mm(x) converts x from millimeters into the default units of the part file. mtr(x) converts x from meters into the default units of the part file. sec(x) converts x from seconds into degrees. yd(x) converts x from yards into the default units of the part file.
mc min ml mm mtr sec yd
Scientific Notation
You can also enter a statement in scientific notation. The value you enter must contain a positive or negative sign. For example, you can enter: 2e+5 which is the same as the value 200000 2e-5 which is the same as the value .00002
C-4
Unigraphics NX
Builtin Functions Available in the System Name abs acos asin atan atan2 ceil cos cosh deg exp fact floor hypot log log10 pi() rad sin sinh sqrt tan tanh trnc Absolute Value, abs(x) = |x| Arc Cosine, acos(x) = arc cos(x), (result in radians) Arc Sine, asin(x) = arc sin(x), (result in radians) Arc Tangent, atan(x) = arc tan(x), (result in radians) Arc Tangent, atan2(x, y) = arc tan(x / y), (result in radians) Ceiling, ceil(x) = smallest integer greater than or equal to x Cosine, cos(x) = cos(x), (x must be in degrees) Hyperbolic Cosine, cosh(x) = cosh(x) Degree Conversion, deg(x) converts x from radians to degrees. Exponential, exp(x) = ex Factorial, fact(x) = x! Floor, floor(x) = largest integer less than or equal to x Hypotenuse, hypot (x, y) = x2 + y2 Natural Logarithm, log(x) = ln (x) = loge (x) Common Logarithm, log10(x) = log10(x) pi (value=3.14159265358979) Radian Conversion, rad(x) converts x from degrees to radians Sine, sin(x) = sin(x), (x must be in degrees) Hyperbolic Sine, sinh(x) = sinh(x) Square Root, sqrt (x) = x Tangent, tan(x) = tan(x), (x must be in degrees) Hyperbolic Tangent, tanh(x) = tanh(x) Truncate, trnc(x) removes any fractional portion (all digits to the right of the decimal point) from the number x Description
C-5
C-6
Unigraphics NX
Glossary
Glossary
ABS - Absolute coordinate system. Absolute Coordinate System - Coordinate system in which all geometry is located from a fixed or absolute zero point. active view - One of up to 49 views per layout in which you can directly work. angle - In Unigraphics, an angle measured on the XY plane of a coordinate system is positive if the direction that it is swept is counterclockwise as viewed from the positive Z axis side of the XY plane. An angle swept in the opposite direction is said to be negative. arc - An incomplete circle; sometimes used interchangeably with the term circle." ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange. It is a set of 8bit binary numbers representing the alphabet, punctuation, numerals, and other special symbols used in text representation and communications protocol. aspect ratio - The ratio of length to height which represents the change in size of a symbol from its original. assembly - A collection of piece parts and subassemblies representing a product. In Unigraphics, an assembly is a part file which contains components. assembly part - A Unigraphics part file which is a userdefined, structured combination of subassemblies, components and/or objects. associativity - The ability to tie together (link) separate pieces of information to aid in automating the design, drafting, and manufacture of parts in Unigraphics. attributes - Pieces of information that can be associated with Unigraphics geometry and parts such as assigning a name to an object. block font - A Unigraphics character font which is the default font used for creating text in drafting objects and dimensions.
GL
GL-1
Glossary
body - Class of objects containing sheets and solids (see solid body and sheet body). bottomup modeling - Modeling technique where component parts are designed and edited in isolation of their usage within some higher level assembly. All assemblies using the component are automatically updated when opened to reflect the geometric edits made at the piece part level. boundary - A set of geometric objects that describes the containment of a part from a vantage point. CAD/CAM - Computer Aided Design/Computer Aided Manufacturing. category, layer - A name assigned to a layer, or group of layers. A category, if descriptive of the type of data found on the layers to which it is assigned, will assist the user in identifying and managing data in a part file. chaining - A method of selecting a sequence of curves which are joined endtoend. circle - A complete and closed arc, sometimes used interchangeably with the term arc." component - A collection of objects, similar to a group, in an assembly part. A component may be a subassembly consisting of other, lower level components. component part - The part file or master" pointed to by a component within an assembly. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and referenced, not copied, by the assembly. A separate Unigraphics part file that the system associates with a component object in the assembly part. cone direction - Defines the cone direction using the Vector Subfunction. cone origin - Defines the base origin using the Point Subfunction. half angle - The half vertex angle defines the angle formed by the axis of the cone and its side. constraints - Refer to the methods you can use to refine and limit your sketch. The methods of constraining a sketch are geometric and dimensional.
GL
GL-2
Unigraphics NX
Glossary
construction points - Points used to create a spline. Construction points may be used as poles (control vertices), defining points, or data points. See POLES, DEFINING POINTS, and DATA POINTS. control point - Represents a specific location on an existing object. A line has three control points: both end points and the midpoint of the line. The control point for a closed circle is its center, while the control points for an open arc are its end and midpoints. A spline has a control point at each knot point. A control point is a position on existing geometry. Any of the following points: 1. Existing Points 2. Endpoints of conics 3. Endpoints and midpoints of open arcs 4. Center points of circles 5. Midpoints and endpoints of lines 6. Endpoints of splines. convert curve - A method of creating a bcurve in which curves (lines, arcs, conics or splines) may be selected for conversion into a bcurve. Coordinate System - A system of axes used in specifying positions (CSYS). counterclockwise - The righthand rule determines the counter clockwise direction. If the thumb is aligned with the ZC axis and pointing in the positive direction, counterclockwise is defined as the direction the fingers would move from the positive XC axis to the positive YC axis. current layout - The layout currently displayed on the screen. Layout data is kept in an intermediate storage area until it is saved. curve - A curve in Unigraphics is any line, arc, conic, spline or bcurve. A geometric object; this may refer to a line, an arc, a conic, or a spline. defaults - Assumed values when they are not specifically defined. defining points - Spline construction points. Splines created using defining points are forced to pass through the points. These points are guaranteed to be on the spline. degreeoffreedom arrows - Arrowlike indicators that show areas that require more information to fully constrain a sketch. design in context - The ability to directly edit component geometry as it is displayed in the assembly. Geometry from other components can be selected to aid in the modeling. Also referred to as edit in place.
GL
GL-3
Glossary
dimensional constraint - This is a scalar value or expression which limits the measure of some geometric object such as the length of a line, the radius of an arc, or the distance between two points. directory - A hierarchical file organization structure which contains a list of filenames together with information for locating those files. displayed part - The part currently displayed in the graphics window. edit in place - See design in context. emphasize work part - A color coding option which helps distinguish geometry in the work part from geometry in other parts within the same assembly. endpoint - An endpoint of a curve or an existing point. expression - An arithmetic or conditional statement that has a value. Expressions are used to control dimensions and the relationships between dimensions of a model. face - A region on the outside of a body enclosed by edges. feature - An allencompassing term which refers to all solids, bodies, and primitives. file - A group or unit of logically related data which is labeled or named" and associated with a specified space. In Unigraphics, parts, and patterns are a few types of files. filtering - See object filtering. font box - A rectangle or box" composed of dashed line objects. The font box defines the size, width and spacing of characters belonging to a particular font. font, character - A set of characters designed at a certain size, width and spacing. font, line - Various styles of lines and curves, such as solid, dashed, etc.
GL
GL-4
Unigraphics NX
Glossary
free form feature - A body of zero thickness. (see body and sheet body) generator curve - A contiguous set of curves, either open or closed, that can be swept or revolved to create a body. geometric constraint - A relationship between one or more geometric objects that forces a limitation. For example, two lines that are perpendicular or parallel specifies a geometric constraint. grid - A rectangular array of implied points used to accurately align locations which are entered by using the screen position" option. guide curve - A set of contiguous curves that define a path for a sweep operation. virtual intersection - Intersection formed by extending two line segments that do not touch to the position that they cross. The line segments must be nonparallel and coplanar. inflection - A point on a spline where the curve changes from concave to convex, or vice versa. interactive step - An individual menu in a sequence of menus used in performing a Unigraphics function. isometric view (TfrISO) - Isometric view orientation - one where equal distances along the coordinate axes are also equal to the view plane. One of the axes is vertical. knot points - The defining points of a spline. Points along a Bspline, representing the endpoints of each spline segment. layer - A layer is a partition of a part. Layers are analogous to the transparent material used by conventional designers. For example, the user may create all geometry on one layer, all text and dimensions on a second, and tool paths on a third. layout - A collection of viewports or window areas, in which views are displayed. The standard layouts in Unigraphics include one, two, four or six viewports.
GL
GL-5
Glossary
layouts - Standard layouts are available to the user. These include: L1 - Single View, L2 - Two Views, L3 - Two Views, L4 - Four Views, L6 - Six Views. Information window - The window used in listing operations, such as Info. loaded part - Any part currently opened and in memory. Parts are loaded explicitly using the FileOpen option and implicitly when they are used in an assembly being opened. menu - A list of options from which the user makes a selection. model space - The coordinate system of a newly created part. This is also referred to as the absolute coordinate system." Any other coordinate system may be thought of as a rotation and/or translation of the absolute coordinate system. name, expression - - The name of an expression is the single variable on the left hand side of the expression. All expression names must be unique in a part file. Each expression can have only one name. See expression. objects - All geometry within the Unigraphics environment. offset face - A Unigraphics surface type created by projecting (offsetting) points along all the normals of a selected surface at a specified distance to create a true" offset. options - A number of various alternatives (functions, modes, parameters, etc.) from among which the user can choose. origin - The point X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 0 for any particular coordinate system. parametric design - Concept used to define and control the relationships between the features of a model. Concept where the features of the model are defined by parameters. part - A Unigraphics file containing a .prt extension. It may be a piece part containing model geometry, a subassembly, or a toplevel assembly.
GL
GL-6
Unigraphics NX
Glossary
part or model - A collection of Unigraphics objects which together may represent some object or structure. partially loaded part - A component part which, for performance reasons, has not been fully loaded. Only those portions of the component part necessary to render the higher level assembly are initially loaded (the reference set). point set - A distribution of points on a curve between two bounding points on that curve. Point Subfunction Menu - A list of options (methods) by which positions can be specified in Unigraphics. readonly part - A part for which the user does not have write access privilege. real time dynamics - Produces smooth pan, zoom, and rotation of a part, though placing great demand on the CPU. Refresh - A function which causes the system to refresh the display list on the viewing screen. This removes temporary display items and fills in holes left by Blank or Delete. righthand rule, conventional - The righthand rule is used to determine the orientation of a coordinate system. If the origin of the coordinate system is in the palm of the right fist, with the back of the hand lying on a table, the outward extension of the index finger corresponds to the positive Y axis, the upward extension of the middle finger corresponds to the positive Z axis, and the outward extension of the thumb corresponds to the positive X axis. righthand rule for rotation - The righthand rule for rotation is used to associate vectors with directions of rotation. When the thumb is extended and aligned with a given vector, the curled fingers determine the associated direction of rotation. Conversely, when the curled fingers are held so as to indicate a given direction of rotation, the extended thumb determines the associated vector. screen cursor (cursor) - A marker on the screen which the user moves around using some position indicator device. Used for indicating positions, selecting objects, etc. Takes the form of a fullscreen cross. sheet - A object consisting of one or more faces not enclosing a volume. A body of zerothickness. Also called sheet body.)
GL
GL-7
Glossary
sketch - A collection of geometric objects that closely approximates the outline of a particular design. You refine your sketch with dimensional and geometric constraints until you achieve a precise representation of your design. The sketch can then be extruded or revolved to obtain a 3D object or feature. Sketch Coordinate System (SCS) - The SCS is a coordinate system which corresponds to the plane of the sketch. When a sketch is created the WCS is changed to the SCS of the new sketch. solid body - An enclosed volume. A type of body (see Body). spline - A smooth freeform curve. stored layout - The last saved version of a layout. stored view - The last saved version of a view. string - A contiguous series of lines and/or arcs connected at their end points. subassembly - A part which both contains components and is itself used as a component in higherlevel assemblies. surface - The underlying geometry used to define a face on a sheet body. A surface is always a sheet but a sheet is not necessarily a surface (see sheet body). The underlying geometry used to define the shape of a face on a sheet. system - The Unigraphics System.
GL
temporary part - An empty part which is optionally created for any component parts which cannot be found in the process of opening an assembly. topdown modeling - Modeling technique where component parts can be created and edited while working at the assembly level. Geometric changes made at the assembly level are automatically reflected in the individual component part when saved. trim - To shorten or extend a curve. trimetric view (TfrTri) - A viewing orientation which provides you with an excellent view of the principal axes. In Unigraphics II, the trimetric view has the Zaxis vertical. The measure along the Xaxis is 7/8 of the measure along Z, and the measure along the Yaxis is 3/4 of the measure along Z.
GL-8
Unigraphics NX
Glossary
Unigraphics - A computer based graphics system for computeraided design, drafting, manufacturing, and engineering produced by UGS. units - The unit of measure in which you may work when constructing in Unigraphics. Upon log on, you may define the unit of measure as inches or millimeters. upgraded component - A component which was originally created preV10 but has been opened in V10 and upgraded to remove the duplicate geometry. version - A term which identifies the state of a part with respect to a series of modifications that have been made to the part since its creation. view - A particular display of the model. View parameters include view orientation matrix; center; scale; X,Y and Z clipping bounds; perspective vector; drawing reference point and scale. Eight standard views are available to the user: Top, Front, Right, Left, Bottom, Back, TfrISO (topfrontright isometric), and TfrTri (topfrontright trimetric). view dependent edit - A mode in which the user can edit a part in the current work view only. view dependent modifications - Modifications to the display of geometry in a particular view. These include erase from view and modify color, font and width. view dependent geometry - Geometry created within a particular view. It will only be displayed in that view. WCS - Work Coordinate System. WCS, work plane - The WCS (Work Coordinate System) is the coordinate system singled out by the user for use in construction, verification, etc. The coordinates of the WCS are called work coordinates and are denoted by XC, YC, ZC. The XCYC plane is called the work plane. Work Coordinate System - See WCS. work layer - The layer on which geometry is being constructed. You may create objects on only one layer at a time.
GL
GL-9
Glossary
work part - The part in which you create and edit geometry. The work part can be your displayed part or any component part which is contained in your displayed assembly part. When displaying a piece part, the work part is always the same as the displayed part. work view - The view in which work is being performed. When the creation mode is view dependent, any construction and view dependent editing that is performed will occur only in the current work view. XC axis - Xaxis of the work coordinate system. YC axis - Yaxis of the work coordinate system. ZC axis - Zaxis of the work coordinate system.
GL
GL-10
Unigraphics NX
Index
Index
A
ABS, GL-1 Absolute Coordinate System, GL-1 Active View, GL-1 Activities Activating and Using the Assembly Navigator, 6-14 Add Objects to Sketch, 1-36 Adding Geometric Constraints to the Project, 1-28 Applying Design Intent, 1-47 Applying the Copy/Paste Feature, 5-20 Auto Creating Geometric Constraints, 1-43 Constraining Tangent Curves, 1-49 Constraining the Perimeter of a Sketch, 1-56 Controlling Heat Transfer in a Cooling Pipe, 1-60 Copying a Sketch, 5-24 Creating a Family of Standard Parts - Excel, 16-10 Creating a Family of Standard Parts - Xess, 16-15 Creating a Mirror Feature, 5-12 Creating a Windshield Fluid Reservoir, 12-29 Creating Interpart Expressions, 9-9 Designing in Context of an Assembly, 8-16 Dragging Sketch Objects, 2-14 Edit Defining Strings, 3-5 Editing a Link, 8-41 Editing the Adjustment Angle, 1-16 Editing the Timestamp of a Link, 8-46 In-Process Parts, 8-31 Internal & External Taper Directions, 12-24 Load Options and Reference Sets, 7-35 Mass Replacement of Reference Sets, 7-24 Mating Conditions, Remember Constraints, 14-38 Mating the Nut Cracker Components, 14-24 Rect. Instance Arrays & Mirrored Body, 5-4 Replacing Reference Sets in an Assembly, 7-19 Substituting Components, 17-25 Suppressing and Deleting Sketches, 3-10 Taper Solid, 12-18 Wave Geometry Linker - Mirror Body, 8-34 Windshield Fluid Reservoir, 11-9 Angle, GL-1
Arc, GL-1 ASCII, GL-1 Aspect Ratio, GL-1 Assemblies, GL-1 application, 6-2 check clearances, 6-28 component properties, 6-21 open by proximity, 6-33 pulldown menu, 6-3 reports update, 17-6 where used, 17-7 toolbar, 6-4 top-down , 8-3 working in context within, 8-11 Assembly Modeling, interpart modeling, 8-27 Assembly Navigator, pop-up menu, 6-10 Associativity, C-3, GL-1 Attribute, GL-1
B
Blend, tips and techniques, 13-4 Body, GL-2 Bottom-Up Modeling, GL-2 Boundary, GL-2 Broken Links, 8-39 Builtin, Functions, C-4
C
Calculator Capabilities, 4-3 Category, Layer, GL-2 Chaining, GL-2 Check clearances, 6-28 Circle, GL-2 Cliff Edge Blends, 13-13 Component, GL-2 Part, GL-2 properties, 6-21
IN
IN-1
Index Components, create new, 8-5 Conditional, Expressions, 4-11 Conditional Expressions, 4-10 Cone Direction, GL-2 Origin, GL-2 Constraints, GL-2 Geometric, 1-2, 1-7, 1-19, 1-26, 3-4 geometric displaying, 1-23 removing, 1-23 Construction Points, GL-3 Control Point, GL-3 Convert, Curves to BCurves, GL-3 Coordinate Systems, GL-3 Sketch, GL-8 Counterclockwise, GL-3 Current Layout, GL-3 Cursor, GL-7 Curve, GL-3 Endpoint, GL-4 Expressions, GL-4 Calculator Capabilities, 4-3 interpart, concepts of, 9-2 Names, GL-6 overriding, 9-4 referencing, 9-3
F
Face, GL-4 Features, GL-4 File, GL-4 File Versioning, B-3 Filtering, GL-4 Font Box, GL-4 Character, GL-4 Line, GL-4 Free Form Feature, GL-5
D
Defaults, GL-3 Defining Points, GL-3 Degreeoffreedom Arrows, 1-2, GL-3 Delete, Expressions, 4-6 Deleting Parent Geometry, 8-39 Design in Context, GL-3 Dimension Constraints, GL-4 Dimensions, 1-4 Direction, Cone, GL-2 Directory, GL-4 Displayed Part, GL-4
G
Generator Curve, GL-5 Geometric Constraint, GL-5 Geometry Linker, geometry types, 8-14 Grid, GL-5 Guide Curve, GL-5
H
Half Angle, GL-2
I
Implementation of Design Standards, class standards, -5 Inflection, GL-5 Instance, create, mirror body, 5-2, 5-9, 5-17 Interpart Expressions, 9-2 overriding, 9-4 partial loading and , 9-15 referencing, 9-3 resolving references, 9-15 tips and recommended practices, 9-16
IN
Edit in Place, GL-4 Editing Links, 8-38 At Timestamp, 8-38 Break Link, 8-39 Emphasize Work Part, GL-4
IN-2
Unigraphics NX
Index Interpart Modeling, 8-27 enabling, B-2 Interpart modeling mold/die parts and, 8-29 weldments, 8-30 Introduction, -1 Operators, C-2 Origin, Cone, GL-2
P
Parametric Design, GL-6 Part, GL-6, GL-7 Part Families adding members to assembly, 16-19 concepts, 16-2 creating family members, 16-9 dialog, 16-4 procedure for creating, 16-3 pull-down menu, 16-7 spreadsheet, 16-7 terminology, 16-3 update parts, 16-8 Part files dau_angleadjbrckt_1, 1-11 dau_bbqcover_1, 3-5 dau_blend_frame, 13-7 dau_caster_2_assm, 17-25 dau_express, 4-7 dau_fixture_assm, 8-8 dau_fixture_bolt_up, 16-23 dau_fluid_reservoir, 12-29 dau_frame_1, 2-31 dau_freewheel_assm, 17-32 dau_hexbolt_fam, 16-10, 16-15 dau_hole_punch_assm, 6-14 dau_iges_1, 1-36 dau_perim_1, 1-60 dau_pipevise, 1-43 dau_roller_assm, 17-8 dau_seedpart_in, 1-47, 4-22 dau_skt_perimeter, 1-56 dau_straightslot_1, 1-49 dau_switchbase_1, 2-50 dau_taper, 12-18 dau_taper2, 12-24 dau_vise_assm, 7-25 Part files - New ***_angleadjbrckt_1, 1-11, 1-28 ***_bbqcover_1, 3-5 ***_fluid_reservoir, 12-29 ***_frame_1, 2-31 ***_geo_express, 4-22 ***_hexbolt_fam, 16-10 ***_roller_assm, 17-8 ***_straightslot_1, 1-49 ***_switchbase_1, 2-50 Partially Loaded Part, GL-7
K
Knot Points, GL-5
L
Layer, GL-5 Layout, GL-5, GL-6 Listing Expressions, 4-6 Listing Window, GL-6 Load Options Allow Substitution, 17-20 defaults file, 17-13 partial loading interpart expressions and, 9-15 sharing components, 17-15 using legacy parts, 17-15 reference sets, 7-34 Loaded Part, GL-6
M
Mating Conditions Show Current Solution, 14-15 Show Mating Error , 14-16 Menu, GL-6 Mirror Body, create, 5-2, 5-9, 5-17 Model, GL-7 Model Space, GL-6 Molded parts, forged, 8-29
O
Object, GL-6 Offset, curve, 10-2 Offset Surface, GL-6 Open by Proximity, 6-33
IN
IN-3
Index Point Set, GL-7 Point Subfunction, GL-7 Precedence, C-3 Promotion of Bodies, enabling, B-2 Properties, component, 6-21 Spline, GL-8 Stored Layout, GL-8 Stored View, GL-8 String, GL-8 Subassembly, GL-8 Substituting components, 17-19 Allow Substitution Load Option, 17-20 using Open Component As, 17-24 using Reopen , 17-23 using Substitute, 17-21 Surface, GL-8 System, GL-8
R
ReadOnly Part, GL-7 Real Time Dynamics, GL-7 Reference Sets creation of, 7-9 default, 7-4 deleting, 7-33 editing, 7-32 empty reference set, 7-5 information on, 7-11 load options, 7-34 origin and orientation of, 7-10 renaming, 7-33 replacing, 7-15 simplified assembly, 7-6 sub-assemblies, 7-23 uses of, 7-2 Refresh, GL-7 Rename, Expressions, 4-6 Reports family of parts, 16-22 update, 17-6 where used, 17-7 Revisions, 17-2 load options and, 17-12 tracking by part number, 17-2 unique identifier (UID) and, 17-19 using Save As, 17-3 Right Hand Rule, GL-7 Rotation, GL-7
T
Tables, Builtin Constants and Functions, C-4 Temporary Part, GL-8 TfrISO, GL-5 TfrTri, GL-8 Top-Down Modeling, GL-8 Trim, GL-8
U
Unigraphics, GL-9 Unique Identifier (UID), 17-19 Units, GL-9 Upgrade, Component, GL-9
V
Variable Radius Blends, 13-2 Version, GL-9 Versioning Rules, B-3 View, GL-9 Isometric, GL-5 Trimetric, GL-8 Work, GL-10
S
SCS, GL-8
IN
Sheet, GL-7 Sketch, GL-8 constraining of, 1-1, 1-4, 2-1, 3-1 Coordinate System, GL-8 Sketching in Context, 8-12 Solid Body, GL-8
W
WCS, GL-9 Weldments, 8-30 Work Layer, GL-9
IN-4
Unigraphics NX
Index Work Part, GL-10
Y
YCAxis, GL-10
X
XCAxis, GL-10
Z
ZCAxis, GL-10
IN
IN-5
Index
IN
IN-6
Unigraphics NX
Reference Chart Tear Outs

These tear out reference charts are provided for your convenience.
Unigraphics NX
Student Profile
Design Applications Using Unigraphics
Name Employer U.S. citizen? Yes / No When is your planned departure time?________________am/pm Please answer the following questions as honestly as you can. We are concerned about providing training that meets your needs. If you have any additional comments please write them on the back of this form. 1. Job title: 2. Current responsibilities: 3. How long have you held these responsibilities? Years ______ Months ______ 4. How long have you been working with CAD/CAM/CAE systems? Years ______ 5. What other CAD/CAM/CAE systems are you familiar with? 6. Are you currently using Unigraphics? _______ Version _______ Hours per week? 7. What is the function of your CAD/CAM/CAE system (documentation, modeling, analysis, translation interface, etc.)? 8. What do you model in your Unigraphics part files (castings, assemblies, floor plans, etc.)? Date
9. Please list other completed CAD/CAM/CAE courses and the provider including Unigraphics CBT and CAST:
Course
Provider
10. Please check the box that best describes your current skill level in the various Unigraphics disciplines listed below. none Wireframe Modeling Solid Modeling Parametric Modeling Drafting Assemblies Manufacturing novice intermediate advanced future use
Additional Comments
Unigraphics NX
Design Applications Using Unigraphics Course Agenda
Day 1
Monday Morning
D Introduction & Overview D Lesson 1. Constraining Sketch
Afternoon
D Lesson 2. Sketch Management D Workbook Section 1 Project Description & Moldline Sketch
Day 2
Tuesday Morning
D Lesson 3. D Lesson 4. Additional Sketch Techniques Expressions
Afternoon
D Lesson 5. Duplicating Features D Workbook Section 2 Creating the Bottom Housing D Lesson 6. Assembly Functions
Day 3
Wednesday Morning
D Lesson 7. Reference Sets D Workbook Section 3 Creating the Assembly Part File D Lesson 8. TopDown Assembly Modeling
Afternoon
D Lesson 9. D Lesson 10. Interpart Expressions Offset Curves Creating the Upper Housing Creating the Impeller Part 1
D Workbook Section 4 D Workbook Section 5
Day 4
Thursday Morning
D D D D Lesson 11. Trim & Split Body Lesson 12. Face Operations Workbook Section 6 Creating the Impeller Part 2 Lesson 13. Variable & Cliff Edge Blends Creating the Impeller Part 3
D Workbook Section 7
Afternoon
D Lesson 14. Mating Conditions Creating the Impeller Part 4 Creating the Shaft Sub_Assembly D Workbook Section 8 D Workbook Section 9
Day 5
Friday Morning
D Lesson 15. D Lesson 16. Component Arrays Part Families Adding Hardware to the Assembly
D Workbook Section 10
Afternoon
D Lesson 17. Revisions & Substitutions Editing the Assembly Part File Applying a Rev. to the Assy. D Workbook Section 11 D Workbook Section 12
Unigraphics NX
Class Layers and Categories

The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.
Model Geometry
Object Type Solid Geometry Interpart Modeling Sketch Geometry Curve Geometry Reference Geometry Sheet Bodies Layer Assignment 1-20 15-20 21-40 41-60 61-80 81-100 Category Name SOLIDS LINKED_OBJECTS SKETCHES CURVES DATUMS SHEETS
Drafting Objects
Object Type Drawing Borders Layer Assignment 101-110 Category Name FORMATS
Engineering Disciplines
Object Type Mechanism Tools Finite Element Meshes and Engr. Tools Manufacturing Quality Tools Layer Assignment 121-130 131-150 151-180 181-190 Category Name MECH CAE MFG QA
Unigraphics NX
Line, Arc, and Circle Creation Methods

Line Creation
Note: When numbered picks are shown, this is usually not the only way the line may be created. Line between two points Select two points
Line through a point and horizontal, vertical, or at an angle to the WCS
S Define the first point S Define second point within the Snap Angle setting or S Enter the desired angle and press <Tab>. S Define a point S Select a line S Select limiting point/object
[May also select line, then point]
Line through a point and parallel, perpendicular, or at an angle to a line
1 2
Line through a point and tangent or normal to a curve
2 1
S Select a point S Select a curve S Select limiting point/object (if necessary)
Line tangent or perpendicular to two curves
Select two curves
Line tangent to a curve and parallel or perpendicular to a line A bisector line
2 1
S Select two curves S Select limiting point/object
Select two lines
Arc and Circle Creation

Note: When numbered picks are shown, this is usually not the only way the arc or circle can be created. Start point, end point, point on arc
2 1 3
S Define first point S Define second point S Define third point

3
Start point, end point, tangent object

1
S Define first point S Define second point S Select tangent object S Define start point S Select tangent object S Define end point
Start point, tangent object, end point
1 2 3
Arc center, start point, end point
3 1
S Define first point S Define second point S Define third point
Circle center, point on circle
2 1
S Define first point S Define second point
Circle center, tangent object

1 2
S Define point S Select tangent object
Unigraphics NX
Hot Key Chart

Hot Key CtrlA CtrlB CtrlC CtrlD CtrlE CtrlF CtrlG CtrlH CtrlI CtrlJ CtrlK CtrlL CtrlM Function Assembly Navigator Edit, Blank Copy Delete Tools, Expression Fit View Grip Execute Information, Object Edit, Object Display Format, Layer Settings Application, Modeling Hot Key CtrlN CtrlO CtrlP CtrlQ CtrlR CtrlS CtrlT CtrlU CtrlV CtrlW CtrlX CtrlY CtrlZ Function File, New File, Open File, Plot View, Operation, Rotate (full menu) File, Save Edit, Transform Execute User Function Paste Application, Gateway Cut Edit, Undo
CtrlShiftA CtrlShiftB CtrlShiftC CtrlShiftD CtrlShiftE CtrlShiftF CtrlShiftG CtrlShiftH CtrlShiftI CtrlShiftJ CtrlShiftK
File, Save As CtrlShiftN Edit, Blank, Reverse Blank CtrlShiftO All View, Curvature Graph CtrlShiftP CtrlShiftQ CtrlShiftR Format, Layout, Fit All CtrlShiftS Views Debug Grip CtrlShiftT High Quality Image CtrlShiftU CtrlShiftV CtrlShiftW CtrlShiftX CtrlShiftY CtrlShiftZ
Format, Layout, New Format, Layout, Open Tools, Macro, Playback Quick Shaded Image Tools, Macro, Record Toolsm Macro, Step Preferences, Selection Edit, Blank, Unblank All Of Part Format, Visible In View
Preferences, Object Edit, Blank, Unblank Se lected
CtrlShiftL CtrlShiftM Model Navigator
View, Operation, Zoom (full menu)
AltTab AltF4 F1 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Toggles Application Closes Active Window Help on Context View Current Dialog Information Window Refresh Quick Zoom Quick Rotate
CtrlAltB CtrlAltC CtrlAltM CtrlAltN CtrlAltW CtrlAltX
Tools, Boundary Tools, CLSF Application Manufactur ing Tools, Unisim Application Assemblies Tools, Lathe Cross-Sec tion
Unigraphics NX
Design Applications Using Unigraphics Training Course Evaluation

Name (Optional) Instructor Location Date Unigraphics NX
Please give your honest opinion about the training you have received during this class. Provide additional comments on the reverse side of this evaluation form. Please check the box if you would like your comments, regarding the training you just received, featured in our training publications. We will contact you if more information is needed. Hotel Accommodations (if applicable) Hotel name What was your overall impression of this hotel? Facilities - How would you rate the training facilities? Instruction - How would you rate the instruction? Was the instructor knowledgeable of the subject? Comments Poor 2 Poor 2 Poor 2 Poor 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7
1. Were the course objectives clearly defined and were they met? Please explain:
Yes
No
2. Were concepts effectively communicated so that you understand how to apply the software? No Please explain:
Yes
3. How well prepared do you now feel to use the functions covered in this course in your day to day activities? Please explain:
4. Were the student activities effective in learning Unigraphics? Please explain:
Yes
No
over
5. Was the workbook activity effective in reinforcing the concepts taught? Please explain:
Yes
No
6. What additional topics related to parametric design would you like to see covered in this course? Please explain:
7. Do you have any other suggestions on how the course could be improved? Please explain:
Yes
No
8. In order to continually improve our courseware a post class survey is conducted; would you be willing to participate in this survey. j (If you checked this box, make sure that your name is on this sheet.) Course - What was your overall impression? Additional Comments Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7
Unigraphics NX

Ug NX Workbook Student Manual Design Applications of Unigraphics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ug NX Workbook Student Manual Design Applications of Unigraphics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNIGRAPHICS

DESIGN APPLICATIONS USING UNIGRAPHICS

Proprietary & Restricted Rights Notices

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

EDS All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GL-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN-1

EDS All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Top Down assembly modeling. Interpart expressions. Geometric expressions. a feature.

the Load Options. Reference Sets. in Context.

DCreate DDesign DApply DTrim

Interpart modeling using the WAVE geometry linker.

a solid body. a variable blend.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

Course Overview DCreate DCreate

an offset face a taper features

DReorder DCreate DCreate

mating conditions between component part files simple part families

file saving conventions Curve Creation Primitives Features with Offsets

DSwept DWCS DLayer DForm

How to Use This Manual

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

The general format for lesson content is:

EDS All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

Classroom System Information

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

About Part File Naming

Class Part File Naming

EDS All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

dau_seedpart_in (Inches) dau_seedpart_mm (Millimeters)

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

EDS All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

Points and Coordinate Systems System Display Color

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

EDS All Rights Reserved

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

Design Applications Using Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Activity 1 - Toolbars in Gateway Application

Choose the Open icon.

Step 2 Display the Standard toolbar in the Gateway Application.

Click MB3 within toolbar area.

EDS All Rights Reserved